SERVICE HANDBOOK
MULTIFUNCTIONAL DIGITAL COLOR SYSTEMS
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c
File No. SHE060001J0 R060121A3400-TTEC Ver10_2008-08
Trademarks • • • • • •
• • • • • • •
The official name of Windows 95 is Microsoft Windows 95 Operating System. The official name of Windows 98 is Microsoft Windows 98 Operating System. The official name of Windows Me is Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition Operating System. The official name of Windows 2000 is Microsoft Windows 2000 Operating System. The official name of Windows XP is Microsoft Windows XP Operating System. Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, Windows Vista and the brand names and product names of other Microsoft products are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries. Apple, AppleTalk, Macintosh, and Mac are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries. PostScript is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated. NOVELL, NetWare, and NDS are trademarks or registered trademarks of Novell, Inc. Molykote is a registered trademark of Dow Corning Corporation. iCLASS is a trademark of HID Corporation. MIFARE is a trademark of Royal Philips Electronics. Other company names and product names in this manual are the trademarks of their respective companies.
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved Under the copyright laws, this manual cannot be reproduced in any form without prior written permission of TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION. No patent liability is assumed, however, with respect to the use of the information contained herein.
08/04
GENERAL PRECAUTIONS REGARDING THE SERVICE FOR e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c The installation and service should be done by a qualified service technician. 1) Transportation/Installation - When transporting/installing the equipment, employ four persons and be sure to hold the positions as shown in the figure. The equipment is quite heavy and weighs approximately 120 kg (264.55 lb.), therefore pay full attention when handling it.
-
Be sure not to hold the movable parts or units (e.g. the control panel, ADU or RADF) when transporting the equipment. Be sure to use a dedicated outlet with AC 110 V / 13.2 A, 115 V or 127 V / 12 A, 220-240 V / 8 A for its power source. The equipment must be grounded for safety. Select a suitable place for installation. Avoid excessive heat, high humidity, dust, vibration and direct sunlight. Provide proper ventilation since the equipment emits a slight amount of ozone. To insure adequate working space for the copying operation, keep a minimum clearance of 80 cm (32”) on the left, 80 cm (32”) on the right and 10 cm (4”) on the rear. The equipment shall be installed near the socket outlet and shall be accessible. Be sure to fix and plug in the power cable securely after the installation so that no one trips over it.
2) General Precautions at Service - Be sure to turn the power OFF and unplug the power cable during service (except for the service should be done with the power turned ON). - Unplug the power cable and clean the area around the prongs of the plug and socket outlet once a year or more. A fire may occur when dust lies on this area. - When the parts are disassembled, reassembly is the reverse of disassembly unless otherwise noted in this manual or other related documents. Be careful not to install small parts such as screws, washers, pins, E-rings, star washers, harnesses in the wrong places. - Basically, the equipment should not be operated with any parts removed or disassembled. - The PC board must be stored in an anti-electrostatic bag and handled carefully using a wristband since the ICs on it may be damaged due to static electricity. Caution: Before using the wristband, unplug the power cable of the equipment and make sure that there are no charged objects which are not insulated in the vicinity.
07/06
-
-
-
Avoid expose to laser beam during service. This equipment uses a laser diode. Be sure not to expose your eyes to the laser beam. Do not insert reflecting parts or tools such as a screwdriver on the laser beam path. Remove all reflecting metals such as watches, rings, etc. before starting service. Be sure not to touch high-temperature sections such as the exposure lamp, fuser unit, damp heater and areas around them. Be sure not to touch high-voltage sections such as the chargers, transfer belt, 2nd transfer roller, developer, high-voltage transformer, exposure lamp control inverter, inverter for the LCD backlight and power supply unit. Especially, the board of these components should not be touched since the electric charge may remain in the capacitors, etc. on them even after the power is turned OFF. Make sure that the equipment will not operate before touching potentially dangerous places (e.g. rotating/operating sections such as gears, belts pulleys, fans and laser beam exit of the laser optical unit). Be careful when removing the covers since there might be the parts with very sharp edges underneath. When servicing the equipment with the power turned ON, be sure not to touch live sections and rotating/operating sections. Avoid exposing your eyes to laser beam. Use designated jigs and tools. Use recommended measuring instruments or equivalents. Return the equipment to the original state and check the operation when the service is finished. Be very careful to treat the touch panel gently and never hit it. Breaking the surface could cause malfunctions.
3) Important Service Parts for Safety - The breaker, door switch, fuse, thermostat, thermofuse, thermistor, IC-RAMs including lithium batteries, etc. are particularly important for safety. Be sure to handle/install them properly. If these parts are short-circuited and their functions become ineffective, they may result in fatal accidents such as burnout. Do not allow a short-circuit or do not use the parts not recommended by Toshiba TEC Corporation. 4) Cautionary Labels - During servicing, be sure to check the rating plate and cautionary labels such as “Unplug the power cable during service”, “CAUTION. HOT”, “CAUTION. HIGH VOLTAGE”, “CAUTION. LASER BEAM”, etc. to see if there is any dirt on their surface and if they are properly stuck to the equipment. 5) Disposal of the Equipment, Supplies, Packing Materials, Used Batteries and IC-RAMs - Regarding the recovery and disposal of the equipment, supplies, packing materials, used batteries and IC-RAMs including lithium batteries, follow the relevant local regulations or rules. 6) When the option has been installed: When the EFI printer board has been installed, be sure to unplug the power cable before performing maintenance and inspection, otherwise troubles such as a communication error may occur. Caution: Dispose of used batteries and IC-RAMs including lithium batteries according to this manual. Attention: Se débarrasser de batteries et IC-RAMs usés y compris les batteries en lithium selon ce manuel. Vorsicht: Entsorgung der gebrauchten Batterien und IC-RAMs (inclusive der Lithium-Batterie) nach diesem Handbuch.
CONTENTS e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c
1. SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES ......................................... 1-1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5
Specifications....................................................................................................................... 1-1 Accessories ......................................................................................................................... 1-5 Options ................................................................................................................................ 1-6 Supplies ............................................................................................................................... 1-7 System List .......................................................................................................................... 1-8
2. ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE ........................................................ 2-1 2.1 Error Code List..................................................................................................................... 2-1 2.1.1 Jam........................................................................................................................... 2-1 2.1.2 Service call ............................................................................................................... 2-8 2.1.3 Error in Internet FAX / Scanning Function.............................................................. 2-14 2.1.4 Printer function error............................................................................................... 2-22 2.2 Self-diagnosis Modes ........................................................................................................ 2-24 2.2.1 Input check (Test mode 03).................................................................................... 2-26 2.2.2 Output check (test mode 03) .................................................................................. 2-34 2.2.3 Test print mode (test mode 04) .............................................................................. 2-37 2.2.4 Adjustment mode (05) ............................................................................................ 2-38 2.2.5 Setting mode (08) ................................................................................................. 2-107 2.2.6 Pixel counter......................................................................................................... 2-283
3. ADJUSTMENT .............................................................................................................. 3-1 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6
Adjustment Order (Image Related Adjustment)................................................................... 3-1 Adjustment of the Auto-Toner Sensor ................................................................................. 3-2 Performing Image Quality Control ....................................................................................... 3-4 Adjustment of Color Registration Control ............................................................................ 3-6 Adjustment of the transfer belt due to environmental factors .............................................. 3-7 Image Dimensional Adjustment ......................................................................................... 3-10 3.6.1 General description ................................................................................................ 3-10 3.6.2 Paper alignment at the registration roller ............................................................... 3-12 3.6.3 Printer related adjustment ...................................................................................... 3-16 3.6.4 Scanner related adjustment ................................................................................... 3-21 3.7 Image Quality Adjustment (Copying Function) .................................................................. 3-30 3.7.1 Automatic gamma adjustment ................................................................................ 3-30 3.7.2 Density adjustment ................................................................................................. 3-32 3.7.3 Color balance adjustment....................................................................................... 3-34 3.7.4 Gamma balance adjustment .................................................................................. 3-36 3.7.5 Offsetting adjustment for background / high density area processing.................... 3-37 3.7.6 Judgment threshold for ACS .................................................................................. 3-38 3.7.7 Sharpness adjustment............................................................................................ 3-38 3.7.8 Setting range correction ......................................................................................... 3-39 3.7.9 Setting range correction (Adjustment of background peak) ................................... 3-39 3.7.10 Adjustment of smudged/faint text ........................................................................... 3-40 3.7.11 Color Adjustment of Marker.................................................................................... 3-40 3.7.12 Beam level conversion setting................................................................................ 3-41 3.7.13 Maximum toner density adjustment to paper type.................................................. 3-42 3.7.14 Maximum text density adjustment .......................................................................... 3-42 3.7.15 Text/Photo reproduction level adjustment .............................................................. 3-43 3.7.16 Black reproduction switching at the Twin color copy mode .................................... 3-43 3.7.17 Background adjustment (Black Mode) ................................................................... 3-44 3.7.18 Black header density level adjustment ................................................................... 3-44 3.7.19 Black area adjustment in twin color copy mode ..................................................... 3-44 3.8 Image Quality Adjustment (Printing Function) ................................................................... 3-45 © 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c CONTENTS
1
3.9
3.10 3.11 3.12
3.13 3.14 3.15 3.16 3.17
3.18
3.8.1 Automatic gamma adjustment ................................................................................ 3-45 3.8.2 Gamma balance adjustment (Black Mode) ............................................................ 3-47 3.8.3 Color balance adjustment (Color Mode)................................................................. 3-49 3.8.4 Adjustment of smudged/faint text ........................................................................... 3-50 3.8.5 Upper limit value at Toner Saving Mode ................................................................ 3-50 3.8.6 Maximum toner density adjustment to paper type.................................................. 3-51 3.8.7 Image processing: Gamma correction table all clearing......................................... 3-51 3.8.8 Fine line enhancement switchover ......................................................................... 3-51 3.8.9 Filter switchover ..................................................................................................... 3-51 3.8.10 "PureBlack" threshold adjustment (PCL)................................................................ 3-52 3.8.11 "PureGray" threshold adjustment (PCL)................................................................. 3-52 3.8.12 "PureBlack/Gray" threshold adjustment (PS-Device color) .................................... 3-52 3.8.13 "PureBlack/Gray" threshold adjustment (PS-CIE Based color) .............................. 3-53 3.8.14 Toner limit threshold adjustment ............................................................................ 3-53 3.8.15 Screen switchover .................................................................................................. 3-53 3.8.16 Sharpness adjustment............................................................................................ 3-54 3.8.17 Quantization parameter for intermediate file creation............................................. 3-55 Image Quality Adjustment (Scanning Function) ................................................................ 3-56 3.9.1 Gamma balance adjustment .................................................................................. 3-56 3.9.2 Density adjustment ................................................................................................. 3-57 3.9.3 Background adjustment (Color Mode).................................................................... 3-59 3.9.4 Judgment threshold for ACS .................................................................................. 3-59 3.9.5 Sharpness adjustment............................................................................................ 3-60 3.9.6 Setting range correction ......................................................................................... 3-60 3.9.7 Setting range correction (Adjustment of background peak) ................................... 3-61 3.9.8 Fine adjustment of black density ............................................................................ 3-61 3.9.9 RGB conversion method selection ......................................................................... 3-62 3.9.10 Adjustment of brightness ........................................................................................ 3-62 3.9.11 Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction (black) ....................................... 3-63 3.9.12 Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction (color) ........................................ 3-63 Image Quality Adjustment (FAX Function) ........................................................................ 3-64 3.10.1 Density adjustment ................................................................................................. 3-64 High-Voltage Transformer Setting ..................................................................................... 3-65 3.11.1 General description ................................................................................................ 3-65 Adjustment of the Scanner Section ................................................................................... 3-66 3.12.1 Carriages ................................................................................................................ 3-66 3.12.2 Lens unit ................................................................................................................. 3-70 3.12.3 Belt tension adjustment for the scan motor ............................................................ 3-72 Adjustment of the Paper Feeding System ......................................................................... 3-73 3.13.1 Sheet sideways deviation caused by paper feeding .............................................. 3-73 Adjustment of the doctor-to-sleeve gap ............................................................................. 3-75 Adjustment of Gap between Transfer Belt Unit (TBU) Drive Gears .................................. 3-77 Adjustment of the Separation Plate Gap (Fuser unit) ........................................................ 3-79 Adjustment of the RADF (MR-3018).................................................................................. 3-81 3.17.1 Adjustment of RADF Position ................................................................................. 3-81 3.17.2 Adjustment of RADF Height ................................................................................... 3-86 3.17.3 Adjustment of Skew................................................................................................ 3-88 3.17.4 Adjustment of the Leading Edge Position .............................................................. 3-91 3.17.5 Adjustment of Horizontal Position .......................................................................... 3-92 3.17.6 Adjustment of Copy Ratio....................................................................................... 3-94 3.17.7 Adjustment of RADF Opening/Closing Sensor....................................................... 3-95 Adjustment of the Finisher (MJ-1101)................................................................................ 3-96 3.18.1 Adjusting the Alignment Position ............................................................................ 3-96 3.18.2 Adjusting the Stapling Position ............................................................................... 3-98 3.18.3 B4-size recycled paper mode settings ................................................................. 3-100
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c CONTENTS
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2
3.19 Adjustment of the Finisher (MJ-1030).............................................................................. 3-102 3.19.1 Adjusting the alignment position (Finisher unit).................................................... 3-102 3.19.2 Adjusting the staple position (Finisher unit).......................................................... 3-103 3.19.3 Adjusting the folding position (Saddle stitcher unit).............................................. 3-104 3.19.4 Fine adjustment of binding/folding position (Saddle stitcher unit) ........................ 3-107 3.19.5 Sensor output adjustment (Puncher unit) ............................................................. 3-107 3.19.6 Registering the number of punch holes (Puncher unit) ........................................ 3-108
4. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)............................................................................ 4-1 4.1 PM Support Mode................................................................................................................ 4-1 4.1.1 General description .................................................................................................. 4-1 4.1.2 Operational flow and operational screen .................................................................. 4-1 4.1.3 Work flow of parts replacement ................................................................................ 4-7 4.2 General Descriptions for PM Procedure .............................................................................. 4-8 4.3 Operational Items in Overhauling ........................................................................................ 4-9 4.4 Preventive Maintenance Checklist..................................................................................... 4-10 4.5 PM KIT............................................................................................................................... 4-25 4.6 Maintenance Part List ........................................................................................................ 4-26 4.7 Grease List ........................................................................................................................ 4-28 4.8 Precautions for Storing and Handling Supplies ................................................................. 4-29 4.8.1 Precautions for storing TOSHIBA supplies ............................................................ 4-29 4.8.2 Checking and cleaning of photoconductive drum................................................... 4-29 4.8.3 Checking and cleaning of drum cleaning blade and transfer belt cleaning blade... 4-30 4.8.4 Handling of transfer belt ......................................................................................... 4-30 4.8.5 Checking and cleaning of fuser belt and pressure roller ........................................ 4-31
5. TROUBLESHOOTING .................................................................................................. 5-1 5.1 Diagnosis and Prescription for Each Error Code ................................................................. 5-1 5.1.1 Paper transport jam (paper exit section) .................................................................. 5-1 5.1.2 Paper misfeeding ..................................................................................................... 5-2 5.1.3 Paper transport jam .................................................................................................. 5-8 5.1.4 Other paper jam ..................................................................................................... 5-16 5.1.5 Cover open jam ...................................................................................................... 5-20 5.1.6 RADF jam ............................................................................................................... 5-24 5.1.7 Finisher jam ............................................................................................................ 5-29 5.1.8 Paper feeding system related service call .............................................................. 5-49 5.1.9 Scanning system related service call ..................................................................... 5-55 5.1.10 Fuser unit related service call................................................................................. 5-56 5.1.11 Communication related service call........................................................................ 5-60 5.1.12 RADF related service call ....................................................................................... 5-62 5.1.13 Circuit related service call ...................................................................................... 5-62 5.1.14 Laser optical unit related service call ..................................................................... 5-65 5.1.15 Finisher related service call .................................................................................... 5-68 5.1.16 Image control related service call ........................................................................... 5-83 5.1.17 Copy process related service call........................................................................... 5-94 5.1.18 Other service call.................................................................................................... 5-97 5.1.19 Error in Internet FAX / Scanning Function.............................................................. 5-98 5.1.20 Printer function error............................................................................................. 5-112 5.2 Troubleshooting for the Image......................................................................................... 5-114 5.3 Replacement of PC Boards and HDD ............................................................................. 5-149 5.3.1 Replacing HDD..................................................................................................... 5-149 5.3.2 Replacing SYS board ........................................................................................... 5-153 5.3.3 Replacing SLG board ........................................................................................... 5-155 5.3.4 Replacing NVRAM (SYS board)........................................................................... 5-156 5.3.5 Replacing NVRAM (LGC board) .......................................................................... 5-159 5.3.6 Cautions when Data overwrite kit (GP-1060) is installed .................................... 5-160 © 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c CONTENTS
3
5.3.7 HDD information display....................................................................................... 5-161 5.4 Other errors ..................................................................................................................... 5-163 5.4.1 Operation cannot be performed (operation from the control panel is not successful) after installing the option(s) such as Wireless LAN module and/or Parallel board. ........................................................................................... 5-163 5.4.2 The connection to the Wireless LAN cannot be made even though it is set to “Enabled”.............................................................................................. 5-163 5.4.3 "Start page" cannot be printed when the firmware of the equipment or the system software of the EFI controller (GA-1210) is updated after the EFI controller (GA-1210) is installed in the equipment........................... 5-163 5.5 AES data Encryption Function Setting (Except for CND) ................................................ 5-164 5.5.1 Procedure for enabling data encryption function .................................................. 5-164 5.5.2 Procedure for disabling data encryption function ................................................. 5-167 5.5.3 Procedure for discarding HDD when data encryption function is enabled .......... 5-167
6. FIRMWARE UPDATING ............................................................................................... 6-1 6.1 Firmware Updating with Download Jig ................................................................................ 6-3 6.1.1 PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2 (48 MB) ............................................................................. 6-6 6.1.2 Writing the data to the download jig (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG) ............................... 6-22 6.1.3 K-PWA-DLS-320 .................................................................................................... 6-24 6.1.4 K-PWA-DLM-320.................................................................................................... 6-27 6.2 Firmware Updating with USB Storage Device ................................................................... 6-45 6.3 When Firmware Updating Fails ......................................................................................... 6-70 6.4 Appendix............................................................................................................................ 6-71
7. POWER SUPPLY UNIT ................................................................................................ 7-1 7.1 Output Channel ................................................................................................................... 7-1 7.2 Fuse..................................................................................................................................... 7-3 7.3 Configuration of Power Supply Unit..................................................................................... 7-4
8. REMOTE SERVICE....................................................................................................... 8-1 8.1 Auto Supply Order ............................................................................................................... 8-1 8.1.1 Outline ...................................................................................................................... 8-1 8.1.2 Setting Item .............................................................................................................. 8-1 8.1.3 Setting procedure ..................................................................................................... 8-3 8.1.4 Order Sheet Format ............................................................................................... 8-11 8.2 Service Notification ............................................................................................................ 8-13 8.2.1 Outline .................................................................................................................... 8-13 8.2.2 Setting .................................................................................................................... 8-13 8.2.3 Items to be notified ................................................................................................. 8-19
9. DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE ......................................................... 9-1 10. WIRE HARNESS CONNECTION DIAGRAMS ........................................................... 10-1 10.1 AC Wire Harness ............................................................................................................... 10-1 10.2 DC Wire Harness....................................................................................................... Appendix 10.3 Electric Parts Layout.................................................................................................. Appendix
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c CONTENTS
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
4 07/06
1.
2.
3.
SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/ SUPPLIES
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
1
2
ADJUSTMENT 3
4.
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM) 4
5.
TROUBLESHOOTING 5
6.
FIRMWARE UPDATING 6
7.
POWER SUPPLY UNIT 7
8.
REMOTE SERVICE 8
9.
DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE 9
10. WIRE HARNESS CONNECTION DIAGRAMS 10
1. 1.1
SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES 1
Specifications
yCopy process .......................... Indirect electrophotographic process (dry) yType......................................... Desktop type (Console type: when optional Paper Feed Pedestal (PFP) or optional Large Capacity Feeder (LCF) is installed.) yOriginal table ........................... Fixed type (the left rear corner used as guide to place originals) yAccepted originals ................... Original type: Sheets, books and 3-dimensional objects Note that when the optional Reversing Automatic Document Feeder is used, carbon, bounded or stapled originals cannot be accepted, and paper type of the original should be 35-157g/m2 (9.3 lb. Bond -58 lb. Cover) for single-sided copy and 50-157 g/m2 (13.3 lb. Bond -58 lb. Cover) for double-sided copy. Maximum size: A3/LD • Copy speed (Copies/min.) Plain paper (64 g/m2 to 105 g/m2 / 17 lb. Bond to 28 lb. Bond) e-STUDIO2500c Paper supply Paper size A4, LT B5, A5-R, ST-R A4-R, B5-R, LT-R B4, LG, FOLIO, COMPUTER A3, LD
Drawer 35 (25)
Bypass feed Size not Size specified specified 35 (25) 18 (15)
PFP 35 (25)
LCF (A4/LT only)
26 (20) 22 (17)
26 (20) 22 (17)
18 (15) 18 (15)
26 (20) 22 (17)
35 (25) -
18 (15)
18 (15)
18 (15)
18 (15)
-
PFP
LCF (A4/LT only)
e-STUDIO3500c Paper supply Paper size A4, LT B5, A5-R, ST-R A4-R, B5-R, LT-R B4, LG, FOLIO, COMPUTER A3, LD
Drawer 35 (35)
Bypass feed Size not Size specified specified 35 (25) 18 (15)
35 (11)
26 (26) 22 (22)
26 (20) 22 (17)
18 (15) 18 (15)
26 (26) 22 (22)
35 (35) -
18 (18)
18 (15)
18 (15)
18 (18)
-
PFP
LCF (A4/LT only)
e-STUDIO3510c Paper supply Paper size A4, LT B5, A5-R, ST-R A4-R, B5-R, LT-R B4, LG, FOLIO, COMPUTER A3, LD
Bypass feed Drawer 45 (35)
45 (35)
Size not specified 22 (18)
32 (26) 26 (22)
32 (26) 26 (22)
22 (18) 22 (18)
32 (26) 26 (22)
45 (35) -
22 (18)
22 (18)
22 (18)
22 (18)
-
Size specified
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
45 (35)
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES
1-1
* * * *
*
"-" means "Not acceptable". When originals are manually placed for single-sided, continuous copying. Plain paper is selected for the paper type. When the Reversing Automatic Document Feeder is used, the copying speeds of the equipment is only possible under the following conditions: • Original: A4 or LT (single-sided) • Mode: APS and Automatic density not selected, Plain paper mode • Reproduction ratio: 100% The values in ( ) can be realized in the color mode.
Thick paper / OHP film e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c Thick1 (106 g/m2 to 163 g/m2 / 28 lb. Bond to 60 lb. Cover (90 lb. Index)) Paper supply Paper size
*
Bypass feed Drawer
PFP
LCF (A4/LT only)
A4, LT B5, A4-R, ST-R
17.5 (17.5)
17.5 (17.5)
Size not specified 8.5 (8.5)
A4-R, B5-R, LT-R B4, LG, FOLIO, COMPUTER A3, LD
13 (13) 10.5 (10.5)
13 (13) 10.5 (10.5)
8.5 (8.5) 8.5 (8.5)
13 (13) 10.5 (10.5)
-
8.5 (8.5)
8.5 (8.5)
8.5 (8.5)
8.5 (8.5)
-
Size specified
17.5 (17.5)
17.5 (17.5) -
The LCF accepts paper weight from 64g/m2 to 105g/m2 (17 lb. Bond to 28 lb. Bond).
Thick 2 (164 g/m2 to 209 g/m2 / 61 lb. Cover to 77.3 lb. Cover (115.7 lb. Index)) Thick 3 (210 g/m2 to 256 g/m2 / 77.3 lb. Cover to 94.5 lb. Cover (141.4 lb. Index)) Thick 4 (257 g/m2 to 280 g/m2 / 94.5 lb. Cover to 100 lb. Cover (150 lb. Index)) Paper supply Paper size A4, LT B5, A4-R, ST-R A4-R, B5-R, LT-R B4, LG, FOLIO, COMPUTER A3, LD
Bypass feed Drawer
PFP
LCF (A4/LT only)
-
17.5 (17.5)
Size not specified 8.5 (8.5)
-
13 (13)
8.5 (8.5)
-
-
-
10.5 (10.5)
8.5 (8.5)
-
-
-
8.5 (8.5)
8.5 (8.5)
-
-
PFP
LCF (A4/LT only)
-
-
Size specified
-
OHP film Paper supply Paper size A4, LT
* * * *
Drawer -
Bypass feed Size not Size specified specified 14.5 (14.5) -
"-" means "Not acceptable". When originals are manually placed for single side, continuous copying. The bypass copying speed is measured with the paper size specified. The values in ( ) can be realized in the color mode.
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
1-2 07/06
*
System copy speed Copy mode Single-sided originals ↓ Single-sided copies Single-sided originals ↓ Double-sided copies Double-sided originals ↓ Double-sided copies Double-sided originals ↓ Single-sided copies
*
1 set 3 sets 5 sets 1 set 3 sets 5 sets 1 set 3 sets 5 sets 1 set 3 sets 5 sets
e-STUDIO2500c 24.35 (35.68) 60.13 (85.19) 94.15 (130.09) 31.87 (46.43) 68.30 (92.00) 104.60 (139.03) 65.34 (92.43) 138.60 (185.41) 211.12 (280.40) 58.13 (84.28) 125.69 (177.34) 193.70 (271.88)
Sec. e-STUDIO3500c 24.35 (34.14) 60.13 (69.96) 94.15 (103.57) 31.87 (42.58) 68.30 (78.86) 104.60 (115.84) 65.34 (89.58) 138.60 (163.56) 211.12 (235.75) 58.13 (83.29) 125.69 (151.25) 193.70 (218.54)
e-STUDIO3510c 19.75 (34.14) 48.00 (69.69) 74.37 (103.57) 27.03 (42.58) 56.19 (78.86) 85.56 (115.84) 62.43 (89.58) 120.69 (163.56) 179.31 (235.75) 56.66 (83.29) 109.56 (151.25) 162.63 (218.54)
* *
Shows the period of time from when the [START] button is pressed until the message "Ready" is displayed. (10 sheets of A4/LT size original are set on the RADF and one of the copy modes above is selected.) Setting: when in the Text/Photo mode with Automatic density and APS/AMS set to OFF, or when in the sort mode with paper fed from the 1st drawer. The Saddle Stitch Finisher and hole punch unit not installed. The values in ( ) are the speeds of when in the color mode.
•
Copy paper
*
Size
Weight
Special paper
ADU A3 to A5-R, FOLIO, LD to ST-R, COMPUTER, 13”LG, 8.5”x8.5”, 8K, 16K, 16K-R, 305×457mm, Full Bleed (12"x18")
Drawer PFP A3 to A5-R, FOLIO, LD to ST-R, COMPUTER, 13”LG,8.5”x8.5”, 8K, 16K, 16K-R
64 g/m2 to 256 g/m2 17 lb. Bond to 94.5 lb. Cover
-
LCF A4, LT
Bypass copy A3 to A5-R, FOLIO, LD to ST-R, COMPUTER, 13”LG, 8.5”x8.5”, 8K, 16K, 16KR, A6-R, 305x457mm, Full Bleed (12”x18”), SRA3 (320x450mm), 320x460mm (Non-standard or userspecified sizes can be set.), Extra large copy paper (up to 305x1200mm) * * Printing Function only
64 g/m2 to 163 g/m2 17 lb. Bond to 60 lb. Cover
64 g/m2 to 105 g/m2 17 lb. Bond to 28 lb. Cover
64 g/m2 to 280 g/m2 17 lb. Bond to 100 lb. Cover
-
-
-
OHP film, Labels, Tab paper (Special paper recommended by Toshiba TEC)
yFirst copy time ......................... e-STUDIO2500c: Approx. 6.5 sec. (Black), approx. 8.6 sec. (Color) e-STUDIO3500c: Approx. 6.5 sec. (Black), approx. 8.6 sec. (Color) e-STUDIO3510c: Approx. 5.2 sec. (Black), approx. 8.6 sec. (Color) yWarming-up time ..................... Approx. 99 sec. (Stand-alone, temperature: 20oC) yScanning speed....................... 45spm: Black (Text/Photo) 22spm: Black (Gray scale) 22spm: Color (Text/Photo) (When scanning single-sided A4/LT landscape originals using RADF) yMultiple copying....................... Up to 999 copies; Key in set numbers
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES
1-3 07/11
1
yReproduction ratio ................... Actual ratio: 100%±0.5% Zooming: 25 to 400% in increments of 1% (25 to 200% when using RADF) yResolution/Gradation............... Scanning: 600 dpi × 600 dpi Printing: Equivalent to 2400 dpi × 600 dpi (black print, except gray scale) 600 dpi × 600 dpi (color print / gray scale) yEliminated portion.................... Leading edges: 3.0±2.0 mm, Side/trailing edges: 2.0±2.0 mm (black copy) Leading edges: 5.0±2.0 mm, Side/trailing edges: 3.0±2.0 mm (color copy) Leading / trailing edges: 5.0±2.0 mm, Side edges: 5.0±2.0 mm (black / color print) yPaper feeding .......................... Standard drawers: 2 drawers (stack height 60.5 mm, equivalent to 550 sheets; 64 to 80 g/ m2 (17 to 22 lb. Bond)) PFP: Option (One drawer or two: stack height 60.5 mm, equivalent to 550 sheets; 64 to 80 g/m2 (17 to 22 lb. Bond)) LCF: Option (Stack height 137.5 mm x 2: equivalent to 2500 sheets; 64 to 80 g/m2 (17 to 22 lb. Bond)) Bypass feeding: Stack height 11 mm: equivalent to 100 sheets; 64 to 80 g/m2 (17 to 22 lb. Bond) yCapacity of originals in the reversing automatic document feeder (Option) .................................................. A3 to A5-R, LD to ST-R: 100 sheets / 80 g/m2 (Stack height 16 mm or less) yAutomatic duplexing unit ......... Stackless, Switchback type yToner supply ............................ Automatic toner density detection/supply Toner cartridge replacing method yDensity control......................... Automatic density mode and manual density mode selectable in 11 steps yWeight ..................................... Approximately 120 kg (264.55 lb.) yPower requirements ................ AC 110 V / 13.2 A, 115 V or 127 V / 12 A 220-240 V / 8 A (50/60 Hz) * The acceptable value of each voltage is ±10%. yPower consumption................. 1.5 kW or less (100 V series), 17 kW or less (200 V series) * The electric power is supplied to the RADF, Finisher, PFP and LCF through the equipment. yTotal counter............................ Electronical counter yDimensions of the equipment...................... See the figure below (W 699 x D 761 x H 759 (mm)) * When the tilt angle of the control panel is 45 degrees. D
45° H
W
Fig. 1-1 e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
1-4
1.2
Accessories
Unpacking/Setup instruction Operator’s manual Operator's manual pocket Power cable Warranty sheet Setup report PM sticker Process unit Control panel stopper Rubber plug Blind seal (small / large) CD-ROM Developer material (Y, M, C, K) Approval sheet Screw
*
1 set 1 set (except for ASU) 1 pc. 1 pc. 1 pc. (for NAD) 1 set (for NAD, MJD and CND) 1 pc. (for MJD) 4 pcs. 1 pc. 6 pcs. 3 pcs. /1 pc. 2 pcs. (except for ASU) 1 pc. each (for CND) 1 set (for CND) 1 pc.
Machine version NAD: North America, Brazil MJD: Europe AUD: Australia ASD: Asia, Hong Kong, Latin America TWD: Taiwan SAD: Saudi Arabia ASU: Saudi Arabia, Asia CND: China KRD: Korea ARD: Argentina JPD: Japan
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES
1-5 06/10
1
1.3
Options
Platen cover Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (RADF) Large Capacity Feeder (LCF) Paper Feed Pedestal (PFP) Drawer module Finisher Saddle stitch finisher Hole punch unit Staple cartridge
Bridge kit Work table Damp heater kit EFI Printer board FAX unit 2nd line for fax unit 512 MB Expansion memory (Main memory) 256 MB Expansion memory (Page memory) 512 MB Expansion memory Wireless LAN module Bluetooth module Antenna Data overwrite kit e-BRIDGE ID Gate (HID iCLASS) e-BRIDGE ID Gate (MIFARE) Harness kit for coin controller Desk
KA-3511PC MR-3018 KD-1019A4/LT/C KD-1018/C MY-1031/C MJ-1101 MJ-1030 MJ-6101N/E/F/S (for MJ-1101) MJ-6004N/E/F/S (for MJ-1030) STAPLE-2400 (for MJ-1101) STAPLE-2000 (for MJ-1030) STAPLE-600 (for saddle stitcher of MJ-1030) KN-3500 KK-3511 MF-3500CU/CE GA-1210/E GD-1210NA/EU/AU/AS/C/TW/KR GD-1160NA/EU-N/C/TW GC-1250 GC-1260 GC-1230 (for GA-1210/E) GN-1041 GN-2010 GN-3010 GP-1060/C KP-2004 KP-2005 GQ-1110 MH-1700
Notes: • The bridge kit (KN-3500) is necessary for installation of the finisher (MJ-1101 or MJ-1030). • The finisher (MJ-1101) is necessary for installation of the hole punch unit (MJ-6101N/E/F/S). • The finisher (MJ-1030) is necessary for installation of the hole punch unit (MJ-6004N/E/F/S). • The antenna (GN-3010) is necessary to enable the wireless LAN module (GN-1041) and the bluetooth module (GN-2010). • The main memory can be expanded using 512 MB Expansion memory (GC-1250), and the Page memory can be expanded using 256 MB Expansion memory (GC-1260) respectively.
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
1-6 08/04
1.4
Supplies
Drum Developer material (K) Developer material (Y) Developer material (M) Developer material (C) Toner cartridge (K)
Toner cartridge (Y)
Toner cartridge (M)
Toner cartridge (C)
Toner bag
OD-FC35 D-FC35K D-FC35Y D-FC35M D-FC35C PS-ZTFC35K (for North America, Central and South America) PS-ZTFC35EK (for Europe) PS-ZTFC35DK (for Australia and Asia) PS-ZTFC35CK (for China) PS-ZTFC35Y (for North America, Central and South America) PS-ZTFC35EY (for Europe) PS-ZTFC35DY (for Australia and Asia) PS-ZTFC35CY (for China) PS-ZTFC35M (for North America, Central and South America) PS-ZTFC35EM (for Europe) PS-ZTFC35DM (for Australia and Asia) PS-ZTFC35CM (for China) PS-ZTFC35C (for North America, Central and South America) PS-ZTFC35EC (for Europe) PS-ZTFC35DC (for Australia and Asia) PS-ZTFC35CC (for China) PS-TBFC35 (expect for Europe and China) PS-TBFC35E (for Europe) PS-TBFC35C (for China)
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES
1-7
1
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES
1-8
08/04
Finisher MJ-1101
Staple Cartridge STAPLE-2400
Staple Cartridge STAPLE-600
Saddle stitch finisher MJ-1030
Staple Cartridge STAPLE-2000
Hole Punch Unit MJ-6101 N/E/F/S
256MB Expansion memory GC-1260
Hole Punch Unit MJ-6004 N/E/F/S
Wireless LAN module GN-1041
FAX unit GD-1210 NA/AU/AS/ EU/C/TW
Drawer Module MY-1031/C
Bluetooth module GN-2010
Antenna GN-3010
Data overwrite kit GP-1060/C
2nd Line for FAX unit GD-1160 NA/EU-N/C/TW
512MB Expansion memory GC-1250
Bridge Kit KN-3500
Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (RADF) MR-3018
Paper Feed Pedestal (PFP) KD-1018/C
Platen Cover KA-3511PC
Large Capacity Feeder (LCF) KD-1019 A4/LT/C
512 MB Expansion memory GC-1230
EFI Printer board GA-1210/E
Damp Heater MF-3500CU/CE
Work Table KK-3511
e-BRIDGE ID Gate KP-2005
e-BRIDGE ID Gate KP-2004
1.5 System List
Fig. 1-2
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2.
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2.1
Error Code List
The following error codes is displayed at the upper right of the screen when the “CLEAR PAPER” or “CALL SERVICE” symbol is blinking.
2.1.1
Jam
Error code E010
Classification Paper exit jam
E011
Other paper jam
E020
Paper exit jam
E030
Other paper jam
E061
E062
E063
E064
E065
E090 E0A0
Contents Jam not reaching the exit sensor: The paper which has passed through the fuser unit does not reach the exit sensor. Transfer belt paper-clinging jam: The paper after the 2nd transfer is clinging to the transfer belt, or a paper jam occurred between the registration roller and the paper clinging detection sensor. Stop jam at the exit sensor: The trailing edge of the paper does not pass the exit sensor after its leading edge has reached this sensor. Power-ON jam: The paper is remaining on the paper transport path when power is turned ON. Incorrect paper size setting for 1st drawer: The size of paper in the 1st drawer differs from size setting of the equipment. Incorrect paper size setting for 2nd drawer: The size of paper in the 2nd drawer differs from size setting of the equipment. Incorrect paper size setting for PFP upper drawer: The size of paper in the 3rd drawer differs from size setting of the equipment. Incorrect paper size setting for PFP lower drawer: The size of paper in the 4th drawer differs from size setting of the equipment. Incorrect paper size setting for bypass tray: The size of paper in the bypass tray differs from size setting of the equipment. Image data delay jam: Image data to be printed cannot be prepared. Image transport ready time-out jam: Image data to be printed cannot be sent.
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Troubleshooting P. 5-1
P. 5-16
P. 5-1
P. 5-17 P. 5-17
P. 5-17
P. 5-17
P. 5-17
P. 5-17
P. 5-18 P. 5-18
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2-1
2
Error code E110
Classification Paper misfeeding
E120
E130
E140
E150
E160
E190
E200
Paper transport jam
Contents
Troubleshooting
ADU misfeeding (Paper not reaching the registration sensor): The paper which has passed through ADU does not reach the registration sensor during duplex printing. Bypass misfeeding (Paper not reaching the bypass feed sensor): Paper fed from the bypass tray does not reach the bypass feed sensor. 1st drawer misfeeding (Paper not reaching the 1st drawer feed sensor): The paper fed from the 1st drawer does not reach the 1st drawer feed sensor. 2nd drawer misfeeding (Paper not reaching the 2nd drawer feed sensor): The paper fed from the 2nd drawer does not reach the 2nd drawer feed sensor. PFP upper drawer misfeeding (Paper not reaching the PFP upper drawer feed sensor): The paper fed from the PFP upper drawer does not reach the PFP upper drawer feed sensor. PFP lower drawer misfeeding (Paper not reaching the PFP lower drawer feed sensor): The paper fed from the PFP lower drawer does not reach the PFP lower drawer feed sensor. LCF misfeeding (Paper not reaching the LCF feed sensor): The paper fed from the LCF does not reach the LCF feed sensor. 1st drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the registration sensor): The paper does not reach the registration sensor after it has passed the 1st drawer feed sensor.
P. 5-2
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
P. 5-3
P. 5-3
P. 5-4
P. 5-5
P. 5-6
P. 5-7
P. 5-8
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2-2
Error code E210
Classification Paper transport jam
E220
E270
E300
E310
E320
E330
E340
E350
E360
E3C0
E3D0
E3E0
E400 E410
Cover open jam
Contents
Troubleshooting
2nd drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the registration sensor): The paper does not reach the registration sensor after it has passed the 1st drawer feed sensor. 2nd drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the 1st drawer feed sensor): The paper does not reach the 1st drawer feed sensor after it has passed the 2nd drawer feed sensor. Bypass transport jam (Paper not reaching the registration sensor): Paper fed from the bypass tray and passed through the bypass feed sensor does not reach the registration sensor. PFP upper drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the registration sensor): The paper does not reach the registration sensor after it has passed the 1st drawer feed sensor. PFP upper drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the 1st drawer feed sensor): The paper does not reach the 1st drawer feed sensor after it has passed the 2nd drawer feed sensor. PFP upper drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the 2nd drawer feed sensor): The paper does not reach the 2nd drawer feed sensor after it has passed the PFP upper drawer feed sensor. PFP lower drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the registration sensor): The paper does not reach the registration sensor after it has passed the 1st drawer feed sensor. PFP lower drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the 1st drawer feed sensor): The paper does not reach the 1st drawer feed sensor after it has passed the 2nd drawer feed sensor. PFP lower drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the 2nd drawer feed sensor): The paper does not reach the 2nd drawer feed sensor after it has passed the PFP upper drawer feed sensor. PFP lower drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the PFP upper drawer feed sensor): The paper does not reach the PFP upper drawer feed sensor after it has passed the PFP lower drawer feed sensor. LCF transport jam (Paper not reaching the registration sensor): Paper fed from the LCF and passed through the 1st drawer feed sensor does not reach the registration sensor. LCF transport jam (Paper not reaching the 1st drawer feed sensor): Paper fed from the LCF and passed through the 2nd drawer feed sensor does not reach the 1st drawer feed sensor. LCF transport jam (Paper not reaching the 2nd drawer feed sensor): Paper fed from the LCF and passed through the LCF feed sensor does not reach the 2nd drawer feed sensor. Jam access cover open jam: The jam access cover has opened during printing. Front cover open jam: The front cover has opened during printing.
P. 5-8
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
P. 5-9
2 P. 5-8
P. 5-8
P. 5-9
P. 5-10
P. 5-8
P. 5-9
P. 5-10
P. 5-11
P. 5-8
P. 5-9
P. 5-10
P. 5-20 P. 5-20
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2-3
Error code E420
Classification Cover open jam
E430 E440 E450 E480 E510
Paper transport jam (ADU section)
E520
E550
Other paper jam
E712
RADF jam
E713
E714
E721
E722
E724
E725
E731
E860 E870
Contents
Troubleshooting
PFP side cover open jam: The PFP side cover has opened during printing. ADU open jam: The ADU has opened during printing. Side cover open jam: The side cover has opened during printing. LCF side cover open jam: The LCF side cover has opened during printing. Bridge unit open jam: The bridge unit has opened during printing. Jam not reaching the ADU entrance sensor: The paper does not reach the ADU entrance sensor after it is switchbacked in the exit section. Stop jam in the ADU: The paper does not reach the ADU exit sensor after it has passed the ADU entrance sensor. Paper remaining jam on the transport path: The paper is remaining on the transport path when printing is finished (caused by a multiple paper feeding). Jam not reaching the original registration sensor: The original fed from the original feeding tray does not reach the original registration sensor.
P. 5-21
Cover open jam in the read ready status: Jam caused by opening of the RADF jam access cover or front cover while the RADF is waiting for the scanning start signal from the equipment. Feed signal reception jam: The feed signal is received even no original exists on the original feeding tray. Jam not reaching the read sensor: The original does not reach the read sensor after it has passed the registration sensor (when scanning obverse side) or the reverse sensor (when scanning reverse side). Jam not reaching the original exit/reverse sensor (during scanning): The original which passed the read sensor does not reach the original exit/reverse sensor when it is transported from the scanning section to exit section. Stop jam at the original registration sensor: The trailing edge of the original does not pass the original registration sensor after its leading edge has reached this sensor. Stop jam at the read sensor: The trailing edge of the original does not pass the read sensor after its leading edge has reached this sensor. Stop jam at the original exit/reverse sensor: The trailing edge of the original does not pass the original exit/reverse sensor after its leading edge has reached this sensor. RADF jam access cover open: The RADF jam access cover has opened during RADF operation. RADF open jam: RADF has opened during RADF operation.
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
P. 5-21 P. 5-22 P. 5-22 P. 5-23 P. 5-12
P. 5-13
P. 5-18
P. 5-24
P. 5-24
P. 5-25
P. 5-25
P. 5-26
P. 5-26
P. 5-27
P. 5-27
P. 5-27 P. 5-28
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2-4
Error code E910
Classification Finisher jam (Bridge unit)
E920
E930
E940
E9F0
Finisher jam (Punch unit)
EA10
Finisher jam (Finisher section)
EA20
EA21
EA30
EA31
EA32
EA40
EA50
Contents
Troubleshooting
Jam at the bridge unit transport sensor 1: The paper does not reach the bridge unit transport sensor 1 after it has passed the exit sensor. Stop jam at the bridge unit transport sensor 1: The trailing edge of the paper does not pass the bridge unit transport sensor 1 after its leading edge has reached the sensor. Jam at the bridge unit transport sensor 2: The trailing edge of the paper does not reach the bridge unit transport sensor 2 after its leading edge has reached the bridge unit transport sensor 1. Stop jam at the bridge unit transport sensor 2: The trailing edge of the paper does not pass the bridge unit transport sensor 2 after its leading edge has reached the bridge unit transport sensor 2. Punching jam: Punching is not performed properly. [MJ-1030 (when MJ-6004 is installed)] [MJ-1101 (when MJ-6101 is installed)] Paper transport delay jam: The paper which has passed the bridge unit does not reach the inlet sensor. [MJ-1030/1101] Paper transport stop jam: (1) The paper does not pass through the inlet sensor. [MJ-1030] (2) The paper has passed through the inlet sensor but does not reach or pass the feed path sensor or processing tray sensor. [MJ-1030] Paper transport delay jam: The paper which has passed through the inlet sensor does not reach the transport sensor. [MJ-1101] Paper size error jam: Paper does not reach the sensor because the paper is shorter than spec. [MJ1101] Power-ON jam: (1) Paper exists at the inlet sensor when power is turned ON. [MJ-1030] (2) Paper exists at the feed path sensor or processing tray sensor when power is turned ON. [MJ-1030] Transport path paper remaining jam: The paper which has passed through the inlet sensor does not reach the transport sensor. [MJ-1101] Exit paper remaining jam: The paper is remaining on the finishing tray when the power is turned ON. [MJ-1101] Door open jam: The upper/front cover of the finisher section or the upper/ front door of the puncher section has opened during printing. [MJ-1030] Cover open error: The front cover or stationary tray cover is opened during paper transport. [MJ-1101] Stapling jam: Stapling is not performed properly. [MJ-1030/1101]
P. 5-29
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
P. 5-29
P. 5-30
P. 5-30
P. 5-43
P. 5-31
P. 5-32
P. 5-33
P. 5-34
P. 5-34
P. 5-35
P. 5-35
P. 5-37
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2-5
2
Error code EA60
Classification Finisher jam (Finisher section)
EA70 EA80 EA90
Finisher jam (Saddle stitcher section)
EAA0
EAB0
EAC0
EAD0
Other paper jam
EAE0
Finisher jam
EB30
EB50
Paper transport jam
EB60
ED10
Finisher jam
ED11
ED12 ED13
Contents
Troubleshooting
Early arrival jam: The inlet sensor detects the paper earlier than a specified timing. [MJ-1030/1101] Stack exit belt home position error: The stack exit belt is not at the home position. [MJ-1101] Stapling jam: Stapling is not performed properly. [MJ-1030] Door open jam: The delivery cover or inlet cover has opened during printing [MJ-1030]. Power-ON jam: Paper exists at No.1 paper sensor, No. 2 paper sensor, No.3 paper sensor, vertical path paper sensor or delivery sensor when power is turned ON. [MJ-1030] Transport stop jam: The paper which passed through the inlet sensor does not reach or pass No.1 paper sensor, No. 2 paper sensor, No.3 paper sensor or delivery sensor. [MJ-1030] Transport delay jam: The paper which has reached the inlet sensor does not pass through the inlet sensor. [MJ-1030] Print end command time-out jam: The printing has not finished normally because of the communication error between the SYS board and LGC board at the end of printing.
P. 5-38
Receiving time time-out jam: The printing has been interrupted because of the communication error between the equipment and finisher when the paper is transported from the equipment to the finisher. Ready time time-out jam: The equipment judges that the paper transport to the finisher is disabled because of the communication error between the equipment and finisher at the start of printing. Paper remaining on the transport path: The multiple feeding of preceding paper caused the misfeeding of upcoming paper. Paper remaining on the transport path: The multiple feeding of preceding paper caused the misfeeding of upcoming paper (redetection after no jam is detected at [EB50]). Skew adjustment motor (M1) home position detection abnormality: The Skew adjustment motor is not at the home position. [MJ-1101 (when MJ-6101 is installed)] Sideways adjustment motor (M2) home position detection error: The Sideways adjustment motor is not at the home position. [MJ-1101 (when MJ-6101 is installed)] Shutter home position error: The shutter is not at the home position. [MJ-1101] Front alignment plate home position error: The front alignment plate is not at the home position. [MJ1101]
P. 5-44
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
P. 5-39 P. 5-40 P. 5-40 P. 5-41
P. 5-41
P. 5-42
P. 5-44
P. 5-44
P. 5-14
P. 5-15
P. 5-45
P. 5-45
P. 5-46 P. 5-46
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2-6 07/06
Error code ED14
ED15 ED16
Classification Finisher jam (Finisher section)
Contents Rear alignment plate home position error: The rear alignment plate is not at the home position. [MJ1101] Paddle home position error: The paddle is not at the home position. [MJ-1101] Buffer tray home position error: The buffer tray is not at the home position. [MJ-1101]
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Troubleshooting P. 5-47
P. 5-47 P. 5-48
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2-7
2
2.1.2
Service call
Error code C040
Classification Paper feeding system related service call
C130
C140
C150
C160
C180
C1A0
C1B0
C260
Scanning system related service call
C270
C280
C370 C380 C390 C3A0 C3B0
Copy process related service call
Contents PFP motor abnormality: The PFP motor is not rotating normally. (the case that paper can be fed from any drawer except the PFP) 1st drawer tray abnormality: The tray-up motor is not rotating or the 1st drawer tray is not moving normally. (the case that paper can be fed from any drawer except the 1st drawer) 2nd drawer tray abnormality: The tray-up motor is not rotating or the 2nd drawer tray is not moving normally. (the case that paper can be fed from any drawer except the 2nd drawer) PFP upper drawer tray abnormality: The PFP upper drawer tray-up motor is not rotating or the PFP upper drawer tray is not moving normally. (the case that paper can be fed from any drawer except the PFP upper drawer) PFP lower drawer tray abnormality: The PFP lower drawer tray-up motor is not rotating or the PFP lower drawer tray is not moving normally. (the case that paper can be fed from any drawer except the PFP lower drawer)
Troubleshooting P. 5-49
LCF tray-up motor abnormality: The LCF tray-up motor is not rotating or the LCF tray is not moving normally. (the case that paper can be fed from any drawer except the LCF) LCF end fence motor abnormality: The LCF end fence motor is not rotating or the LCF end fence is not moving normally. (the case that paper can be fed from any drawer except the LCF) LCF transport motor abnormality: The LCF transport motor is not rotating normally. (the case that paper can be fed from any drawer except the LCF) Peak detection error: Lighting of the exposure lamp (white reference) is not detected when power is turned ON. Carriage home position sensor not turning OFF within a specified period of time: The carriage does not shift from its home position in a specified time. Carriage home position sensor not turning ON within a specified period of time: The carriage does not reach to its home position in a specified period of time. Transfer belt operation abnormality Auto-toner sensor-K abnormality Auto-toner sensor-C abnormality Auto-toner sensor-M abnormality Auto-toner sensor-Y abnormality
P. 5-52
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
P. 5-50
P. 5-50
P. 5-51
P. 5-51
P. 5-53
P. 5-54
P. 5-55
P. 5-55
P. 5-55
P. 5-94 P. 5-94 P. 5-94 P. 5-94 P. 5-94
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2-8
Error code
Classification
Contents
Troubleshooting
C411
Fuser unit related service call
Thermistor or heater lamp abnormality at powerON: Abnormality of the thermistor is detected when power is turned ON or the temperature of the fuser roller does not rise in a specified period of time after power is turned ON. Thermistor/heater lamp abnormality at power-ON: Thermistor abnormality is detected at power-ON or the fuser roller temperature does not rise within a specified period of time after power-ON. Heater lamp abnormality after abnormality judgment (not reaching to intermediate temperature) Heater lamp abnormality after abnormality judgment (pre-running end temperature abnormality) Heater lamp abnormality after abnormality judgment (pre-running end temperature abnormality) Heater lamp abnormality after abnormality judgment (temperature abnormality at ready status) Heater lamp abnormality after abnormality judgment (temperature abnormality at ready status) Heater lamp continuous lighting abnormality: Heater lamp lights continuously for a certain period of time when the pressure roller temperature during ready status is higher than the specified
P. 5-56
C412
C443 C445 C446 C447 C447 C448
P. 5-56
2 P. 5-57 P. 5-57 P. 5-57 P. 5-57 P. 5-57 P. 5-57
C465
Pressure roller thermistor abnormality after entering ready status (pre-running end temperature abnormality)
P. 5-58
C466
Pressure roller thermistor abnormality after entering ready status (pre-running end temperature abnormality) Pressure roller thermistor abnormality after entering ready status (temperature abnormality at ready status) Pressure roller thermistor abnormality after entering ready status (overheating) Fuser unit counter abnormality
P. 5-58
C467
C468 C4B0 C4C0 C4D0 C550 C570 C580 C900 C940 C950 C961 C970 C9E0 CA00
Fuser unit fuse abnormality (shielding disabled) Fuser belt thermopile abnormality Optional communicaRADF I/F error: Communication error has occurred tion related service call between the RADF and the scanner. Communication error between Engine-CPU and IPC board Communication error between IPC board and finisher Circuit related service Connection error between SYS board and LGC call board Engine-CPU abnormality LGC board abnormality, ID abnormality Connection error on the IMG board, ID abnormality Process related serHigh-voltage transformer abnormality: Leakage of vice call the main charger is detected. Circuit related service Connection error between SLG board and SYS call board Image control related Image position alignment abnormality service call
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
P. 5-58
P. 5-58
P. 5-59 P. 5-59 P. 5-60 P. 5-60 P. 5-60 P. 5-62 P. 5-62 P. 5-62 P. 5-62 P. 5-94 P. 5-63 P. 5-83
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2-9 06/10
Error code CA10
Classification Laser optical unit related service call
CA20 CB00
Finisher related service call
CB01
CB10 CB11
CB12
CB30
CB31
CB40
CB50
CB51 CB60
CB70 CB80
CB81
CB90
Contents
Troubleshooting
Polygonal motor abnormality: The polygonal motor is not rotating normally. H-Sync detection error: H-Sync signal detection PC board cannot detect laser beams. Finisher not connected: Communication error has occurred between the equipment and finisher. [MJ1101] Finisher communication error: Communication error has occurred between the equipment and finisher. [MJ-1101] Entrance motor abnormality: The entrance motor is not rotating normally. [MJ-1101] Buffer tray guide motor abnormality: The buffer tray guide motor is not rotating or the buffer tray guide is not moving normally. [MJ-1101] Buffer roller drive motor abnormality: The buffer roller drive motor is not rotating or the buffer roller is not moving normally. [MJ-1101] Tray 1/Tray 2 shift motor abnormality: Tray 1/Tray 2 shift motor is not rotating or delivery tray is not moving normally. [MJ-1030] Movable tray shift motor abnormality: The movable tray shift motor is not rotating or the movable tray is not moving normally. [MJ-1101] Movable tray paper-full detection error: The actuator of the movable tray paper-full detection sensor does not move smoothly. [MJ-1101] Rear aligning plate motor abnormality: Rear aligning plate motor is not rotating or aligning plate is not moving normally. [MJ-1030] Front alignment motor abnormality: The front alignment motor is not rotating or the front alignment plate is not moving normally. [MJ-1101] Staple motor abnormality: Staple motor is not rotating or stapler is not moving normally. [MJ-1030] Stapler home position error: The stapler home position sensor does not work. [MJ-1101] Stapler shift home position error: The stapler is not at the home position. [MJ-1101] Stapler shift motor abnormality: Stapler shift motor is not rotating or staple unit is not moving normally. [MJ-1030/1101] Paper loading amount detection sensor abnormality Backup RAM data abnormality: 1) Abnormality of checksum value on finisher controller PC board is detected when the power is turned ON. [MJ-1030/1101] 2) Abnormality of checksum value on punch controller PC board is detected when the power is turned ON. [MJ-1030 (when MJ-6004 is installed)] Flash ROM abnormality: Abnormality of checksum value on finisher controller PC board is detected when the power is turned ON. [MJ-1101] Paper pushing plate motor abnormality: Paper pushing plate motor is not rotating or paper pushing plate is not moving normally. [MJ-1030]
P. 5-65
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
P. 5-66 P. 5-68
P. 5-68
P. 5-68 P. 5-69
P. 5-69
P. 5-69
P. 5-70
P. 5-70
P. 5-71
P. 5-72 P. 5-72
P. 5-73
P. 5-73
P. 5-73
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 10 06/11
Error code CBA0
CBB0
CBC0
CBD0 CBE0
CBF0
CC00
CC10
CC20
CC30
CC31
CC40 CC41
CC50
CC51
CC52
CC60
CC61
Classification Finisher related service call
Contents
Troubleshooting
Stitch motor (front) abnormality: Stitch motor (front) is not rotating or rotary cam is not moving normally. [MJ-1030] Stitch motor (rear) abnormality: Stitch motor (rear) is not rotating or rotary cam is not moving normally. [MJ-1030] Alignment motor abnormality: Alignment motor is not rotating or aligning plate is not moving normally. [MJ-1030] Guide motor abnormality: Guide motor is not rotating or guide is not moving normally. [MJ-1030] Paper folding motor abnormality: Paper folding motor or paper folding roller is not rotating normally. [MJ-1030] Paper positioning plate motor abnormality: Paper positioning plate motor is not rotating or paper positioning plate is not moving normally. [MJ-1030] Sensor connector abnormality: Connector of guide home position sensor, paper pushing plate home position sensor or paper pushing plate top position sensor is disconnected. [MJ-1030] Micro switch abnormality: With all covers closed, inlet door switch, delivery door switch or front cover switch is open. [MJ-1030] Communication error between finisher and saddle stitcher: Communication error between finisher controller PC board and saddle stitcher controller board [MJ-1030] Stack transport motor abnormality: The stack transport motor is not rotating or the stack transport belt is not moving normally. [MJ-1101] Transport motor abnormality: The transport motor is not rotating or the stack transport roller -1 and -2 is not rotating normally. [MJ-1101] Swing motor abnormality: Swing motor is not rotating or swing unit is not moving normally. [MJ-1030] Paper holder cam home position abnormality: The paper holder cam is not at the home position. [MJ1101] Horizontal registration motor abnormality: Horizontal registration motor is not rotating or puncher is not shifting normally. [MJ-1030 (when MJ-6004 is installed)] Sideways adjustment motor (M2) abnormality: Sideways adjustment motor is not rotating or puncher is not shifting normally. [MJ-1101 (when MJ-6101 is installed)] Skew adjustment motor (M1) abnormality: Skew adjustment motor is not rotating or puncher is not shifting normally. [MJ-1101 (when MJ-6101 is installed)] Punch motor abnormality: Punch motor is not rotating or puncher is not shifting normally. [MJ-1030 (when MJ-6004 is installed)] Punch motor (M3) home position detection error: Punch motor is not rotating or puncher is not shifting normally. [MJ-1101 (when MJ-6101 is installed)]
P. 5-73
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
P. 5-73
P. 5-74
P. 5-74 P. 5-74
P. 5-74
P. 5-75
P. 5-75
P. 5-75
P. 5-76
P. 5-76
P. 5-76 P. 5-77
P. 5-77
P. 5-77
P. 5-78
P. 5-77
P. 5-79
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 11
2
Error code CC71
Classification Finisher related service call
CC72
CC80
CCD0
CCE0
CCF0 CD70 CDE0
Process related service call Finisher related service call
CE00
CE10
Image control related service call
CE20
CE40 CE50 CE60 CE70 CE90 CEC0
Copy process related service call
CF10
Finisher related service call Laser optical unit related service call Communication related service call
CF90 F070
Contents
Troubleshooting
Punch ROM checksum error: Abnormality of checksum value on Hole punch controller PC board is detected when the power is turned on. [MJ-1101 (when MJ-6101 is installed)] Punch RAM read/write error: Abnormality of checksum value on Hole punch controller PC board is detected when the power is turned on. [MJ-1101 (when MJ-6101 is installed)] Front aligning plate motor abnormality: Front aligning plate motor is not rotating or aligning plate is not moving normally. [MJ-1030] Rear alignment motor abnormality: The rear alignment motor is not rotating or the rear alignment plate is not moving normally. [MJ-1101] Stack ejection motor abnormality: Stack ejection motor or stack ejection roller is not rotating normally. [MJ-1030] Paper trailing edge assist motor abnormality: Paper trailing edge assist motor is not rotating or paper trailing edge assist is not moving normally. [MJ1030] Gear changing motor abnormality: Gear changing motor is not rotating normally. [MJ-1030] Used toner bag mixing paddle locked: The mixing paddle in the used toner bag does not rotate. Paddle motor abnormality: The paddle motor is not rotating or the paddle is not rotating normally. [MJ1101] Communication error between finisher and punch unit: Communication error between finisher controller PC board and punch controller PC board [MJ-1030 (when MJ-6004 is installed)] [MJ-1101 (when MJ-6101 is installed)] Image quality sensor abnormality (OFF level): The output value of this sensor is out of a specified range when sensor light source is OFF. Image quality sensor abnormality (no pattern level): The output value of this sensor is out of a specified range when the image quality control test pattern is not formed. Image quality control test pattern abnormality: The test pattern is not formed normally. Temperature/humidity sensor abnormality: The output value of this sensor is out of a specified range. Drum thermistor-Y abnormality: The output value of the drum thermistor-Y is out of a specified range. Drum drive switching abnormality Drum thermistor-K abnormality: The output value of the drum thermistor-K is out of a specified range. 2nd transfer roller position detection abnormality: The 2nd transfer roller does not contact/release normally. Communication module SRAM reading failure.
P. 5-79
P. 5-79
P. 5-80
P. 5-80
P. 5-81
P. 5-81 P. 5-95 P. 5-81
P. 5-82
P. 5-88
P. 5-89
P. 5-91 P. 5-92 P. 5-93 P. 5-93 P. 5-93 P. 5-96
P. 5-82
Laser optical unit shutter abnormality.
P. 5-67
Communication error between System-CPU and Engine-CPU
P. 5-60
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 12 06/11
Error code
Classification
Contents
Troubleshooting
F090 F091 F092 F100
Circuit related service call
SRAM abnormality on the SYS board NVRAM abnormality on the SYS board SRAM and NVRAM abnormality on the SYS board HDD format error: HDD cannot be initialized normally. HDD unmounted: Connection of HDD cannot be detected. HDD start error: HDD cannot become ‘Ready’ state. HDD transfer time-out: Reading/writing cannot be performed in the specified period of time. HDD data error: Abnormality is detected in the data of HDD. HDD other error Point and Print partition damage /BOX partition damage /SHA partition damage Communication error between System-CPU and Scanner-CPU Scanner response abnormality Database abnormality: Database is not operating normally. Invalid MAC address Accelerator ASIC format error
P. 5-63 P. 5-63 P. 5-64 P. 5-97
Other service call
F101 F102 F103 F104 F105 F106 F107 F108 F110 F111 F120
Communication related service call Other service call
F130 F140 F200 F350
Circuit related service call
Data overwrite kit (GP-1060) is taken off SLG board abnormality
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
P. 5-97 P. 5-97 P. 5-97 P. 5-97 P. 5-97 P. 5-97 P. 5-97 P. 5-97 P. 5-61 P. 5-61 P. 5-97 P. 5-97 P. 5-98 P. 5-98 P. 5-64
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 13 06/10
2
2.1.3
Error in Internet FAX / Scanning Function
1) Internet FAX related error Error code 1C10 1C11 1C12 1C13 1C14 1C15 1C20 1C21 1C22 1C30 1C31 1C32 1C33 1C40 1C60 1C61 1C62 1C63 1C64 1C65 1C66 1C67 1C68 1C69 1C6A 1C6B 1C6C 1C6D 1C70 1C71 1C72 1C80 1C81 1C82 1CC0 1CC1
Classification System access abnormality Insufficient memory Message reception error Message transmission error Invalid parameter Exceeding file capacity System management module access abnormality Job control module access abnormality Job control module access abnormality Directory creation failure File creation failure File deletion failure File access failure Image conversion abnormality HDD full failure during processing Address Book reading failure Memory acquiring failure Terminal IP address unset Terminal mail address unset SMTP address unset Server time time-out error NIC time time-out error NIC access error SMTP server connection error HOST NAME error Terminal mail address error Destination mail address error System error SMTP client OFF SMTP authentication error POP before SMTP error Internet FAX transmission failure when processing E-mail job received Onramp Gateway transmission failure Internet FAX transmission failure when processing FAX job received Job canceling Power failure
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
Troubleshooting P. 5-98 P. 5-98 P. 5-98 P. 5-98 P. 5-98 P. 5-99 P. 5-99 P. 5-99 P. 5-99 P. 5-99 P. 5-99 P. 5-98 P. 5-99 P. 5-99 P. 5-99 P. 5-99 P. 5-99 P. 5-99 P. 5-99 P. 5-99 P. 5-99 P. 5-100 P. 5-100 P. 5-100 P. 5-100 P. 5-100 P. 5-100 P. 5-100 P. 5-100 P. 5-100 P. 5-100 P. 5-100 P. 5-100 P. 5-100 P. 5-100
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 14
2) RFC related error Error code 2500
Message displayed in the TopAccess screen Syntax error, command unrecognized
2501
Syntax error in parameters or arguments
2503
Bad sequence of commands
2504 2550
Command parameter not implemented Mailbox unavailable
2551
User not local
2552
Insufficient system storage
2553
Mailbox name not allowed
Contents HOST NAME error (RFC: 500) Destination mail address error (RFC: 500) Terminal mail address error (RFC: 500) HOST NAME error (RFC: 501) Destination mail address error (RFC: 501) Terminal mail address error (RFC: 501) Destination mail address error (RFC: 503) HOST NAME error (RFC: 504) Destination mail address error (RFC: 550) Destination mail address error (RFC: 551) Terminal/Destination mail address error (RFC: 552) Destination mail address error (RFC: 553)
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Troubleshooting P. 5-101
P. 5-101
P. 5-101 P. 5-101 P. 5-101 P. 5-101 P. 5-101
P. 5-101
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 15
2
3) Electronic Filing related error
2B10
Message displayed in the TopAccess screen There was no applicable job.
2B11 2B20 2B30
Job status failed. Failed to access file. Insufficient disk space.
2B31
Failed to access Electronic Filing.
2B32
Failed to print Electronic Filing document.
2B50 2B51 2B71
Failed to process image. Failed to process print image. Document(s) expire(s) in a few days
2B80 2B90 2BA0 2BA1
Hard Disk space for Electronic Filing nearly full. Insufficient Memory. Invalid Box password specified. Incorrect paper size/ color mode
2BB0 2BB1 2BC0 2BC1
Job canceled Power failure occurred System fatal error. Failed to acquire resource.
2BD0
Power failure occurred during e-Filing restoring. Failed to get machine parameter. Maximum number of page range is reached. Maximum number of document range is reached. Maximum number of folder range is reached.
Error code
2BE0 2BF0 2BF1 2BF2
Contents
Troubleshooting
No applicable job error in job control module JOB status abnormality File library function error Insufficient disk space in /BOX partition Status of specified Electronic Filing or folder is undefined or being created/deleted Electronic Filing printing failure: Specified document can not be printed because of client’s access (being edited, etc.). Image library error List library error Documents expiring in a few days exist Hard disk space in /BOX partition is nearly full (90%). Insufficient memory capacity Invalid Box password A Paper size or a color mode not supported in the Electronic Filing function is being selected. Job canceling Power failure Fatal failure occurred System management module resource acquiring failure Power failure occurred during restoring of Electronic Filing Machine parameter reading failure Exceeding maximum number of pages Exceeding maximum number of documents Exceeding maximum number of folders
P. 5-102 P. 5-102 P. 5-102 P. 5-102 P. 5-102
P. 5-102
P. 5-102 P. 5-102 P. 5-102 P. 5-102 P. 5-102
P. 5-103 P. 5-102 P. 5-102 P. 5-103 P. 5-103 P. 5-103 P. 5-103 P. 5-103
4) Remote scanning related error
2A20
Message displayed in the TopAccess screen Failed to acquire resource
2A40 2A50 2A51
System fatal error Job canceling Power failure
Error code
Contents System management module resource acquiring failure System error Job canceling Power failure
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
Troubleshooting P. 5-104 P. 5-104 P. 5-104
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 16
5) E-mail related error Error code 2C10
Message displayed in the TopAccess screen Illegal Job status
Contents
Troubleshooting
System access abnormality
P. 5-105
Insufficient memory Message reception error Message transmission error Invalid parameter Exceeding file capacity
P. 5-105 P. 5-105 P. 5-105 P. 5-105 P. 5-105
2C20
Not enough memory Illegal Job status Illegal Job status Invalid parameter specified Message size exceeded limit or maximum size Illegal Job status
System management module access abnormality
P. 5-105
2C21
Illegal Job status
P. 5-105
2C22
Illegal Job status
2C30 2C31 2C32 2C33 2C40
Failed to create directory Failed to create file Failed to delete file Failed to create file Failed to convert image file format
Job control module access abnormality Job control module access abnormality Directory creation failure File creation failure File deletion failure File access failure Image conversion abnormality
P. 5-105 P. 5-105 P. 5-105 P. 5-105 P. 5-105
2C43 2C44
Encryption error. Failed to create file Creating the image file was not permitted. Failed to process your Job. Insufficient disk space. Failed to read AddressBook Not enough memory Invalid Domain Address Invalid Domain Address Failed to connect to SMTP server Failed to connect to SMTP server Failed to send E-Mail message Failed to send E-Mail message Failed to connect to SMTP server Failed to send E-Mail message Invalid address specified in From: field Invalid address specified in To: field
Encryption error Encryption PDF enforced mode error
P. 5-105 P. 5-105
HDD full failure during processing
P. 5-105
Address Book reading failure Memory acquiring failure Terminal IP address unset Terminal mail address unset SMTP address unset Server time time-out error NIC time time-out error NIC access error SMTP server connection error HOST NAME error (No RFC error) Terminal mail address error
P. 5-106 P. 5-105 P. 5-106 P. 5-106 P. 5-106 P. 5-106 P. 5-106 P. 5-106 P. 5-106 P. 5-106 P. 5-106
Destination mail address error (No RFC error) System error SMTP client OFF SMTP authentication error POP before SMTP error
P. 5-106
2C11 2C12 2C13 2C14 2C15
2C60 2C61 2C62 2C63 2C64 2C65 2C66 2C67 2C68 2C69 2C6A 2C6B 2C6C 2C6D 2C70 2C71 2C72 2C80 2C81 2CC0 2CC1
NIC system error SMTP service is not available Failed SMTP Authentication POP Before SMTP Authentication Failed Failed to process received E-mail job E-mail transmission failure when processing E-mail job received Failed to process received Fax job Process failure of FAX job received Job canceled Job canceling Power failure occurred Power failure
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
P. 5-105
P. 5-106 P. 5-106 P. 5-106 P. 5-107 P. 5-107 P. 5-107 P. 5-107
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 17 07/06
2
6) File sharing related error
2D20
Message displayed in the TopAccess screen Illegal Job status Not enough memory Illegal Job status Illegal Job status Invalid parameter specified Document size exceeded limit or maximum size. Illegal Job status
2D21
Illegal Job status
2D22
Illegal Job status
2D30 2D31 2D32 2D33 2D40 2D43 2D44
Failed to create directory Failed to create file Failed to delete file Failed to create file Failed to convert image file format Encryption error. Failed to create file Creating the image file was not permitted. Failed to copy file Invalid parameter specified Failed to connect to network destination. Check destination path Specified network path is invalid. Check destination path Logon to file server failed. Check username and password There are too many documents in the folder. Failed in creating new document. Failed To Process your Job. Insufficient Storage space. FTP service is not available File Sharing service is not available Expired scan documents deleted from share folder. Expired Sent Fax documents deleted from shared folder. Expired Received Fax documents deleted from shared folder. Scanned documents in shared folder deleted upon user’s request. Sent Fax Documents in shared folder deleted upon user’s request. Received Fax Documents in shared folder deleted upon user’s request. Failed to delete file. Failed to acquire resource. Job canceled Power failure occurred
Error code 2D10 2D11 2D12 2D13 2D14 2D15
2D60 2D61 2D62 2D63 2D64 2D65 2D66 2D67 2D68 2DA0 2DA1 2DA2 2DA3 2DA4 2DA5 2DA6 2DA7 2DC0 2DC1
Contents
Troubleshooting
System access abnormality Insufficient memory Message reception error Message transmission error Invalid parameter Exceeding the maximum size for file sharing System management module access abnormality Job control module access abnormality Job control module access abnormality Directory creation failure File creation failure File deletion failure File access failure Image conversion abnormality Encryption error Encryption PDF enforced mode error
P. 5-108 P. 5-108 P. 5-108 P. 5-108 P. 5-108 P. 5-108
File library access abnormality Invalid parameter File server connection error
P. 5-108 P. 5-108 P. 5-109
Invalid network path
P. 5-109
Login failure
P. 5-109
Exceeding documents in folder: Creating new document is failed.
P. 5-109
Storage capacity full failure during processing FTP service not available File sharing service not available Periodical deletion of scanned documents completed properly. Periodical deletion of transmitted FAX documents completed properly. Periodical deletion of received FAX documents completed properly. Manual deletion of scanned documents completed properly. Manual deletion of transmitted FAX documents completed properly. Manual deletion of received FAX documents completed properly. File deletion failure Resource acquiring failure Job canceling Power failure
P. 5-109
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
P. 5-108 P. 5-108 P. 5-108 P. 5-108 P. 5-108 P. 5-108 P. 5-108 P. 5-108 P. 5-108 P. 5-108
P. 5-109 P. 5-109 P. 5-108 P. 5-108 P. 5-109
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 18 07/06
7) E-mail reception related error Error code 3A10 3A11 3A12 3A20 3A21 3A22 3A30 3A40 3A50 3A51 3A52 3A60 3A61 3A62 3A70 3A80 3A81
3A82
3B10 3B11 3B12
Message displayed in the TopAccess screen MIME Error has been detected in the received mail. MIME Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail has been transferred to the administrator. MIME Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail could not be transferred to the administrator. Analyze Error has been detected in the received mail. Analyze Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail has been transferred to the administrator. Analyze Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail could not be transferred to the administrator. Whole partial mails were not reached by timeout. Partial Mail Error has been detected in the received mail. HDD Full Error has been occurred in this mail. HDD Full Error has been occurred in this mail. This mail has been transferred to the administrator. HDD Full Error has been occurred in this mail. This mail could not be transferred to the administrator. HDD Full Warning has been occurred in this mail. HDD Full Warning has been occurred in this mail. This mail could not be transferred to the administrator. HDD Full Warning has been occurred in this mail. This mail could not be transferred to the administrator. Receiving partial mail was aborted since the partial mail setting has been changed to Disable. Partial mail was received during the partial mail setting is disabled. Partial mail was received during the partial mail setting is disabled. This mail has been transferred to the administrator. Partial mail was received during the partial mail setting is disabled. This mail could not be transferred to the administrator. Format Error has been detected in the received mail. Format Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail has been transferred to the administrator. Format Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail could not be transferred to the administrator.
Contents E-mail MIME error
Troubleshooting P. 5-110 P. 5-110 P. 5-110
E-mail analysis error
P. 5-110 P. 5-110 P. 5-110
Partial mail time-out error
P. 5-110
Partial mail related error
P. 5-110
Insufficient HDD capacity error
P. 5-110 P. 5-110 P. 5-110
Warning of insufficient HDD capacity
P. 5-110 P. 5-110 P. 5-110
Warning of partial mail interruption
P. 5-110
Partial mail reception setting OFF
P. 5-110 P. 5-110
P. 5-110
E-mail format error
P. 5-110 P. 5-110 P. 5-110
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 19
2
Error code 3B20 3B21
3B22
3B30 3B31 3B32 3B40 3B41 3B42 3C10 3C11 3C12
3C13 3C20 3C21
3C22
3C30 3C31
3C32
Message displayed in the TopAccess screen Content-Type Error has been detected in the received mail. Content-Type Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail has been transferred to the administrator. Content-Type Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail could not be transferred to the administrator. Charset Error has been detected in the received mail. Charset Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail has been transferred to the administrator. Charset Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail could not be transferred to the administrator. Decode Error has been detected in the received mail. Decode Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail has been transferred to the administrator. Decode Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail could not be transferred to the administrator. Tiff Analyze Error has been detected in the received mail. Tiff Analyze Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail has been transferred to the administrator. Tiff Analyze Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail could not be transferred to the administrator. Tiff Analyze Error has been detected in the received mail. Tiff Compression Error has been detected in the received mail. Tiff Compression Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail has been transferred to the administrator. Tiff Compression Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail could not be transferred to the administrator. Tiff Resolution Error has been detected in the received mail. Tiff Resolution Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail has been transferred to the administrator. Tiff Resolution Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail could not be transferred to the administrator.
Contents Content-Type error
Troubleshooting P. 5-110 P. 5-110
P. 5-110
Charset error
P. 5-110 P. 5-110 P. 5-110
E-mail decode error
P. 5-110 P. 5-110 P. 5-110
TIFF analysis error
P. 5-110 P. 5-110 P. 5-110
P. 5-110 TIFF compression error
P. 5-110 P. 5-110
P. 5-110
TIFF resolution error
P. 5-111 P. 5-111
P. 5-111
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 20
Error code 3C40 3C41
3C42
3C50 3C51
3C52
3C60 3C61
3C62
3C70 3D10 3D20 3D30 3E10 3E20 3E30 3E40 3F00 3F10 3F20 3F30 3F40
Message displayed in the TopAccess screen Tiff Paper Size Error has been detected in the received mail. Tiff Paper Size Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail has been transferred to the administrator. Tiff Paper Size Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail could not be transferred to the administrator. Offramp Destination Error has been detected in the received mail. Offramp Destination Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail has been transferred to the administrator. Offramp Destination Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail could not be transferred to the administrator. Offramp Security Error has been detected in the received mail. Offramp Security Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail has been transferred to the administrator. Offramp Security Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail could not be transferred to the administrator. Power Failure has been occurred in Email receiving. SMTP Destination Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail was deleted. Offramp Destination limitation Error has been detected in the received mail. Fax Board Error has been occurred in the received mail. POP3 Connection Error has been occurred in the received mail. POP3 Connection Timeout Error has been occurred in the received mail. POP3 Login Error has been occurred in the received mail. POP3 Login Error occurred in the received mail. File I/O Error has been occurred in this mail. The mail could not be received until File I/O is recovered.
Contents TIFF paper size error
Troubleshooting P. 5-111 P. 5-111
P. 5-111
Offramp destination error
P. 5-111 P. 5-111
P. 5-111
Offramp security error
P. 5-111 P. 5-111
P. 5-111
Power failure error
P. 5-111
Destination address error
P. 5-111
Offramp destination limitation error
P. 5-111
FAX board error
P. 5-111
POP3 server connection error
P. 5-111
POP3 server connection time-out error POP3 login error
P. 5-111 P. 5-111
POP3 login method error
P. 5-111
File I/O error
P. 5-111 P. 5-111 P. 5-111 P. 5-111 P. 5-111
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 21
2
2.1.4
Printer function error
Following codes are displayed at the end of the user name on the print job log screen. Error code 4031 4032 4033 4034 4035 4036 4040 4050 4300 4301 4310 4311
4312 A221 A222 A290 A291 A292 A2A0 A2A1 A2A2
Contents HDD full during print - Large quantity image data by private print or invalid network print are saved in HDD. Private-print-only error: Jobs other than Private print jobs cannot be performed. Printing data storing limitation error: Printing with its data being stored to the HDD temporarily (Proof print, Private print, Scheduled print, etc.) cannot be performed. e-Filing storing limitation error: Printing with its data being stored to the HDD (print and e-Filing, print to e-Filing, etc.) cannot be performed. Local file storing limitation error: Network FAX or Internet FAX cannot be sent when "Local" is selected for the destination of the file to save. User authentication error: The user who intended to print a document is not registered as a user. Not being authorized to perform JOB Problem in LDAP server connection or LDAP server authorization settings USB direct printing: Job execution error due to functional restrictions - Printing with he USB direct printing function restricted USB direct printing: File conversion error - Printing a file whose format is not supported, or an invalid file Double-sign encoding error: A double-sign encoding error occurred because the PDF file is encrypted in a forbidden language or in a language not supported. Printing not permitted: Printing is not permitted or only printing in a low resolution level is permitted due to the encryption language of the encrypted PDF file. * Permitted only when a user password is entered. Password mismatching: The entered password is neither matched with a user password nor an owner password. Print job cancellation - Print job (copy, list print, network print) is deleted from the print job screen. Print job power failure - The power of the equipment is turned OFF during print job (copy, list print, network print). Limit over error (Black): The numbers of output pages have exceeded those specified with both of the department code and the user code at the same time. Limit over error (Black): The number of output pages has exceeded the one specified with the user code. Limit over error (Black): The number of output pages has exceeded the one specified with the department code. Limit over error (Color): The number of prints has exceeded the one specified for the department code and user code, or users (guests) are not authorized to perform color printing. Limit over error (Color): The number of prints has exceeded the one specified for the user code, or users (guests) are not authorized to perform color printing. Limit over error (Color): The number of output pages has exceeded the one specified with the department code.
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
Troubleshooting P. 5-112 P. 5-112 P. 5-112 P. 5-112 P. 5-112 P. 5-112 P. 5-112 P. 5-112 P. 5-112 P. 5-112 P. 5-112 P. 5-112
P. 5-112 P. 5-112 P. 5-112 P. 5-113 P. 5-113 P. 5-113 P. 5-113 P. 5-113 P. 5-113
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 22 07/06
<
> In the setting mode (08-253), the latest twenty groups of error data will be displayed. Display example EA10 99999999 06 04 14 17 57 32 064 064 23621000000 Error code Total counter YY MM DD HH MM SS MMM NNN ABCDEFHIJLO 4 digits 8 digits 12 digits (Year is indicated 3 digits 3 digits 11 digits with its last two digits.) A
B
C
D E F
G H
I J K L
MMM NNN O
Paper source 0: Not selected 1: Bypass feed 2: LCF 3: 1st drawer 4: 2nd drawer 5: PFP upper drawer 6: PFP lower drawer 7: Unused 8: Unused Paper size code 0: A5/ST 1: A5-R 2: ST-R 3: LT, 4: A4 5: B5-R 6: LT-R 7: A4-R 8: OTHER/UNIV 9: B5, A: FOLIO/COMP B: LG C: B4 D: LD E: A3 F: 13"LG G: Unsed H: A6-R I: Post card J: 8.5"SQ K: A3-wide L: 305×457 mm M: 8K N: 16K-R O: 16K Z: Not selected Sort mode/staple mode 0: Non-sort/Non-staple 1: Group 2: Sort 7: Front staple 8: Double staple 9: Rear staple A: Saddle stitch ADF mode 0: Unused 1: AUTO FEED (SADF) 2: STACK FEED APS/AMS mode 0: Not selected 1: APS 2: AMS Duplex mode 0: Not selected 1: Book 2: Double-sided/Single-sided 4: Double-sided/Duplex copying 8: Single-sided/Duplex copying Unused Image shift 0: Unused 1: Book 2: Left 3: Right 4: Top 5: Bottom 6: Book+Top 7: Book+Bottom 8: Left+Top 9: Left+Bottom A: Right+Top B: Right+Bottom Editing 0: Unused 1: Masking 2: Trimming 3: Mirror image 4: Unused 5: NEG/POS Edge erase/Dual-page 0: Unused 1: Edge erase 2: Dual-page 3: Edge erase & Dual-page Unused Function 0: Unused 1: Copying 2: FAX/Internet FAX transmission 3: FAX/Internet FAX/E-mail reception printing 4: Unused 5: Printing/List print 6: Scan/E-mail transmission Primary scanning reproduction ratio (Display in hexadecimal) (Mx256)+(Mx16)+M Secondary scanning reproduction ratio (Display in hexadecimal) (Nx256)+(Nx16)+N Color mode 0: Auto color 1: Full color 2: Black 3: Mono color copy 4: Twin color copy 5: Gray scale 6: Unused 7: Image smoothing
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 23
2
2.2
Self-diagnosis Modes
Mode Control panel check mode
For start [0]+[1]+ [POWER]
Contents All LEDs on the control panel are lit, and all the LCD pixels blink.
For exit [POWER] OFF/ON
Test mode
[0]+[3]+ [POWER] [0]+[4]+ [POWER] [0]+[5]+ [POWER] [0]+[8]+ [POWER] [9]+[START]+ [POWER] [6]+[START]+ [POWER] [8]+[9]+ [POWER]
Checks the status of input/output signals.
[POWER] OFF/ON [POWER] OFF/ON [POWER] OFF/ON [POWER] OFF/ON [POWER] OFF/ON [POWER] OFF/ON [POWER] OFF/ON
Test print mode Adjustment mode Setting mode List print mode PM support mode Firmware update mode
Outputs the test patterns. Adjusts various items. Sets various items. Prints out the data lists of the codes 05 and 08, PM support mode and pixel counter. Clears each counter. Performs updating of the system firmware.
Display 100% C A4 TEST MODE 100% P A4 TEST PRINT 100% A A4 TEST MODE 100% D TEST MODE 100% UA A4 LIST PRINT 100% K TEST MODE -
Note: To enter the desired mode, turn the power ON while pressing two digital keys designated to each mode (e.g. [0] and [5]) simultaneously. Hold the two keys until the [EXTENSION] button is lit. To exit from Adjustment mode and Setting mode: Shut down the equipment. When the power should be turned OFF, be sure to shut down the equipment by pressing the [ENERGY SAVER] button for a few seconds. • Control panel check mode (01): [0][1] [POWER]
LED lit/ LCD blinking
[START]
(Button check)
[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)
[START]
Notes: 1. A mode can be canceled by [POWER] OFF/ON when the LED is lit and the LCD is blinking. 2. Button Check Buttons with LED (Press to turn OFF the LED.) Buttons without LED (Press to display the message on the control panel.) Button on touch panel (Press to display the screen on the control panel at power-ON.) • •
Test mode (03): Refer to “2.2.1. Input check (test mode 03)” and “2.2.2. Output check (test mode 03)”. Test print mode (04): Refer to “2.2.3. Test print mode (04)”.
•
Adjustment mode (05): Refer to “2.2.4. Adjustment mode (05)”.
•
Setting mode (08): Refer to “2.2.5. Setting mode (08)”.
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 24
•
List print mode (9S): The procedure varies depending on the code. [9][START] [POWER]
[START] (Code) [Digital keys] 101: Adjustment mode (05) Key in the first 102: Setting mode (08) code to be printed
[START]
[Digital keys] Key in the last code to be printed
[START] List starts to be printed
[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)
(Code) 103: PM support mode 104: Stored information of pixel counter (toner cartridge reference) 105: Stored information of pixel counter (service technician reference) 106: Error history (Maximum 1000 items) 107: Error history (Latest 80 items)
•
PM support mode (6S): [6][START] [POWER]
•
2
(Code) 2: PM Support Screen
[START] (Operation started)
[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)
Firmware update mode (89): Refer to “6. FIRMWARE UPDATING”. [POWER] ON Normal [0][1]
Warming up
Control panel check mode
[0][3]
Test mode
[0][4] Test print mode
[0][5] Adjustment mode
[0][8] Setting mode
[9][START] List print mode
[6][START] PM support mode
[8][9]
Firmware update mode
Ready
[POWER] OFF *1 To user
State transition diagram of self-diagnosis modes Fig. 2-1
*1 Turn OFF the power after using the self-diagnosis mode, and leave the equipment to the user.
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 25
2.2.1
Input check (Test mode 03)
The status of each input signal can be checked by pressing the [FAX] button, [COPY] button and the digital keys in the test mode (03). [0][3] [POWER]
[START]
[FAX] or [COPY]
[Digital keys]
(LCD ON)
[CLEAR]
[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)
Note: Initialization is performed before the equipment enters the test mode.
Fig. 2-2 Example of display during input check
Items to be checked and the condition of the equipment when the buttons [A] to [H] are highlighted are listed in the following pages. [FAX] button: OFF/[COPY] button: OFF ([FAX] LED: OFF/[COPY] LED: OFF) Digital key
Button
[1]
A B C D E F G H
Contents Highlighted display Normal display
Items to check
e.g. -
e.g. -
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
-
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 26
Digital key
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
Button
Contents Highlighted display Normal display
Items to check
e.g.
e.g.
A B
PFP upper drawer detection switch
Drawer not installed
Drawer present
C D E F G H
PFP upper drawer paper stock sensor PFP upper drawer feed sensor PFP connection PFP side cover open/close switch PFP upper drawer empty sensor PFP upper drawer tray-up sensor
Paper almost empty Paper present Not connected Cover opened No paper Tray at upper limit position Not connected Not connected Error Tray at upper limit position Tray at upper limit position Paper almost empty Paper almost empty Drawer not installed Drawer not installed No paper No paper Normal Connected Old Paper present Cover opened Paper present
Paper present No paper Connected Cover closed Paper present Other than upper limit position Connected Connected Normal Other than upper limit position Other than upper limit position Paper present Paper present Drawer present Drawer present Paper present Paper present Abnormal Not connected New No paper Cover closed No paper
Paper full Not connected -
Paper not full Connected -
A B C D E F G H A
IMG board connection IPC board connection HSYNC error 2nd drawer tray-up sensor
B
1st drawer tray-up sensor
C D E F G H A B C D E F
2nd drawer paper stock sensor 1st drawer paper stock sensor 2nd drawer detection switch 1st drawer detection switch 2nd drawer empty sensor 1st drawer empty sensor High voltage control leak detection status Fuser unit thermistor connection detection New and old fuser unit detection Bridge unit transport sensor-2 (Exit sensor) Bridge unit cover open/close detection switch Bridge unit transport sensor-1 (Entrance sensor) Bridge unit paper full detection sensor Bridge unit connection -
G H A B C D E F G H
-
-
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
-
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 27
2
Digital key
[7]
[8]
[9]
[0]
Button
Contents Highlighted display Normal display
Items to check
e.g.
e.g.
A B
K process unit connection signal C process unit connection signal
Not connected Not connected
Connected Connected
C D E F G
M process unit connection signal Y process unit connection signal Paper clinging detection sensor Registration sensor Image position aligning sensor (rear)
Not connected Not connected No paper Paper present
Connected Connected Paper present No paper Toner pattern detection
H
Image position aligning sensor (front)
A B C D E F G H
PFP lower drawer detection switch PFP lower drawer paper stock sensor PFP lower drawer feed sensor PFP motor rotation status (Motor is rotating at output mode (03)) PFP lower drawer empty sensor PFP lower drawer tray-up sensor
A
LCF tray bottom sensor
B C D E F G H A
LCF standby side paper misload detection sensor LCF drawer detection switch Paper stock sensor at LCF feed side LCF end fence home position sensor
B
LCF end fence stop position sensor
C D E
Empty sensor at LCF standby side LCF side cover open/close switch LCF motor rotation status (Motor is rotating at output mode (03)) LCF tray-up sensor
F
Drawer not installed Paper almost empty Paper present Abnormal rotation
Toner pattern detection Drawer present Paper present No paper Normal rotation
No paper Tray at upper limit position Tray at bottom position Properly loaded
Paper present Other than upper limit position Other than upper limit position Paper misload
Drawer not installed Paper almost empty Fence home position Fence stop position No paper Cover closed Normal rotation
Drawer present Paper present Other than home position Other than stop position Paper present Cover opened Abnormal rotation Other than upper limit position Paper present No paper
G
LCF feed sensor
Tray at upper limit position No paper
H
Empty sensor at LCF feed side
Paper present
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 28
[FAX] button: ON/[COPY] button: OFF ([FAX] LED: ON/[COPY] LED: OFF) Digital key
[1]
[2]
[3]
Button
Items to check
e.g. A B C D E F G H A B C D E F G H A B C D E F G H A B C D E
[4] F G H
[5]
Contents Highlighted display Normal display
A B C D E F G H
LCF connection Exit sensor Transfer belt installation detection 2nd drawer feeding jam sensor 1st drawer feeding jam sensor Polygonal motor ready signal 24V Power supply ADU opening/closing switch Laser shutter open/close detection Toner bag full detection sensor 2nd transfer roller position detection sensor Used toner motor lock detection sensor Belt contact position detection sensor Transfer cover switch Toner cartridge detection sensor-K Toner cartridge detection sensor-C Toner cartridge detection sensor-M Toner cartridge detection sensor-Y ADU exit sensor ADU entrance sensor Bypass feed paper existence sensor Bypass feed sensor Bypass feed paper width sensor 3 (Refer to table1) Bypass feed paper width sensor 2 (Refer to table1) Bypass feed paper width sensor 1 (Refer to table1) Bypass feed paper width sensor 0 (Refer to table1) RADF connection Platen sensor Carriage home position sensor
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Not connected Paper present Not connected Paper present Paper present -
e.g.
Power ON ADU opened ON Toner bag full Released Sensor blocked Color -
Connected No paper Connected No paper No paper Ready Power OFF ADU closed OFF Not full Contacted Sensor not blocked Black -
Cover opened Cartridge present Cartridge present Cartridge present Cartridge present Paper present Paper present No paper No paper Bit 1
Cover closed No Cartridge No Cartridge No Cartridge No Cartridge No paper No paper Paper present Paper present Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 0
Connected Platen cove opened Home position
Not connected Platen cover closed Other than home position
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 29 06/09
2
Digital key
[6]
[7]
Button A B
-
C D E F G H A B C D E
-
[0]
APS sensor (APS-R) APS sensor (APS-C) APS sensor (APS-3) APS sensor (APS-2) APS sensor (APS-1) [RADF] Original tray sensor [RADF] Original empty sensor [RADF] Jam access cover sensor [RADF] RADF opening/closing sensor [RADF] Original exit/reverse sensor
D E F G H A B C D E F G H A B C D
Side cover open/close switch -
E F G H
Drum mode detection signal Fuser unit connection Key copy counter connection
C
e.g. -
[RADF] Original intermediate transport sensor [RADF] Read sensor [RADF] Original registration sensor [RADF] Original tray width sensor (TWID0S) (Refer to table2) [RADF] Original tray width sensor (TWID1S) (Refer to table2) [RADF] Original tray width sensor (TWID2S) (Refer to table2) [RADF] Original length detection sensor [RADF] Original width detection sensor-1 [RADF] Original width detection sensor-2 Needle electrode cleaner detection sensor
B
[9]
Items to check
e.g.
F G H A
[8]
Contents Highlighted display Normal display
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
-
No original No original No original No original No original Original present Original present Cover opened RADF opened Original present
Original present Original present Original present Original present Original present No original No original Cover closed RADF closed No original
Original present Original present Original present OFF (H)
No original No original No original ON (L)
OFF (H)
ON (L)
OFF (H)
ON (L)
Original present Original present Original present Cleaner limit position Cover opened -
No original No original No original Other than cleaner limit position Cover closed -
Color
Black
Connected Not connected
Not connected Connected
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 30 08/04
Table 1. Relation between the status of the bypass paper width sensor and paper size (width). 3 0 1 1 1 0 1
Bypass paper width sensor 2 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0
Paper width size
0 1 1 1 0 1 1
A3/LD A4-R/LT-R A5-R/ST-R Card size B4-R/LG B5-R
2
Table 2. Relation between the status of the original tray width sensor and paper size (width). Original tray width sensor TWID2S TWID1S TWID0S H H H H
Paper width size (LT series)
Paper width size (A4 series)
LD/LT
A3/A4
-
B5-R
H
L
H
L
H
ST-R
A5-R
L
H
H
LD/LT
A3/A4
L
H
L
-
-
L
L
H
8.5" x 8.5" / LT-R / LG / 13" LG
A4-R/FOLIO
L
L
L
COMPUTER
B4/B5
H (= high level): Open L (= low level): Short
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 31 08/04
[FAX] button: OFF/[COPY] button: ON ([FAX] LED: OFF/[COPY] LED: ON) Digital key [1] [2] [3] [4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
Contents Highlighted display Normal display
Button
Items to check
-
Temperature/humidity sensor (displays temperature inside of the equipment) Temperature/humidity sensor (displays humidity inside of the equipment) Drum thermistor-K (displays temperature on the drum surface of K color) Drum thermistor-Y (displays temperature on the drum surface of Y color) -
e.g.
A B C D E F G H A B C D E F G H A B C D E F G H A B C D E F G H A B C D E F G H
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
e.g. -
Temperature [°C]
-
Humidity [%RH]
-
Temperature [°C]
-
Temperature [°C]
-
-
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 32
Digital key
Button
Items to check
e.g. A B C D
[0]
Contents Highlighted display Normal display
E F G H
Dongles for other equipments / Other USB devices Judgement for acceptable USB storage device (*1) -
e.g.
Connectable
Not connectable
Acceptable
Not acceptable
-
-
*1 • Be sure to install the USB storage device to the equipment and check if the device can be used with this code. • Be sure to turn OFF the write protection (the function to prevent data from erasure by the accidental recording or deleting) of the USB storage device before performing the check, otherwise this code cannot be used. • It may take some time (2 sec. to 10 sec.) before this check is completed depending on the USB storage device.
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 33
2
2.2.2
Output check (test mode 03)
Status of the output signals can be checked by entering the following codes in the test mode 03.
Procedure 1 [0][3] [POWER]
(Code)
Stop code
Operation ON
[START]
[START]
Operation OFF
[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)
Procedure 2 [0][3] [POWER]
[START]
(Code)
Operation One direction
[CLEAR]
Test mode standby
[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)
Procedure 3 [0][3] [POWER]
(Code)
[START]
Operation ON
[START]
Operation OFF
[CLEAR]
Test mode standby
[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)
Procedure 4 [0][3] [POWER]
Code 101
103 108 109 110 111
112 113 115 116 118
119 120 121 122 123
(Code)
[START]
Function Drum motor ON + Transfer belt motor ON (Operational without process unit Y/M/ C/K) Polygonal motor (600dpi) ON Registration motor ON PFP motor ON ADU motor ON Developer unit motor Y/M/C/K ON (Operational without process unit Y/M/ C/K) Developer unit motor K ON (Operational without process unit K) Fuser motor ON ADU motor ON (high speed during transport within ADU) Exit motor (reversal rotation) ON (high speed) Laser ON(Y: 05-2853, M: 05-2854, C: 05-2855, k: 05-2856 setting value output) ADU motor ON (transport speed) Exit motor (normal rotation) ON Exit motor (reversal rotation) ON LCF motor ON Transport motor ON
[POWER] OFF
Code 151
Function Code No.101 function OFF
Procedure 1
153 158 159 160 161
Code No.103 function OFF Code No.108 function OFF Code No.109 function OFF Code No.110 function OFF Code No.111 function OFF
1 1 1 1 1
162
Code No.112 function OFF
1
163 165
Code No.113 function OFF Code No.115 function OFF
1 1
166
Code No.116 function OFF
1
168
Code No.118 function OFF
1
169 170 171 172 173
Code No.119 function OFF Code No.120 function OFF Code No.121 function OFF Code No.122 function OFF Code No.123 function OFF
1 1 1 1 1
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 34 06/10
Code 125 126
Function Sensor shutter solenoid ON (open) Image position aligning sensor (front/ rear) LED ON
Code
Code 175 176
Function Code No.125 function OFF Code No.126 function OFF
Function
Procedure 1 1
Procedure
201
1st drawer feed clutch ON/OFF
3
202
2nd drawer feed clutch ON/OFF
3
204
Bypass feed clutch ON/OFF
3
206
LCF pickup solenoid ON/OFF
3
207
LCF end fence reciprocating movement
2
208
LCF end fence motor ON/OFF
3
209
LCF feed clutch ON/OFF
3
210
LCF transport clutch ON/OFF
3
218
Key copy counter count up
2
222
ADU clutch ON/OFF
3
225
PFP transport clutch ON/OFF
3
226
PFP upper drawer feed clutch ON/OFF
3
228
PFP lower drawer feed clutch ON/OFF
3
229
Middle roller (upper) transport speed drive clutch ON/OFF
3
230
Middle roller (lower) transport speed drive clutch ON/OFF
3
231
Middle roller (upper) process speed drive clutch ON/OFF
3
232
Bridge unit gate solenoid ON/OFF
3
233
Middle roller (lower) process speed drive clutch ON/OFF
3
234
Bypass pickup solenoid ON/OFF
3
235
Discharge LED (K) ON/OFF (Do not let it radiate to the photoconductive drum for a long time.)
3
236
Discharge LED (Y/M/C) ON/OFF (Do not let it radiate to the photoconductive drum for a long time.)
3
239
Switching contact/release of 2nd transfer roller
2
240
Drum switching motor (switches position in the black/color mode)
2
241
1st transfer roller cam motor (switches contact/release of transfer belt)
2
242
1st drawer tray-up motor ON (tray up)
2
243
2nd drawer tray-up motor ON (tray up)
2
248
Developer bias (K) [DC] ON/OFF (Operational without process unit K)
3
249
Developer bias (K) [AC] ON/OFF (Operational without process unit K)
3
252
Main charger (K) ON/OFF (Operational without process unit K)
3
253
Main charger (Y/M/C) ON/OFF (Operational without process unit Y/M/C)
3
254
Developer bias (Y) [DC] ON/OFF (Operational without process unit Y)
3
255
Developer bias (M) [DC] ON/OFF (Operational without process unit M)
3
256
Developer bias (C) [DC] ON/OFF (Operational without process unit C)
3
257
Developer bias (Y/M/C) [AC] ON/OFF (Operational without process unit Y/M/C)
3
261
Scan motor ON (Automatically stops at limit position, speed can be changed by using ZOOM button)
2
264
Scanner fan motor ON/OFF
3
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 35 06/10
2
Code
Function
Procedure
265
Scanner fan motor OFF
3
267
Scanner exposure lamp ON/OFF
3
271
LCF tray-up motor UP/DOWN
2
278
PFP upper drawer tray-up motor ON (tray up)
2
280
PFP lower drawer tray-up motor ON (tray up)
2
281
RADF original feed motor ON/OFF (normal rotation)
3
282
RADF original feed motor ON/OFF (reverse rotation)
3
283
RADF read motor ON/OFF
3
284
RADF original exit/reverse motor ON/OFF (normal rotation)
3
285
RADF original exit/reverse motor ON/OFF (reverse rotation)
3
294
RADF gate solenoid ON/OFF
3
295
Power OFF mode
4
297
RADF fan motor ON/OFF
3
410
Toner motor (K) ON/OFF (Operational without toner cartridge K)
3
411
Toner motor (C) ON/OFF (Operational without toner cartridge C)
3
412
Toner motor (M) ON/OFF (Operational without toner cartridge M)
3
413
Toner motor (Y) ON/OFF (Operational without toner cartridge Y)
3
414
Used toner motor ON/OFF
3
417
Laser shutter (open/close)
2
433
Drum (K) recovery blade bias ON/OFF
3
434
Drum (Y/M/C) recovery blade bias ON/OFF
3
441
Fuser/exit section cooling fan (low speed) ON/OFF
3
442
Fuser/exit section cooling fan (high speed) ON/OFF
3
443
Ozone exhaust fan (low speed) ON/OFF
3
444
Ozone exhaust fan (high speed) ON/OFF
3
445
Laser unit cooling fan (low speed) ON/OFF
3
446
Laser unit cooling fan (high speed) ON/OFF
3
448
Switching regulator cooling fan ON/OFF
3
449
Internal cooling fan (low speed) ON/OFF
3
450
Internal cooling fan (high speed) ON/OFF
3
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 36 08/04
2.2.3
Test print mode (test mode 04)
The embedded test pattern can be printed out by keying in the following codes in the test print mode (04).
[0][4] [POWER]
(Code)
(Media selection)
[START]
Operation Continuous Test Printing
[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)
[CLEAR]
[0][4] [POWER]
(Code)
Media [START] selection [CLEAR]
Color selection
[START]
Operation [CLEAR] Continuous Test Printing
[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)
Notes: 1. When an error occurs, it is indicated on the panel, but the recovery operation is not performed. Turn OFF the power and then back ON to clear the error. 2. During test printing, the [CLEAR] button is disabled when “Wait adding toner” is displayed. Code
Types of test pattern
Remarks
Remarks
142
Grid pattern (black)
Pattern width: 2 dots, Pitch: 10 mm
1
204
Grid pattern (color)
Pattern width: 1 dot, Pitch: 10 mm
2
219
6% test pattern
2
220
8% test pattern
2
231
Secondary scanning direction 33 gradation steps
237
Halftone
3 pixels standard, Width: 10 mm
2 2
262
Ladder pattern (4 lines ON/ 4 lines OFF)
For color deviation confirmation
2
270
Image quality control test pattern
For checking the image quality control
2
Note: In the (Color selection) of , the printing method is different between [K(1)] and [K(4)] as follows. [K(1)] .....................Printing by bringing one K color developer unit into contact with the transfer belt [K(4)] .....................The developer units of four (YMCK) colors are brought into contact with the transfer belt, but the test pattern is printed in K color only. * The number in parentheses indicates the contact of the developer unit and the transfer belt.
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 37
2
2.2.4
Adjustment mode (05)
Items in the adjustment mode list in the following pages can be corrected or changed in this adjustment mode (05). Turn ON the power with pressing the digital keys [0] and [5] simultaneously in order to enter this mode. When the power should be turned OFF, be sure to shut down the equipment by pressing the [ENERGY SAVER] button for a few seconds.
Classification List of Adjustment Mode (05)
Scanner
Classification [Log table] [Image position] [Carriage position] [Fixed value] [Shading position] [Distortion] [Reproduction ratio] [Binarization] [ACS]
Adjustment Mode (05) 361, 362 305, 306 359, 360 363, 364 350, 351 308 340 700, 701, 702 1065, 1066, 1675, 1676
[RGB] [STRC table] [Tagbit]
1080, 1081, 1082, 8372 7811, 7812, 7827, 7828 7322-0 to 1, 8102-0 to 1
[Displaying corrected values of leading edge adjustment] [Image density]
4732-0 to 1
Image [Color balance]
[Gamma adjustment] [Gamma balance]
[Black reproduction switching] [Highlight pen]
503, 504, 505, 507, 508, 510, 512, 514, 515, 710, 714, 715, 719, 720, 724, 725, 729, 845, 846, 847, 850, 851, 852, 855, 856, 857, 860, 861, 862, 863, 931, 934, 937, 940, 1550, 1551, 1552, 1553, 1554, 1555, 1556, 1557, 1558, 1559, 1560, 1561, 1562, 1563, 1564, 1565, 1566, 1567, 1568, 1569, 1575, 1576, 1577, 1578, 1579, 1570, 1571, 1572, 1573, 1574, 1580, 1581, 1582, 1583, 1584, 1585, 1586, 1587, 1588, 1589, 7475, 7476, 7477, 7478, 7641-0 to 2, 7642-0 to 2, 8210-0 to 3, 8211-0 to 3, 8212-0 to 3, 8213-0 to 3, 8214-0 to 3, 8215-0 to 3, 8252-0 to 3, 8253-0 to 3, 8254-0 to 3, 8255-0 to 3, 8256-0 to 3, 8257-0 to 3, 8340, 8341, 8342, 8344, 8345, 8346, 8348, 8349, 8350, 8371, 8380, 8381, 8382 1779-0 to 2, 1780-0 to 2, 1781-0 to 2, 1782-0 to 2, 1783-0 to 2, 1784-0 to 2, 1785-0 to 2, 1786-0 to 2, 1787-0 to 2, 1788-0 to 2, 1789-0 to 2, 1790-0 to 2, 1791-0 to 2, 1792-0 to 2, 1793-0 to 2, 1794-0 to 2, 1795-0 to 2, 1796-0 to 2, 1797-0 to 2, 1798-0 to 2, 8050-0 to 2, 8051-0 to 2, 8052-0 to 2, 8053-0 to 2, 8054-0 to 2, 8055-0 to 2, 8056-0 to 2, 8057-0 to 2, 8058-0 to 2, 8059-0 to 2, 8060-0 to 2, 8061-0 to 2, 8062-0 to 2, 8063-0 to 2, 8064-0 to 2, 8065-0 to 2 580, 1642, 1643 590-0 to 2, 591-0 to 2, 592-0 to 2, 880-0 to 2, 881-0 to 2, 882-0 to 2, 883-0 to 2, 949-0 to 2, 1004-0 to 7, 1008, 7315-0 to 2, 7316-0 to 2, 7317-0 to 2, 7318-0 to 2, 7480-0 to 2 1761 1769-0 to 5
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 38 07/06
Classification [Reproduction level adjustment] [Thin line reproduction] [Maximum text density] [Background/Black density] [Saturation] [Background processing] [Sharpness]
Image
Image control
Adjustment Mode (05) 1725 7340, 7341, 8130, 8131 1630, 1631, 1632, 1633 1075, 1076, 1077
2
8325, 8326, 8327, 8373 600, 601, 848, 853, 858, 946, 1070, 1071, 1072, 1688, 1689, 1690, 1691, 1692, 1693, 1694, 1695, 1696, 1697, 1698, 1699, 1700, 1701, 1702, 1708, 1709, 1710, 1711, 1712, 8370 604, 605, 840, 841, 842, 843, 932, 1086, 1087, 1088, 1737, 1738, 1739, 1740, 1741, 1757, 7330, 7335, 7470, 8110, 8111, 8112, 8113, 8114, 8115, 8116, 8117, 8120, 8375 7346, 7348, 8176, 8178
[Switchover on screens] [Smudged/faint text] 648, 649, 925 [Toner saving] 664, 665, 1055, 1057 [Toner limit threshold] 1092-0 to 1, 1093-0 to 1, 1094-0 to 1, 1095-0 to 1, 1096-0 to 1, 8076-0 to 1, 8077-0 to 1, 8078-0 to 1, 8079-0 to 1, 8080-0 to 1, 8081-0 to 1, 8082-0 to 1, 8083-0 to 1, 8084-0 to 1, 8085-0 to 1, 8086-0 to 1, 8087-0 to 1, 8088-0 to 1 [Toner amount] 1046-0 to 1, 1047-0 to 1, 1048-0 to 1, 1049-0 to 1, 1050-0 to 1, 1051-0 to 1, 1052-0 to 1, 1053-0 to 1, 1054-0 to 1, 1612, 1613, 1614, 1615, 1616, 1617, 1618, 1619, 1620 [Reproduction ratio] 884, 1060 [Background pro9104, 9107 cessing] [Filter process] 7324 to 1, 8104-0 to 1 [Setting beam level 667 conversion] [Code length adjust8196 ment] [Image void correc4732-0 to 7 tion] [Margin] 430, 431, 432, 433, 434-0 to 5, 435, 436, 437, 438 [Range correction] 532, 534, 570, 572, 693, 695, 825, 826, 827, 828, 830, 831, 832, 833, 835, 836, 837, 838, 913, 916, 919, 7465, 7466, 7467 [Enforced position 4719, 4720 adjustment] [Temperature/Humid- 393 ity] [Color/Black devel386-0 to 3 oper] [Contrast voltage] 330-0 to 3, 332-0 to 3, 380-0 to 3, 381-0 to 3, 1800-0 to 3, 1801-0 to 3, 1811-0 to 3, 1812-0 to 3, 1815-0 to 3 [Performing] 394, 395, 396 [Sensor] 388, 389, 390-0 to 3, 391-0 to 3, 392 [Main charger] 385-0 to 3 [Laser power] 331-0 to 3, 333-0 to 3, 382-0 to 3, 383-0 to 3, 384-0 to 3, 1802-0 to 3, 1803-0 to 3, 1816-0 to 3, 2725, 2726
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 39 07/06
Classification
Drive system
[ADU motor] [PFP motor] [TLCF motor] [Feed/transport motor] [Transfer belt motor] [Drum motor] [Exit motor] [Fuser roller] [Registration motor] [Aligning amount]
Feeding system
Laser Developer
[Paper pushing amount] [Sideways deviation] [Write start] [Polygonal motor] [Auto-toner] [1st transfer] [2nd transfer]
Transfer
RADF Finisher Maintenance
[Temperature/humidity] [Cleaning] [Developer] [Discharge] [Charger grid calibration] [Bias offset]
Adjustment Mode (05) 491-0 to 11 4707-0 to 8 4708-0 to 8 489-0 to 8 487-0 to 8 481-0 to 8 446-0 to 11 485-0 to 8 483-0 to 8 480, 4100-0 to 4, 4101-0 to 4, 4103-0 to 4, 4104-0 to 4, 4105-0 to 4, 4106-0 to 4, 4107-0 to 4, 4108-0 to 4, 4109-0 to 4, 4110-0 to 4, 4111, 4115-0 to 4, 4116-0 to 4, 4117-0 to 4, 4118-0 to 4, 4120-0 to 4, 4122-0 to 4, 4123-0 to 4, 4124-0 to 4, 4125-0 to 4, 4126, 4127-0 to 4, 4128-0 to 4, 4129-0 to 4 467-0 to 1 408, 428, 429, 497-0 to 5, 4562, 4563, 4564, 4565, 4567-0 to 5, 4568 410, 411, 440, 441, 442, 444, 445, 498-0 to 1, 4065, 4066, 4067-0 to 6 401, 405, 4703, 4704 200, 201, 202, 203, 204, 205-0 to 3, 2409-0 to 3, 2411 2900-0 to 11, 2905-0 to 11, 2981-0 to 1, 2985-0 to 1, 2986-0 to 1, 29870 to 1, 2988-0 to 1, 2920-0 to 11, 2921-0 to 11 2924-0 to 7, 2925-0 to 7, 2926-0 to 7, 2927-0 to 7, 2983-0 to 1, 2984-0 to 1 247, 248, 270, 2763, 2764 2961-0 to 1, 2962-0 to 1, 2963-0 to 1, 2966-0 to 1 2627-0 to 1, 2628-0 to 1, 2629-0 to 1, 2630-0 to 1 2598-0 to 3 2622-0 to 1, 2623-0 to 1, 2624-0 to 1, 2625-0 to 1
2934-0 to 7, 2935-0 to 7, 2936-0 to 7, 2937-0 to 7, 2938-0 to 7, 2939-0 to 7, 2940-0 to 7, 2941-0 to 7 [Aligning amount] 354, 355 [Transporting] 357, 358, 365, 366 [Binding/Folding posi- 468-0 to 2 tion] [Equipment number] 976 [Maintenance] 4721
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 40 07/09
Procedure 1 [0][5] [POWER]
[Digital key] (Code)
[Digital key] *[FUNCTION CLEAR] (Key in a value)
[START]
[FAX] [ENTER] or [START] [INTERRUPT] (Stores value in RAM) (Test copy)
[CANCEL]
[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)
[CLEAR] *Press [FUNCTION CLEAR] to enter minus (-). (Corrects value)
Procedure 2
[0][5] [POWER]
(
[Digital key] (Code)
[START]
[Digital key] (Code)
[START]
Value displayed
)
[ENTER] ([FAX] [START]) or (Test copy) [INTERRUPT] (Value unchangeable)
[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)
Procedure 3
[0][5] [POWER]
[UP] or [DOWN] (Adjust a value)
[ENTER] ([FAX] [START]) or (Test copy) [INTERRUPT] (Stores value in RAM)
[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)
[CANCEL] [CLEAR] (Corrects value)
Procedure 4 [CANCEL] [0][5] [POWER]
[Digital key] (Code)
[START]
[START] ([FAX] [ENTER] or [Digital key] [START] [Digital key] [POWER] [INTERRUPT] (Sub code) OFF/ON [START]) *[FUNCTION CLEAR] Stores value (Exit) (Key in a value) (Test copy) in RAM [CLEAR] (Corrects value) [CLEAR] (Corrects value) *Press [FUNCTION CLEAR] to enter minus (-).
Procedure 5 [CANCEL] or [CLEAR] [0][5] [POWER]
[Digital key] (Code)
[START]
[UP] [ENTER] or or [DOWN] [INTERRUPT] (Adjust a value) Stores value in RAM
Automatic adjustment
[FAX] [START] (Test copy)
[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)
Procedure 6 [0][5] [POWER]
[Digital key] (Code)
[START]
Automatic adjustment
[FAX] [COPY]) (Test copy)
[POWER]OFF/ON (Exit)
*[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]
* *
When the automatic adjustment ends abnormally, an error message is displayed. Return to standby screen by pressing the [CANCEL] or [CLEAR] button.
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 41
2
Procedure 7 [CANCEL] [Digital key] (Code)
[0][5] [POWER]
[ENTER] Stores value in RAM
Automatic adjustment
[START]
*[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]
* *
[FAX] [START] (Test copy)
[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)
When the automatic adjustment ends abnormally, an error message is displayed. Return to standby screen by pressing the [CANCEL] or [CLEAR] button.
Procedure 10 [0][5] [POWER]
[Digital key] (Code)
[START]
[Digital key] (Sub code)
[START]
Value displayed
[START]
[ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Value unchangeable)
[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)
Procedure 14 [0][5] [POWER]
[Digital key] (Code)
[START]
[Digital key] (Sub code)
[START]
[CLEAR] (Corrects value)
[ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] Stores value in RAM [CANCEL] (Corrects value)
[UP] or [DOWN] (Adjust a value)
[FAX] [START] (Test copy)
[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)
Note: The fuser roller temperature control at the adjustment mode is different from that at the normal state. Therefore, the problem of fusing efficiency may be occurred in the test copy at the adjustment mode. In that case, turn ON the power normally, leave the equipment for approx. 3 minutes after it has become ready state and then start up the adjustment mode again.
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 42
Test print pattern in Adjustment Mode (05) Operation: One test print is printed out when the [FAX] button is pressed after the code is keyed in at Standby Screen. Code
Types of test pattern
Remarks
1
Grid pattern (Black)
For printer related adjustment
3
Grid pattern (Black/Duplex printing)
Refer to 3.6.3 Printer related adjustment
4
For gamma adjustment (Color/Black integrated pattern)
Refer to 3.7.1 Automatic gamma adjustment
5
For gamma adjustment (Color)
Refer to 3.7.1 Automatic gamma adjustment
6
For gamma adjustment (Black)
For checking the gradation reproduction
7
For gamma adjustment (Color)
For checking the gradation reproduction
8
Grid pattern (Color)
10
For gamma adjustment (Black)
Refer to 3.7.1 Automatic gamma adjustment
12
Secondary scanning direction 33 gradation steps (Y)
For checking the image of printer section
13
Secondary scanning direction 33 gradation steps (M)
For checking the image of printer section
14
Secondary scanning direction 33 gradation steps (C)
For checking the image of printer section
15
Secondary scanning direction 33 gradation steps (K)
For checking the image of printer section
55
Grid pattern (Full Color / Thick paper 2)
Refer to 3.6.2 Paper alignment at the registration roller
56
Grid pattern (Full Color / Thick paper 3)
Refer to 3.6.2 Paper alignment at the registration roller
57
Grid pattern (Full Color / OHP)
Refer to 3.6.2 Paper alignment at the registration roller
58
Grid pattern (Black / Thick paper 2)
Refer to 3.6.2 Paper alignment at the registration roller
59
Grid pattern (Black / Thick paper 3)
Refer to 3.6.2 Paper alignment at the registration roller
60
Grid pattern (Black / OHP)
Refer to 3.6.2 Paper alignment at the registration roller
63
For color deviation correction (Full Color)
Only for A3/LD size
70
Printer gamma correction table creation pattern (Plain paper)
Refer to 3.8.1 Automatic gamma adjustment (Printer Function)
71
Printer gamma correction table confirmation pattern (Plain paper)
Refer to 3.8.1 Automatic gamma adjustment (Printer Function)
72
Printer gamma correction table creation pattern (Thick paper 1)
Refer to 3.8.1 Automatic gamma adjustment (Printer Function)
73
Printer gamma correction table confirmation pattern (Thick paper 1)
Refer to 3.8.1 Automatic gamma adjustment (Printer Function)
74
Printer gamma correction table creation pattern (Thick paper 2)
Refer to 3.8.1 Automatic gamma adjustment (Printer Function)
75
Printer gamma correction table confirmation pattern (Thick paper 2)
Refer to 3.8.1 Automatic gamma adjustment (Printer Function)
76
Printer gamma correction table creation pattern (Thick paper 3)
Refer to 3.8.1 Automatic gamma adjustment (Printer Function)
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 43 06/09
2
Code
Types of test pattern
Remarks
77
Printer gamma correction table confirmation pattern (Thick paper 3)
Refer to 3.8.1 Automatic gamma adjustment (Printer Function)
78
Printer gamma correction table creation pattern (Special paper 1)
Refer to 3.8.1 Automatic gamma adjustment (Printer Function)
79
Printer gamma correction table confirmation pattern (Special paper 1)
Refer to 3.8.1 Automatic gamma adjustment (Printer Function)
80
Printer gamma correction table creation pattern (Special paper 2)
Refer to 3.8.1 Automatic gamma adjustment (Printer Function)
81
Printer gamma correction table confirmation pattern (Special paper 2)
Refer to 3.8.1 Automatic gamma adjustment (Printer Function)
82
Printer gamma correction table creation pattern (Recycled paper)
Refer to 3.8.1 Automatic gamma adjustment (Printer Function)
83
Printer gamma correction table confirmation pattern (Recycled paper)
Refer to 3.8.1 Automatic gamma adjustment (Printer Function)
84
Printer gamma correction table creation pattern (Thick paper 4)
Refer to 3.8.1 Automatic gamma adjustment (Printer Function)
85
Printer gamma correction table confirmation pattern (Thick paper 4)
Refer to 3.8.1 Automatic gamma adjustment (Printer Function)
98
Grid pattern -2 (For printing C and K / Plain paper)
Refer to 3.6.3 Printer related adjustment
99
Grid pattern -2 (For printing C and K / Thick paper 1)
100
Grid pattern - 1 (Full color / Thick paper 1)
101
Grid pattern - 1 (Black / Thick paper 1)
104
Color deviation confirmation pattern (A3/LD)
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 44 07/06
Notes: 1. The digit after the hyphen in “Code” of the following table is a sub code. 2. In “RAM”, the NVRAM of the board in which the data of each code is stored is indicated. “M” stands for the LGC board and “SYS” stands for the SYS board.
Code 200 201 202 203 204
205-0 205-1 205-2 205-3 247
Adjustment mode (05) Default ClassifiFunc- Develop- Initialization of All ALL ment color auto(Y,M,C,K) <0-255> toner sensor Y ALL light amount <0-255> correction tarM ALL get value <0-255> C ALL <0-255> K ALL <0-255> Y Develop- Normal speed ment mode Adjustment of M auto-toner initial adjustC ment reference setK ting value (YMCK) Transfer Temperature/humidity sensor humidity display Drum thermistor temperature display (K) Temperature/humidity sensor temperature display
ALL ALL ALL ALL
130 <0-255> 130 <0-255> 130 <0-255> 130 <0-255>
RAM
Contents
M
The value starts changing approx. 3 minutes after this adjustment started. The value is automatically set during this adjustment (approx. 2 minutes). (As the value increases, the sensor output increases correspondingly.) (Chap. 3.2)
M M M M
5 5 5 5
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
50 <0-100>
M
ALL
23 <0-100> 23 <0-100>
M
248
Transfer
270
Transfer
305
Scanner
Image location adjustment of secondary scanning direction (scanner section)
ALL
124 <92-164>
SYS
306
Scanner
Image location adjustment of secondary scanning direction (scanner section)
ALL
113 <0-255>
SYS
308
Scanner
Distortion mode
ALL
-
-
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
5
M
ALL
ALL
Procedur e
M
Displays the humidity value set at the image quality open-loop control transfer correction. (Unit: °C)
2
Displays the temperature value set at the image quality open-loop control transfer correction. When the value increases by “1”, the image shifts by approx. 0.137 mm toward the trailing edge of the paper. When the value increases by “1”, the image shifts by approx. 0.0423 mm toward the front side of the paper. Moves carriages to the adjusting position. (Chap. 3.6.4)
2
2
1
1
6
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 45
2
Code 330-0
Classification Image control
330-1 330-2 330-3 331-0
Image control
331-1 331-2 331-3 332-0
Image control
332-1 332-2 332-3 333-0
Image control
333-1 333-2 333-3
Items Image quality closed-loop control contrast voltage correction/ Mode 2 maximum number of time corrected Image quality closed-loop control laser power correction/Mode 2 maximum number of time corrected Image quality closed-loop control contrast voltage correction/ Mode 1 maximum number of time corrected Image quality closed-loop control laser power correction/Mode 1 maximum number of time corrected
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- Y ALL 3 <0-16> M ALL 3 <0-16> C ALL 3 <0-16> K ALL 3 <0-16> Y
ALL
M
ALL
C
ALL
K
ALL
Y
ALL
M
ALL
C
ALL
K
ALL
Y
ALL
M
ALL
C
ALL
K
ALL
340
Scanner
Reproduction ratio adjustment of secondary scanning direction (scanner section)
ALL
350
Scanner
Shading position adjustment
Original glass RADF
ALL
Adjustment of RADF paper alignment
for single sided original for double sided original
351 354
RADF
355
ALL ALL ALL
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
RAM
Contents
M
Sets the maximum correction number of time of the contrast voltage in the closed-loop control mode 2.
M M M
2 <0-16> 2 <0-16> 2 <0-16> 2 <0-16> 1 <0-16> 1 <0-16> 1 <0-16> 1 <0-16>
M
1 <0-16> 1 <0-16> 1 <0-16> 1 <0-16> 128 <63-193>
M
117 <94-162> 133 <94-162> 10 <0-20> 10 <0-20>
M M
M M
Sets the maximum correction number of time of the laser power in the closed-loop control mode 2.
M
Sets the maximum correction number of time of the contrast voltage in the closed-loop control mode 1.
4
4 4 4
4 4 4 4
Sets the maximum correction number of time of the laser power in the closed-loop control mode 1.
M SYS
4
4
M
M
4
4
M M
Procedur e
4 4 4 4 1
SYS
When the value increases by “1”, the reproduction ratio in the secondary scanning direction (vertical to paper feeding direction) increases by approx. 0.223%. 0.1369 mm/step
1
SYS
0.1369 mm/step
1
SYS
When the value increases by “1”, the aligning amount increases by approx. 0.5 mm.
1
SYS
1
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 46 07/09
Code
Classification
357
RADF
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- Fine adjustment of RADF ALL 50 transport speed <0-100>
RAM
Contents
SYS
When the value increases by “1”, the reproduction ratio of the secondary scanning direction on original (fed from the RADF) increases by approx. 0.1%. When the value increases by “1”, the image of original fed from the RADF shifts toward the rear side of paper by approx. 0.0423 mm. When the value increases by “1”, the carriage position shifts by approx. 0.1 mm toward the exit side when using the RADF. 0: Same log table as the one used at copying with original glass 1: Background reproduction - Light 2 2: Background reproduction - Light 1 3: Background reproduction - Dark 1 4: Background reproduction - Dark 2 0: Same log table as the one used at copying with original glass 1: Background reproduction - Light 2 2: Background reproduction - Light 1 3: Background reproduction - Dark 1 4: Background reproduction - Dark 2 Transfers the characteristic values of the scanner (shading correction factor / RGB color correction / reproduction ratio color aberration correction) from the NVRAM of the SYS board to the NVRAM of the SLG board.
358
RADF
RADF sideways deviation adjustment
ALL
128 <0-255>
SYS
359
Scanner
Carriage position adjustment during scanning from RADF
ALL (black) ALL (color)
128 <0-255> 128 <0-255>
SYS
Log table switching for RADF copying
ALL (color)
0 <0-4>
SYS
ALL (black)
0 <0-4>
SYS
SCN
-
SYS
360
361
Scanner
362
363
Scanner
Data transfer of characteristic value of scanner / SYS board → SLG board
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
SYS
Procedur e 1
2
1
1 1
1
1
6
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 47
Code
Classification
364
Scanner
365
RADF
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- Data transfer of characterSCN istic value of scanner / SLG board → SYS board
Transfers the characteristic values of the scanner (shading correction factor / RGB color correction / reproduction ratio color aberration correction) from the NVRAM of the SLG board to the NVRAM of the SYS board. When the value increases by “1”, the copied image of original fed from the RADF shifts toward the trailing edge of paper by approx. 0.1 mm. Displays the contrast voltage initial value set by the open-loop control. (Unit: V)
SYS
ALL
50 <0-100>
SYS
Y
ALL
M
M
ALL
C
ALL
K
ALL
Y
ALL
M
ALL
381-2
C
ALL
381-3
K
ALL
Y
ALL
M
ALL
C
ALL
K
ALL
Y
ALL
M
ALL
383-2
C
ALL
383-3
K
ALL
285 <0-999> 310 <0-999> 310 <0-999> 260 <0-999> 300 <0-999> 300 <0-999> 300 <0-999> 300 <0-999> 322 <0-999> 322 <0-999> 322 <0-999> 322 <0-999> 82 <0-255> 82 <0-255> 82 <0-255> 82 <0-255>
Image control
380-1 380-2
Image quality open-loop control/ contrast voltage initial value display
SYS
50 <0-100>
380-0
for single sided original for double sided original
Contents
ALL
366
RADF leading edge position 1 adjustment
RAM
380-3 381-0
Image control
381-1
382-0
Image control
382-1 382-2
Contrast voltage actual value display
Image quality open-loop control/ laser power initial value display
382-3 383-0 383-1
Image control
Laser power actual value display
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
M
Procedur e 6
1 1
10 10
M
10
M
10
M M
Displays the contrast voltage when printing is operated. (Unit: V)
10 10
M
10
M
10
M M
Displays the laser power initial value set by the open-loop control. (Unit: µW)
10 10
M
10
M
10
M M
Displays the laser power when printing is operated. (bit value)
10 10
M
10
M
10
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 48 07/09
Code 384-0
Classification Image control
384-1 384-2 384-3 385-0
Image control
385-1 385-2 385-3 386-0
Image control
386-1 386-2 386-3 388
389
390-0 390-1 390-2 390-3
Image control
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- Laser power Y ALL 322 <0-999> actual value display M ALL 322 <0-999> C ALL 322 <0-999> K ALL 322 <0-999> Main charger Y ALL 77 grid bias <0-255> actual value M ALL 77 display <0-255> C ALL 77 <0-255> K ALL 77 <0-255> Y ALL 80 Developer <0-255> bias DC (-) actual value M ALL 80 display <0-255> C ALL 80 <0-255> K ALL 80 <0-255> Output value When the ALL 0 light <0-1023> display of image quality source is sensor OFF ALL 0 Transfer <0-1023> belt surface High density pattern Y High density pattern M High density pattern C High density pattern K
RAM M M
Displays the laser power when printing is operated. (Unit: µW)
Procedur e 10 10
M
10
M
10
M M
Displays the main charger grid bias when printing is operated. (bit value)
10 10
M
10
M
10
M M
Displays the developer bias when printing is operated. (bit value)
10 10
M
10
M
10
M
M
ALL
0 <0-1023>
M
ALL
0 <0-1023>
M
ALL
0 <0-1023>
M
ALL
0 <0-1023>
M
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Contents
Displays the output value of image quality sensor when the sensor light source is OFF. Displays the output value of image quality sensor (when there is no test pattern) on the transfer belt. Displays the output value of image quality sensor when a highdensity test pattern is written. The larger the value is, the smaller the toner amount adhered becomes.
2
2
10 10 10 10
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 49
2
Code 391-0
Classification Image control
391-1 391-2 391-3
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- Output value Low denALL 0 sity pat<0-1023> display of image quality tern Y sensor ALL 0 Low den<0-1023> sity pattern M Low denALL 0 sity pat<0-1023> tern C Low denALL 0 sity pat<0-1023> tern K ALL 0 Light amount adjustment <0-255> result of image quality sensor
RAM
Contents
M
Displays the output value of image quality sensor when a low-density test pattern is written. The larger the value is, the smaller the toner amount adhered becomes.
M M M M
392
Image control
393
Image control
Relative humidity display during latest closed-loop control
ALL
0 <0-100>
M
394
Image control
ALL
-
-
395
Image control
ALL
-
M
396
Image control
Enforced performing of image quality open-loop control Enforced performing of image quality color closedloop control Image quality control initialization
ALL
-
M
401
Laser
PRT
128 <0-255> 128 <0-255>
M
405
Fine adjustment of polygonal motor rotation speed (reproduction ratio adjustment)
PPC
M
408
Laser
Leading edge position adjustment Common items
PPC
40 <0-80>
M
410
Laser
Adjustment of primary scanning laser writing start position
PPC
128 <0-255> 128 <0-255>
M
Leading edge position adjustment
ALL
411 428
Laser
PFP lower drawer
PRT
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
20 <0-40>
M M
Procedur e 10 10 10 10
The LED light amount adjustment value of this sensor is the reference value to set the reflected light from the belt surface. Displays the relative humidity at the latest performing of the closed-loop control. Performs the image quality open-loop control. Performs the image quality closedloop control. Performs the image quality control, initialize each control value. When the value increases by “1”, the reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction increases by approx. 0.07%. (approx. 0.1 mm/step) When the value increases by "1", the image shifts toward the trailing edge of the paper by approx. 0.15 mm. When the value increases by “1”, the writing start position shifts to the front side by approx. 0.0423 mm. When the value increases by "1", the image shifts toward the trailing edge of the paper by approx. 0.15 mm.
2
2
6 6 6 1 1
1
1 1 1
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 50
Code
Classification
429
Laser
430
Image
431
Image
432
Image
433
Image
434-0
Image
434-1
Image
434-2
Image
434-3
Image
434-4
Image
434-5
Image
435
Image
Items Leading edge position adjustment
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- LCF ALL 20 <0-40>
Top margin adjustment (blank area at the leading edge of the paper)) Left margin adjustment (blank area at the left of the paper along the paper feeding direction) Right margin adjustment (blank area at the right of the paper along the paper feeding direction) Bottom margin adjustment (blank area at the trailing edge of the paper) Bottom margin adjustment (blank area at the trailing edge of the paper) /Reverse side at duplexing Right margin adjustment (blank area at the right of the paper along the paper feeding direction) /Reverse side at duplexing Bottom margin adjustment (blank area at the trailing edge of the paper) /Reverse side at duplexing (black) Right margin adjustment (blank area at the right of the paper along the paper feeding direction) /Reverse side at duplexing (color) Bottom margin adjustment (blank area at the trailing edge of the paper) /Reverse side at duplexing (color) Right margin adjustment (blank area at the right of the paper along the paper feeding direction) /Reverse side at duplexing (Thick paper 1) Top margin adjustment (blank area at the leading edge of the paper)
RAM
Contents
M
When the value increases by "1", the image shifts toward the trailing edge of the paper by approx. 0.15 mm. When the value increases by “1”, the blank area becomes wider by approx. 0.0423 mm.
Procedur e 1
2 1
PPC
0 <0-255>
M
PPC
0 <0-255>
M
PPC
0 <0-255>
M
1
PPC
0 <0-255>
M
1
PPC/ PRT
24 <0-255>
M
PPC/ PRT
18 <0-255>
M
4
PPC/ PRT
24 <0-255>
M
4
PPC/ PRT
18 <0-255>
M
4
PPC/ PRT
18 <0-255>
M
4
PPC/ PRT
12 <0-255>
M
4
PRT
24 <0-255>
M
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
When the value increases, the blank area becomes wider.
When the value increases by “1”, the blank area becomes wider by approx. 0.0423 mm.
1
4
1
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 51
Code
Classification
436
Image
437
Image
438
Image
440
Laser
441 442 444 445 446-0 446-1 446-2 446-3 446-4 446-5 446-6 446-7 446-8 446-9
446-10
446-11
Drive
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- Left margin adjustment PRT 0 <0-255> (blank area at the left of the paper along the paper feeding direction) Right margin adjustment PRT 0 (blank area at the right of <0-255> the paper along the paper feeding direction) Bottom margin adjustment PRT 0 (blank area at the trailing <0-255> edge of the paper) ALL 20 Leading edge 1st drawer <0-40> position adjustment 2nd ALL 20 drawer <0-40> Bypass ALL 20 feeding <0-40> PFP ALL 20 <0-40> Duplex ALL 20 feeding <0-40> PRT 128 Fine adjustTransport speed: <0-255> ment of exit Normal motor rotaFAX 128 speed tional speed <0-255> PPC 128 <0-255> Transport PRT 128 speed: <0-255> DeceleratFAX 128 ing <0-255> PPC 128 <0-255> Transport PRT 128 speed: <0-255> High FAX 128 speed <0-255> PPC 128 <0-255> Reverse ALL 128 rotation: <0-255> Normal speed Reverse ALL 128 rotation: <0-255> Decelerating Reverse ALL 128 rotation: <0-255> High speed
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
RAM M
M
Contents When the value increases by “1”, the blank area becomes wider by approx. 0.0423 mm.
M M M M
Procedur e 1
1
1 When the value increases by "1", the image shifts toward the trailing edge of the paper by approx. 0.15 mm.
1 1 1
M
1
M
1
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 52
Code 467-0
Classification Paper feeding
467-1
468-0
Finisher
468-1 468-2 480
Paper feeding
481-0
Drive
481-1
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- Adjustment of Plain ALL 0 paper <0-255> paper pushing amount/ Thick ALL 0 Duplex feedpaper 1 <0-255> ing (short size) Fine adjustment of binding position/ folding position
A4-R /LT-R B4
ALL
A3/LD
ALL
Paper feed aligning amount adjustment (using icons) Fine adjustTransport speed: ment of drum Normal motor rotational speed speed
481-2 Transport speed: Decelerating
481-4 481-5
Transport speed: High speed
481-7 481-8
483-2 483-3 483-4
483-7
FAX
PRT FAX
PRT FAX PPC
Drive
Fine adjustment of registration motor rotational speed
Transport speed: Normal speed
PRT FAX PPC
Transport speed: Decelerating
483-5 483-6
PRT
PPC
481-6
483-1
ALL
PPC
481-3
483-0
ALL
PRT FAX PPC
Transport speed: High speed
483-8
PRT FAX PPC
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
0 <-14-14> 0 <-14-14> 0 <-14-14> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255>
Procedur e
RAM
Contents
M
When the value increases by “1”, the driving speed of ADU transport roller increases by approx. 2 ms when the paper transport is started from the registration section. When the value increases by “1”, the binding/folding position shifts toward the right page by 0.25 mm.
1
Press the button on the LCD.
4
M
M M M M
1
4 4 4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 53
2
Code
Classification
485-0
Drive
485-1 485-2 485-3 485-4 485-5 485-6 485-7 485-8 487-0
Drive
487-1 487-2 487-3 487-4 487-5 487-6 487-7 487-8 489-0 489-1 489-2 489-3 489-4 489-5 489-6 489-7 489-8
Drive
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- Fine adjustTransport PRT 131 speed: <0-255> ment of fuser roller rotaNormal FAX 128 tional speed speed <0-255> PPC 128 <0-255> Transport PRT 128 speed: <0-255> DeceleratFAX 128 ing <0-255> PPC 128 <0-255> Transport PRT 128 speed: <0-255> High FAX 128 speed <0-255> PPC 128 <0-255> Transport PRT 128 Fine adjust<0-255> speed: ment of transNormal fer belt motor FAX 128 speed rotational <0-255> speed PPC 128 <0-255> PRT 128 Transport speed: <0-255> DeceleratFAX 128 ing <0-255> PPC 128 <0-255> Transport PRT 128 speed: <0-255> High FAX 128 speed <0-255> PPC 128 <0-255> Transport PRT 136 Fine adjustspeed: <0-255> ment of feed/ Normal transport FAX 128 speed motor rota<0-255> tional speed PPC 128 <0-255> Transport PRT 128 speed: <0-255> DeceleratFAX 128 ing <0-255> PPC 128 <0-255> Transport PRT 128 speed: <0-255> High FAX 128 speed <0-255> PPC 128 <0-255>
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
RAM
Contents
Procedur e
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M M M M
When the value increases, the reproduction ratio in the secondary scanning direction becomes larger. (Approx. 0.1 mm/1 steps)
4 4 4 4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 54 06/09
Code 491-0
Classification Drive system
491-1 491-2 491-3 491-4 491-5 491-6 491-7 491-8 491-9
491-10
491-11
497-0
Laser
497-1 497-2 497-3 497-4 497-5 498-0
Laser
498-1 503 504
Image
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- Fine adjustTransport PRT 128 speed: <0-255> ment of ADU motor rotaNormal FAX 128 tional speed speed <0-255> PPC 128 <0-255> Transport PRT 128 speed: <0-255> DeceleratFAX 128 ing <0-255> PPC 128 <0-255> Transport PRT 128 speed: <0-255> High FAX 128 speed <0-255> PPC 128 <0-255> Transport ALL 128 <0-255> speed: Normal speed ALL 128 Transport <0-255> speed: Decelerating Transport ALL 128 speed: <0-255> High speed Adjustment of 1st ALL 128 drawer sidedrawer <0-255> ways devia2nd ALL 128 tion drawer <0-255> PFP upper ALL 128 drawer <0-255> PFP lower ALL 128 drawer <0-255> LCF ALL 128 <0-255> Bypass ALL 128 feeding <0-255> Adjustment of Long size ALL 128 duplex feed<0-255> ing sideways Short size ALL 128 deviation (A4/LT or <0-255> smaller) Text/Photo PPC 128 Density (black) <0-255> adjustment Fine adjustText PPC 128 ment of “man(black) <0-255> ual density” /Center value
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
RAM
Contents
Procedur e
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M M M
When the value increases by “1”, the image shifts toward the front side by 0.0423 mm.
4 4 4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M M SYS SYS
When the value increases by “1”, the image shifts toward the front side by 0.0423 mm.
4
When the value increases, the image of the center step density becomes darker.
1
4
1
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 55 06/10
2
Code
Classification
505
Image
507
508
Image
510
514
Image
515 532
Image
534
570
Image
572
580
Image
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- Text/Photo PPC 20 Density (black) <0-255> adjustment Fine adjustText PPC 20 ment of “man(black) <0-255> ual density” /Light step value Text/Photo PPC 20 Density (black) <0-255> adjustment Fine adjustText PPC 20 ment of “man(black) <0-255> ual density” /Dark step value Text/Photo PPC 128 Density (black) <0-255> adjustment Fine adjustText PPC 128 ment of “auto(black) <0-255> matic density” Range correc- Text/Photo PPC 40 (black) <0-255> tion Background peak Text PPC 40 adjustment (black) <0-255> Range correc- Text/Photo PPC (black) tion on original manually set on the original glass Text PPC (black)
Automatic gamma adjustment
PPC (black)
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
22 <11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44> 22 <11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44>
-
RAM
Contents
SYS
Sets the changing amount by 1 step at the density adjustment. When the value increases, the image of the “light” steps becomes lighter. Sets the changing amount by 1 step at the density adjustment. When the value increases, the image of the “dark” steps becomes darker. When the value increases, the image becomes darker.
SYS
SYS SYS
SYS SYS SYS SYS
SYS
SYS
-
When the value increases, the background of the image (low density area) becomes harder to be printed out. Sets whether the values of the background peak and text peak are fixed or not. One’s place is an adjustment for “automatic density” and ten’s place is for “manual density”. Once they are fixed, the range correction is performed with standard values. The values of the background peak and text peak affect the reproduction of the background density and text density respectively. 1: fixed/fixed 2: varied/fixed 3: fixed/varied 4: varied/varied * Background peak/ Text peak Adjusts the gradation reproduction automatically.
Procedur e 1 1
1 1
1 1 1 1
1
1
7
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 56
Code
Classification
590-0
Image
590-1 590-2 591-0
Image
591-1 591-2 592-0
Image
592-1 592-2 600
Image
601
604
Image
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- Adjustment of L PPC 128 (black) <0-255> gamma balance (Text/ M PPC 128 Photo) (black) <0-255> H PPC 128 (black) <0-255> Adjustment of L PPC 128 gamma bal(black) <0-255> ance (Text) M PPC 128 (black) <0-255> H PPC 128 (black) <0-255> Adjustment of L PPC 128 gamma bal(black) <0-255> ance (Photo) M PPC 128 (black) <0-255> H PPC 128 (black) <0-255> Background Text/Photo PPC 5 adjustment (black) <1-9> Text PPC 5 (black) <1-9>
Sharpness adjustment
Image
649
664 665
Image
SYS SYS SYS SYS
4 4 4
4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS SYS
SYS
Text
PPC (black)
128 <0-255>
SYS
Adjustment of smudged/faint text
Text/Photo
PPC (black) PPC (black)
2 <0-4> 2 <0-4>
SYS
Upper limit in toner saving mode
PS
PRT (black) PRT (black)
176 <0-255> 176 <0-255>
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
4
SYS
128 <0-255>
PCL
When the value increases, the density in the target area becomes higher. L: Low density area M : Medium density area H: High density area
Procedur e
4
PPC (black)
Text
Contents
SYS
Text/Photo
605
648
RAM
SYS
SYS SYS
When the value decreases, the background becomes darker. When the value increases, the background becomes lighter. When the value increases, the image becomes sharper. When the value decreases, the image becomes softer. The smaller the value is, the less the moire becomes. * The default value 0 is equivalent to 16 (center value). Adjustment of the smudged/faint text. With increasing the value, the faint text is suppressed, and with decreasing it, the smudged text is suppressed. When the value decreases, the printing density becomes lighter.
1 1
1
1
1 1
1 1
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 57
2
Code
Classification
667-0
Image
667-1 667-2 667-3 667-4 693
Image
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- Setting beam Beam PPC 0 level 0/4 (black) <0-255> level conversion Beam PPC 63 level 1/4 (black) <0-255> Beam PPC 127 level 2/4 (black) <0-255> Beam PPC 191 level 3/4 (black) <0-255> Beam PPC 255 level 4/4 (black) <0-255> Range correc- Text/Photo PPC tion on origi(black) nal set on the RADF
RAM
Contents
M
Sets the beam level for 4 divided smoothing. The primary scanning direction is divided into 4 and the dot width is set at the 5 levels (incl. level “0”). The smaller the value is, the smaller the primary scanning direction of the dot becomes. Sets whether the values of the background peak and text peak are fixed or not. One’s place is an adjustment for “automatic density” and ten’s place is for “manual density”. Once they are fixed, the range correction is performed with standard values. The values of the background peak and text peak affect the reproduction of the background density and text density respectively. 1: fixed/fixed 2: varied/fixed 3: fixed/varied 4: varied/varied * Background peak/ Text peak When the value increases, the image of center value density becomes lighter. Sets the changing amount by 1 step at the density adjustment. When the value increases, the image of “light” side becomes lighter. Sets the changing amount by 1 step at the density adjustment. When the value increases, the image of the center step density becomes darker.
M M M M
22 <11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44>
SYS
Text
PPC (black)
22 <11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44>
SYS
Center value
FAX (black)
125 <0-255>
SYS
701
Light step value
FAX (black)
20 <0-255>
SYS
702
Dark step value
FAX (black)
20 <0-255>
SYS
Photo
FAX (black)
128 <0-255>
SYS
Text/Photo
FAX (black)
128 <0-255>
SYS
695
700
710 714
Image
Image
Adjustment of binarized threshold (Text)
Density adjustment “manual density” fine adjustment/ Center value
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
Procedur e 4 4 4 4 4 1
1
1
1
1 1 1
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 58
Code
Classification
715
Image
719
720
Image
724
Items Density adjustment “manual density” fine adjustment/ Light step value Density adjustment “manual density” fine adjustment/ Dark step value Density adjustment “automatic density” fine adjustment Range correction on original manually set on the original glass
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- Photo FAX 20 (black) <0-255>
Text/Photo
FAX (black) Text/Photo FAX (black)
20 <0-255> 20 <0-255>
SYS
Photo
SCN (black)
826
Text
SCN (black)
827
Photo
SCN (black)
828
Gray scale
SCN (black)
12 <11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44> 12 <11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44> 12 <11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44> 12 <11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44>
825
Image
Sets the changing amount by 1 step at the density adjustment. When the value increases, the image of the “light” steps becomes lighter. Sets the changing amount by 1 step at the density adjustment. When the value increases, the image of the “dark” steps becomes darker. When the value increases, the image becomes darker.
SYS
Text/Photo
729
SYS
20 <0-255>
128 <0-255> 128 <0-255>
Image
Contents
FAX (black)
FAX (black) Text/Photo FAX (black)
725
RAM
Photo
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
SYS
SYS SYS SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
Sets whether the values of the background peak and text peak are fixed or not. One’s place is an adjustment for “automatic density” and ten’s place is for “manual density”. Once they are fixed, the range correction is performed with standard values. The values of the background peak and text peak affect the reproduction of the background density and text density respectively. 1: fixed/fixed 2: varied/fixed 3: fixed/varied 4: varied/varied * Background peak/ Text peak
Procedur e 1 1
1 1
1 1 1
1
1
1
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 59 06/10
2
Code
Classification
830
Image
831
832
833
835
Image
836 837 838 840
Image
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- Range correc- Text/Photo SCN 12 (black) <11-14, tion on original set on the 21-24, RADF 31-34, 41-44> Text SCN 12 (black) <11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44> Photo SCN 12 (black) <11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44> Gray scale SCN 12 (black) <11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44>
Range correc- Text/Photo SCN tion Back(black) ground peak Text SCN adjustment (black) Photo SCN (black) Gray scale SCN (black) Text/Photo SCN Sharpness adjustment (black)
48 <0-255> 48 <0-255> 36 <0-255> 36 <0-255> 128 <0-255>
RAM
Contents
SYS
Sets whether the values of the background peak and text peak are fixed or not. One’s place is an adjustment for “automatic density” and ten’s place is for “manual density”. Once they are fixed, the range correction is performed with standard values. The values of the background peak and text peak affect the reproduction of the background density and text density respectively. 1: fixed/fixed 2: varied/fixed 3: fixed/varied 4: varied/varied * Background peak/ Text peak When the value increases, the background of the image (low density area) becomes harder to be printed out.
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS
841
Text
SCN (black)
128 <0-255>
SYS
842
Photo
SCN (black)
128 <0-255>
SYS
843
Gray scale
SCN (black)
128 <0-255>
SYS
Text/Photo
SCN (black)
128 <0-255>
SYS
Text
SCN (black)
64 <0-255>
SYS
SCN (black) Gray scale SCN (black)
128 <0-255> 128 <0-255>
SYS
845 846
Image
Density adjustment “manual density” fine adjustment/ Center value
847 848
Photo
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
SYS
Procedur e 1
1
1
1
1 1 1 1
When the value increases, the image becomes sharper. When the value decreases, the image becomes softer. The smaller the value is, the less the moire becomes.
1 1 1 1
When the value increases, the image becomes darker. When the value increases, the image becomes lighter. When the value increases, the image becomes darker.
1 1 1 1
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 60
Code
Classification
850
Image
851 852 853 855
Image
856 857 858 860
Image
861
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- Text/Photo SCN 20 Density (black) <0-255> adjustment “manual denText SCN 20 sity” fine (black) <0-255> adjustment/ Photo SCN 20 Light step (black) <0-255> value Gray scale SCN 20 (black) <0-255> Text/Photo SCN 20 Density (black) <0-255> adjustment “manual denText SCN 12 sity” fine (black) <0-255> adjustment/ Photo SCN 20 Dark step (black) <0-255> value Gray scale SCN 20 (black) <0-255> Text/Photo SCN 128 Density (black) <0-255> adjustment “automatic density” fine Text SCN 64 adjustment (black) <0-255>
862
Photo
863 880-0
Image
880-1
Adjustment of gamma balance (Text/ Photo)
880-2 881-0
Image
881-1
Adjustment of gamma balance (Text)
881-2 882-0
Image
882-1
Adjustment of gamma balance (Photo)
882-2 883-0 883-1 883-2
Image
Adjustment of gamma balance (Gray scale)
SCN (black) Gray scale SCN (black) L SCN (black) M SCN (black) H SCN (black) L SCN (black) M SCN (black) H SCN (black) L SCN (black) M SCN (black) H SCN (black) L SCN (black) M SCN (black) H SCN (black)
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255>
RAM
Contents
SYS
Sets the changing amount by 1 step at density adjustment on the control panel The larger the value is, the lighter the image of the light steps becomes.
SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS
Sets the changing amount by 1 step at density adjustment on the control panel The larger the value is, the darker the image of the dark steps becomes. When the value increases, the image becomes darker. When the value increases, the image becomes lighter. When the value increases, the image becomes darker. When the value increases, the density in the target area becomes higher. L: Low density area M: Medium density area H: High density area
Procedur e 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 4 4 4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS
4
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 61 06/10
2
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- Reproduction ratio fine SCN 128 (black) <0-255> adjustment of primary scanning direction
Code
Classification
884
Image
913
Image
Range correction on original set on the RADF
PPC (black)
916
Image
Range correction on original manually set on the original glass
PPC (black)
919
Image
Range correction Background peak adjustment
PPC (black)
40 <0-255>
SYS
922
Image
Sharpness adjustment
PPC (black)
128 <0-255>
SYS
925
Image
Adjustment of smudged/ faint text
PPC (black)
2 <0-4>
SYS
931
Image
Density adjustment "manual density" fine adjustment/Center value
PPC (black)
128 <0-255>
SYS
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
22 <11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44> 22 <11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44>
RAM
Contents
SYS
When the value increases by “1”, the reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction increases by approx. 0.1%. Effective with the resolution other than 600 dpi. Sets whether the values of the background peak and text peak are fixed or not. One's place is an adjustment for "automatic density" and ten's place is for "manual density". Once they are fixed, the range correction is performed with standard values. The values of the background peak and text peak affect the reproduction of the background density and text density respectively. 1: fixed/fixed 2: varied/fixed 3: fixed/varied 4: varied/varied Background peak/Text peak When the value increases, the background of the image (low density area) becomes harder to be printed out. When the value increases, the image becomes sharper. When the value decreases, the image becomes softer. The smaller the value is, the less the moire becomes. Adjustment of the smudged/faint text. With increasing the value, the faint text is suppressed, and with decreasing it, the smudged text is suppressed. When the value increases, the image becomes darker.
SYS
SYS
Procedur e 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 62 06/10
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- Density adjustment "manPPC 20 (black) <0-255> ual density" fine adjustment/Light step value
Procedur e
Code
Classification
934
Image
937
Image
Density adjustment "manual density" fine adjustment/Dark step value
PPC (black)
20 <0-255>
SYS
940
Image
PPC (black)
128 <0-255>
SYS
946
Image
Density adjustment "automatic density" fine adjustment Density adjustment "automatic density" fine adjustment
PPC (black)
5 <1-9>
SYS
949-0
Image
PPC (black) PPC (black) PPC (black)
128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255>
SYS
ALL
-
SYS
PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color)
-
SYS
-
SYS
-
SYS
-
SYS
7
-
SYS
7
-
SYS
7
-
SYS
7
-
SYS
7
-
SYS
949-1
Adjustment of gamma balance
949-2
L M H
976
Maintenance
Equipment number (serial number) display
1004-0
Image
Automatic gamma adjustment
1004-1 1004-2 1004-3 1004-4 1004-5 1004-6 1004-7 1008
Image
Plain paper Thick paper 1 Thick paper 2 Thick paper 3 Special paper 1 Special paper 2 Recycled paper Thick paper 4 Automatic gamma adjustment
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
RAM
Contents
SYS
When the value increases, the image of the "light" steps becomes lighter. When the value increases, the image of the "dark" steps becomes darker. When the value increases, the image becomes darker. When the value decreases, the background becomes darker. When the value increases, the background becomes lighter. When the value increases, the density in the target area becomes higher. L: Low density area M: Medium density area H: High density area When this adjustment is performed with this code, the setting code (08-995) is also performed automatically. (10 digits) Automatic adjustment of gradation reproduction in the Full Color Mode (each color of Y, M, C and K) and Black Mode.
SYS SYS
Automatic adjustment of gradation reproduction in the Full Color Mode (each color of Y, M, C and K) and Black Mode.
1
1
1 1
4 4 4 1
7 7 7
7
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 63
2
Code
Classification
1046-0
Image
1046-1 1047-0
Image
1047-1 1048-0
Image
1048-1 1049-0
Image
1049-1 1050-0
Image
1050-1 1051-0
Image
1051-1 1052-0
Image
1052-1 1053-0
Image
1053-1 1054-0
Image
1054-1 1055
Image
Items Adjustment of maximum toner amount (Plain paper) Adjustment of maximum toner amount (Thick paper 1) Adjustment of maximum toner amount (Thick paper 2) Adjustment of maximum toner amount (Thick paper 3) Adjustment of maximum toner amount (OHP film)
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- PS PRT 255 (color) <0-255> PCL PRT 255 (color) <0-255> PS PRT 255 (color) <0-255> PCL PRT 255 (color) <0-255> PS PCL PS PCL PS PCL
PS Adjustment of maximum toner amount PCL (Special paper 1) PS Adjustment of maximum toner amount PCL (Special paper 2) PS Adjustment of maximum toner amount PCL (Recycled paper) PS Adjustment of maximum toner amount PCL (Thick paper 4) Upper limit in toner saving mode
1057 1060
Image
Reproduction ratio fine adjustment of primary scanning direction
PRT (color) PRT (color)
255 <0-255> 255 <0-255>
PRT (color) PRT (color)
255 <0-255> 255 <0-255>
PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color)
200 <0-255> 200 <0-255> 255 <0-255> 255 <0-255>
PRT (color) PRT (color)
255 <0-255> 255 <0-255>
PRT (color) PRT (color)
255 <0-255> 255 <0-255>
PRT (color) PRT (color)
255 <0-255> 255 <0-255>
PRT (color) PRT (color) SCN (color)
176 <0-255> 176 <0-255> 128 <0-255>
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
RAM
Contents
SYS
When the value decreases, the image becomes lighter. Note: Note: When the value increases, the image offsetting may occur.
SYS SYS SYS
Procedur e 4 4 4 4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS SYS SYS
When the value decreases, the printing density becomes lighter. When the value increases by “1”, the reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction increases by approx. 0.1%. Effective with the resolution other than 600 dpi.
1 1 1
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 64 07/06
Code
Classification
1065
Image
1066
Image
1070
Image
1071
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- Judgment threshold for SCN 70 ACS (color) <0-255> Judgment threshold for SCN 70 ACS on original set on the (color) <0-255> RADF
Fine adjustment of background
1072 1075
Image
1076
Fine adjustment of black density
1077 1080
Image
1081
RGB conversion method selection
1082 1086
Image
Sharpness adjustment
1087
Image
1092-1 1093-0
Image
1093-1 1094-0
Image
1094-1 1095-0 1095-1
Printed image Photo Text Printed image Photo Text Printed image Photo Text Printed image Photo
1088
1092-0
Text
Image
Toner limit threshold setting / Plain paper: Smooth Toner limit threshold setting / Thick paper 1: Smooth Toner limit threshold setting / Thick paper 2: Smooth Toner limit threshold setting / Thick paper 3: Smooth
PS PCL PS PCL PS PCL PS PCL
SCN (color) SCN (color) SCN (color) SCN (color) SCN (color) SCN (color) SCN (color) SCN (color) SCN (color)
50 <0-50> 50 <0-50> 50 <0-50> 0 <0-4> 0 <0-4> 0 <0-4> 0 <0-3> 0 <0-3> 0 <0-3>
SCN (color) SCN (color) SCN (color)
128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255>
PRT (color) PRT (color)
128 <0-255> 128 <0-255>
PRT (color) PRT (color)
113 <0-255> 113 <0-255>
PRT (color) PRT (color)
113 <0-255> 113 <0-255>
PRT (color) PRT (color)
113 <0-255> 113 <0-255>
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
RAM
Contents
SYS
When the value increases, originals tend to be judged as monochrome, and when the value decreases, they tend to be judged as color in autocolor mode. Adjusts the level of background. When the value increases, the background becomes darker.
SYS
SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS
SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS
Procedur e 1 1
1 1 1
Adjusts the black density of the scanned image. When the value increases, the black density becomes darker.
1
Sets the color space format of the output image. 0: sRGB 1: AppleRGB 2: ROMMRGB 3: AdobeRGB When the value increases, the image becomes sharper. When the value decreases, the image becomes softer. The smaller the value is, the less the moire becomes. The larger the value is, the darker the image in the high density area becomes.
1
1 1
1 1 1 1 1
4 4
The larger the value is, the darker the image in the high density area becomes.
4
The larger the value is, the darker the image in the high density area becomes.
4
The larger the value is, the darker the image in the high density area becomes.
4
4
4
4
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 65 07/06
2
Code
Classification
1096-0
Image
1096-1 1550
Image
1551 1552 1553 1554 1555
Image
1556 1557 1558 1559 1560
Image
1561 1562 1563 1564 1565
Image
1566 1567 1568 1569 1570 1571 1572 1573 1574
Image
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- Toner limit PS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> threshold setting / OHP PCL PRT 128 film: Smooth (color) <0-255> Text/Photo PPC 128 Density (color) <0-255> adjustment “manual denText PPC 128 sity” fine (color) <0-255> adjustment/ Printed PPC 128 Center value image (color) <0-255> Photo PPC 128 (color) <0-255> Map PPC 128 (color) <0-255> Text/Photo PPC 128 Density (color) <0-255> adjustment "manual denText PPC 128 sity" fine (color) <0-255> adjustment/ Printed PPC 128 Center value image (color) <0-255> (mono color) Photo PPC 128 (color) <0-255> Map PPC 128 (color) <0-255> Text/Photo PPC 20 Density (color) <0-255> adjustment “manual denText PPC 20 sity” fine (color) <0-255> adjustment/ Printed PPC 20 Dark step image (color) <0-255> value Photo PPC 20 (color) <0-255> Map PPC 20 (color) <0-255> Density 20 Text/Photo PPC adjustment (color) <0-255> "manual denText PPC 20 sity" fine (color) <0-255> adjustment/ Printed PPC 20 Dark step image (color) <0-255> value (mono Photo PPC 20 color) (color) <0-255> Map PPC 20 (color) <0-255> Text/Photo PPC 20 Density (color) <0-255> adjustment “manual den20 Text PPC sity” fine (color) <0-255> adjustment/ Printed PPC 20 Light step image (color) <0-255> value Photo PPC 20 (color) <0-255> Map PPC 20 (color) <0-255>
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
RAM
Contents
SYS
The larger the value is, the darker the image in the high density area becomes.
SYS SYS SYS
When the value increases, the image becomes darker.
Procedur e 4 4 1 1
SYS
1
SYS
1
SYS
1
SYS SYS
When the value increases, the image becomes darker.
1 1
SYS
1
SYS
1
SYS
1
SYS SYS SYS SYS
Sets the changing amount by 1 step at the density adjustment. When the value increases, the image of the “dark” steps becomes darker.
SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS
SYS SYS SYS SYS
1 1 1 1
Sets the changing amount by 1 step at the density adjustment. When the value increases, the image of the "dark" steps becomes darker.
SYS SYS
1
1 1 1 1 1
Sets the changing amount by 1 step at the density adjustment. When the value increases, the image of the “light” steps becomes lighter.
1 1 1 1 1
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 66 06/10
Code
Classification
1575
Image
1576 1577 1578 1579 1580
Image
1581 1582 1583 1584 1585
Image
1586 1587 1588 1589 1612 1613 1614 1615 1616 1617 1618 1619 1620
Image
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- Text/Photo PPC 20 Density (color) <0-255> adjustment "manual denText PPC 20 sity" fine (color) <0-255> adjustment/ Printed PPC 20 Light step image (color) <0-255> value (mono Photo PPC 20 color) (color) <0-255> Map PPC 20 (color) <0-255> Text/Photo PPC 140 Density (color) <0-255> adjustment “automatic Text PPC 128 density” fine (color) <0-255> adjustment Printed PPC 128 image (color) <0-255> Photo PPC 128 (color) <0-255> Map PPC 128 (color) <0-255> Text/Photo PPC 128 Density adjustment (color) <0-255> "automatic Text PPC 128 density" fine (color) <0-255> adjustment Printed PPC 128 (mono color) image (color) <0-255> Photo PPC 128 (color) <0-255> Map PPC 128 (color) <0-255> Plain PPC 255 Adjustment of paper (color) <0-255> maximum toner amount Thick PPC 252 paper 1 (color) <0-255> Thick PPC 252 paper 2 (color) <0-255> Thick PPC 252 paper 3 (color) <0-255> OHP film PPC 240 (color) <0-255> Special PPC 252 paper 1 (color) <0-255> Special PPC 252 paper 2 (color) <0-255> Recycled PPC 255 paper (color) <0-255> Thick PPC 252 paper 4 (color) <0-255>
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
RAM
Contents
SYS
Sets the changing amount by 1 step at the density adjustment. When the value increases, the image of the "light" steps becomes lighter.
SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS
Procedur e 1 1 1 1 1
When the value increases, the image becomes darker.
1 1
SYS
1
SYS
1
SYS
1
SYS SYS
When the value increases, the image becomes darker.
1 1
SYS
1
SYS
1
SYS
1
SYS SYS SYS SYS
When the value decreases, the image becomes lighter. Note: Note: When the value increases, image offsetting may occur.
1 1 1 1
SYS
1
SYS
1
SYS
1
SYS
1
SYS
1
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 67 06/10
2
Code
Classification
1630
Image
1631 1632 1633 1642
Image
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- Maximum text Y PPC 5 (color) <0-10> density adjustment M PPC 5 (color) <0-10> C PPC 5 (color) <0-10> K PPC 5 (color) <0-10> Automatic Color/ PPC gamma Black adjustment
1643
Color
RAM
Contents
SYS
When the value increases by “1”, the maximum text density of each color becomes darker.
SYS SYS SYS SYS
PPC
-
SYS
1675
Image
Judgment threshold for ACS
PPC (color)
70 <0-255>
SYS
1676
Image
Judgment threshold for ACS on original set on the RADF
PPC (color)
70 <0-255>
SYS
1688
Image
Automatic offsetting adjustment for background processing (background density)
PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color)
110 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255>
SYS
1689 1690 1691 1692 1693 1694 1695
Text/Photo Text Printed image Photo Map
Image
Automatic offsetting adjustment for background processing (high density)
Text/Photo Text
1696
Printed image Photo
1697
Map
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
SYS
Procedur e 1 1 1 1
Automatic adjustment of gradation reproduction in the Full Color Mode (each color of Y, M, C and K) and Black Mode. Automatic adjustment of gradation reproduction in the Full Color Mode (each color of Y, M, C and K). When the value increases, originals tend to be judged as black, and when the value decreases, they tend to be judged as color in auto-color mode. When the value increases, the background becomes darker.
7
7
1
1
1 1
SYS
1
SYS
1
SYS
1
SYS SYS
When the value increases, the high density area darker.
1 1
SYS
1
SYS
1
SYS
1
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 68 07/06
Code
Classification
1698
Image
1699 1700 1701 1702 1708
Image
1709 1710 1711 1712 1725
Image
1737
Image
1738 1739
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- 128 Manual offset- Text/Photo PPC (color) <0-255> ting adjustment for Text PPC 128 background (color) <0-255> processing Printed PPC 128 (background image (color) <0-255> density) Photo PPC 128 (color) <0-255> Map PPC 128 (color) <0-255> 128 Manual offset- Text/Photo PPC (color) <0-255> ting adjustment for Text PPC 128 background (color) <0-255> processing Printed PPC 128 (high density) image (color) <0-255> Photo PPC 128 (color) <0-255> Map PPC 128 (color) <0-255> Text/Photo reproduction PPC 0 level adjustment (color) <0-5>
Sharpness adjustment / Full Color Mode
Text/Photo Text
1740
Printed image Photo
1741
Map
PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color)
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255>
RAM SYS SYS
Contents When the value increases, the background becomes darker.
Procedur e 1 1
SYS
1
SYS
1
SYS
1
SYS SYS
When the value increases, the high density area darker.
1 1
SYS
1
SYS
1
SYS
1
SYS
SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS
0: Default 1: Photo oriented 2 (The printed image reproduction level higher than that of the Photo oriented 1) 2: Photo oriented 1 (The printed image reproduction level higher than that of the Default) 3: Equivalent to the Default 4: Text oriented 1 (The text reproduction level higher than that of the Default) 5: Text oriented 2 (The text reproduction level higher than that of the Text oriented 1) When the value increases, the image becomes sharper. When the value decreases, the image becomes softer. The smaller the value is, the less the moire becomes. * The default value 0 is equivalent to 16 (center value).
1
1 1 1 1 1
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 69 07/02
2
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- Sharpness adjustment / PPC 128 (color) <0-255> Auto Color Mode (Text/ Photo)
Code
Classification
1757
Image
1761
Image
Black reproduction switching
PPC (color)
0 <0-1>
SYS
1769-0
Image
Marker color adjustment
PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color)
3 <0-6> 3 <0-6> 3 <0-6> 3 <0-6> 3 <0-6> 3 <0-6>
SYS
Yellow
1769-1
Magenta
1769-2
Cyan
1769-3
Red
1769-4
Green
1769-5
Blue
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
RAM
Contents
SYS
When the value increases, the image becomes sharper. When the value decreases, the image becomes softer. The smaller the value is, the less the moire becomes. * The default value 0 is equivalent to 16(center value). 0: Default 1: Black reproduction oriented The color of the onetouch adjustment "Marker" can be adjusted. P. 3-40 "3.7.11 Color Adjustment of Marker"
SYS SYS
Procedur e 1
1 4 4 4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS
4
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 70 06/10
Code
Classification
1779-0
Image
1779-1
Items Color balance adjustment for “Y” (Text/Photo)
1779-2 1780-0
Image
1780-1
Color balance adjustment for “Y” (Text)
1780-2 1781-0
Image
1781-1 1781-2 1782-0
Image
1782-1
Color balance adjustment for “Y” (Printed image) Color balance adjustment for “Y” (Photo)
1782-2 1783-0 1783-1 1783-2
Image
Color balance adjustment for “Y” (Map)
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- L PPC 128 (color) <0-255> M PPC 128 (color) <0-255> H PPC 128 (color) <0-255> L PPC 128 (color) <0-255> M PPC 128 (color) <0-255> H PPC 128 (color) <0-255> L PPC 128 (color) <0-255> M PPC 128 (color) <0-255> H PPC 128 (color) <0-255> L PPC 128 (color) <0-255> M PPC 128 (color) <0-255> H PPC 128 (color) <0-255> L PPC 128 (color) <0-255> M PPC 128 (color) <0-255> H PPC 128 (color) <0-255>
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
RAM
Contents
SYS
The target color, mode and density area become darker as the value increases. L: Low density area M: Medium density area H: High density area
SYS SYS SYS
Procedur e 4 4 4 4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS
4
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 71 06/10
2
Code
Classification
1784-0
Image
1784-1
Items Color balance adjustment for “M” (Text/Photo)
1784-2 1785-0
Image
1785-1
Color balance adjustment for “M” (Text)
1785-2 1786-0
Image
1786-1 1786-2 1787-0
Image
1787-1
Color balance adjustment for “M” (Printed image) Color balance adjustment for “M” (Photo)
1787-2 1788-0
Image
1788-1
Color balance adjustment for “M” (Map)
1788-2 1789-0
Image
1789-1
Color balance adjustment for “C” (Text/Photo)
1789-2 1790-0
Image
1790-1
Color balance adjustment for “C” (Text)
1790-2 1791-0
Image
1791-1 1791-2 1792-0 1792-1
Image
Color balance adjustment for “C” (Printed image) Color balance adjustment for “C” (Photo)
1792-2
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- L PPC 128 (color) <0-255> M PPC 128 (color) <0-255> H PPC 128 (color) <0-255> L PPC 128 (color) <0-255> M PPC 128 (color) <0-255> H PPC 128 (color) <0-255> L PPC 128 (color) <0-255> M PPC 128 (color) <0-255> H PPC 128 (color) <0-255> L PPC 128 (color) <0-255> M PPC 128 (color) <0-255> H PPC 128 (color) <0-255> L PPC 128 (color) <0-255> M PPC 128 (color) <0-255> H PPC 128 (color) <0-255> L PPC 128 (color) <0-255> M PPC 128 (color) <0-255> 128 H PPC (color) <0-255> L PPC 128 (color) <0-255> M PPC 128 (color) <0-255> 128 H PPC (color) <0-255> L PPC 128 (color) <0-255> M PPC 128 (color) <0-255> H PPC 128 (color) <0-255> L PPC 128 (color) <0-255> M PPC 128 (color) <0-255> 128 H PPC (color) <0-255>
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
RAM
Contents
SYS
The target color, mode and density area become darker as the value increases. L: Low density area M: Medium density area H: High density area
SYS SYS SYS
Procedur e 4 4 4 4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS
4
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 72
Code
Classification
1793-0
Image
1793-1
Items Color balance adjustment for “C” (Map)
1793-2 1794-0
Image
1794-1
Color balance adjustment for “K” (Text/Photo)
1794-2 1795-0
Image
1795-1
Color balance adjustment for “K” (Text)
1795-2 1796-0
Image
1796-1 1796-2 1797-0
Image
1797-1
Color balance adjustment for “K” (Printed image) Color balance adjustment for “K” (Photo)
1797-2 1798-0
Image
1798-1
Color balance adjustment for “K” (Map)
1798-2 1800-0 1800-1 1800-2 1800-3
Image control
Upper limit value of contrast voltage
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- L PPC 128 (color) <0-255> M PPC 128 (color) <0-255> H PPC 128 (color) <0-255> L PPC 128 (color) <0-255> M PPC 128 (color) <0-255> H PPC 128 (color) <0-255> L PPC 128 (color) <0-255> M PPC 128 (color) <0-255> H PPC 128 (color) <0-255> L PPC 128 (color) <0-255> M PPC 128 (color) <0-255> H PPC 128 (color) <0-255> L PPC 128 (color) <0-255> M PPC 128 (color) <0-255> H PPC 128 (color) <0-255> L PPC 128 (color) <0-255> M PPC 128 (color) <0-255> 128 H PPC (color) <0-255> Y ALL 600 <350700> M ALL 600 <350700> C ALL 600 <350700> K ALL 600 <350700>
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
RAM
Contents
SYS
The target color, mode and density area become darker as the value increases. L: Low density area M: Medium density area H: High density area
SYS SYS SYS
Procedur e 4 4 4 4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS
4
M M
Sets the upper limit value of the contrast voltage at the image quality control. (Unit: V)
4 4
M
4
M
4
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 73
2
Code 1801-0
Classification Image control
Items Lower limit value of contrast voltage
1801-1 1801-2 1801-3 1802-0
Image control
Upper limit value of laser power
1802-1 1802-2 1802-3 1803-0
Image control
Lower limit value of laser power
1803-1 1803-2 1803-3 1811-0
Image control
1811-1
Contrast voltage/upper limit actual value display
1811-2 1811-3 1812-0 1812-1
Image control
Contrast voltage/lower limit actual value display
1812-2 1812-3
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- Y ALL 150 <120350> M ALL 150 <120350> C ALL 150 <120350> K ALL 140 <120350> Y ALL 600 <322750> M ALL 600 <322750> C ALL 600 <322750> K ALL 600 <322750> Y ALL 260 <150322> M ALL 260 <150322> C ALL 260 <150322> K ALL 260 <150322> Y ALL 600 <0-999> M ALL 600 <0-999> C ALL 600 <0-999> K ALL 600 <0-999> Y ALL 150 <0-999> M ALL 150 <0-999> C ALL 150 <0-999> K ALL 140 <0-999>
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
RAM
Contents
M
Sets the lower limit value of the contrast voltage at the image quality control. (Unit: V)
M
Procedur e 4 4
M
4
M
4
M M
Sets the upper limit value of the laser power at the image quality control. (Unit: µW)
4 4
M
4
M
4
M M
Sets the lower limit value of the laser power at the image quality control. (Unit: µW)
4 4
M
4
M
4
M M
Displays the upper limit value of the contrast voltage when printing is operated. (Unit: V)
10 10
M
10
M
10
M M
Displays the lower limit value of the contrast voltage when printing is operated. (Unit: V)
10 10
M
10
M
10
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 74
Code 1815-0
Classification Image control
1815-1
Items Contrast voltage/correction number of time display
1815-2 1815-3 1816-0
Image control
1816-1
Laser power correction/ number of time display
1816-2 1816-3 2409-0 2409-1 2409-2 2409-3 2411
2598-0 2598-1
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- Y ALL 0 <0-255> M ALL 0 <0-255> C ALL 0 <0-255> K ALL 0 <0-255> Y ALL 0 <0-255> M ALL 0 <0-255> C ALL 0 <0-255> K ALL 0 <0-255> Y ALL 125 <0-255> M ALL 125 <0-255> C ALL 125 <0-255> K ALL 125 <0-255>
Develop- Decelerating ment mode Adjustment of auto-toner initial adjustment reference setting value (YMCK) Develop- High speed mode ment Adjustment of auto-toner initial adjustment reference setting value (BK) Y Transfer Discharge blade bias high-voltage adjustment M value
M
10
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
4
M
4
ALL
High
ALL
Low
ALL
High
ALL
2624-1
10
M
Low
Main charger grid calibration voltage (C)
10
4
ALL
Transfer
M
10
M
ALL
High
2624-0
M
Displays the actual number of time the laser power has been corrected at the closedloop control.
4
ALL
2623-1
M
10
M
Low
Main charger grid calibration voltage (M)
M
10
875 <6001200> 875 <6001200> 875 <6001200> 875 <6001200> 300 <0-1400> 1200 <0-1400> 300 <0-1400> 1200 <0-1400> 300 <0-1400> 1200 <0-1400>
ALL
Transfer
M
10
ALL
K
2623-0
M
10
1
2598-3
2622-1
Displays the actual number of time the contrast voltage has been corrected at the closedloop control.
M
ALL
Main charger grid calibration voltage (Y)
M
Procedur e
137 <0-255>
C
Transfer
Contents
ALL
2598-2
2622-0
RAM
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
M
(Unit: V)
M M
4 (Unit: V)
M M M
4
4 4
(Unit: V)
4 4
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 75 06/10
2
Code
Classification
2625-0
Transfer
2625-1 2627-0
Transfer
2627-1 2628-0
Transfer
2628-1 2629-0
Transfer
2629-1 2630-0
Transfer
2630-1 2725
Image control
2726
Image control
2764
Transfer
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- Main charger Low ALL 300 <0-1400> grid calibration voltage High ALL 1200 (K) <0-1400> Developer Low ALL 200 bias DC (-) <0-1000> calibration High ALL 900 voltage (Y) <0-1000> Developer Low ALL 200 bias DC (-) <0-1000> calibration High ALL 900 voltage (M) <0-1000> Developer Low ALL 200 bias DC (-) <0-1000> calibration High ALL 900 voltage (C) <0-1000> Low ALL 200 Developer <0-1000> bias DC (-) calibration High ALL 900 voltage (K) <0-1000> Upper limit Black / ALL 750 value of laser High <428power speed 750> Lower limit value of laser power
RAM M
(Unit: V)
M M
M
(Unit: V)
(Unit: V)
(Unit: V)
ALL
340 <150428>
M
Drum thermistor temperature display (Y)
ALL
23 <0-100>
M
4
4 4
(Unit: V)
M M
4
4
M M
4
4
M M
Procedur e
4
M
Black / High speed
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
Contents
4 4
Sets the upper limit value of the laser power at the image quality control. (Unit: µW) Sets the lower limit value of the laser power at the image quality control. (Unit: µW) (Unit: °C)
1
1
2
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 76 07/09
Code
Classification
2900-0
Transfer
2900-1 2900-2 2900-3 2900-4 2900-5
2900-6 2900-7 2900-8 2900-9 2900-10 2900-11 2905-0 2905-1 2905-2 2905-3 2905-4 2905-5
2905-6 2905-7 2905-8 2905-9 2905-10 2905-11
Transfer
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- 1st transfer Y normal ALL 97 speed <0-255> bias RMS value in the M normal ALL 102 normal mode speed <0-255> C normal ALL 108 speed <0-255> K normal ALL 102 speed <0-255> CK norALL 97 mal speed <0-255> ALL Refer to BK content Normal <0-255> speed / High speed Y decelerALL 85 ating <0-255> M decelerALL 91 ating <0-255> C decelerALL 102 ating <0-255> K decelerALL 91 ating <0-255> CK decelALL 85 erating <0-255> BK decelALL 85 erating <0-255> 1st transfer Y normal ALL 5 bias resisspeed <0-10> tance detecM normal ALL 5 tion offset speed <0-10> C normal ALL 5 speed <0-10> K normal ALL 5 speed <0-10> CK norALL 5 mal speed <0-10> BK (35/45) ALL 5 Normal <0-10> speed / High speed Y decelerALL 5 ating <0-10> M decelerALL 5 ating <0-10> ALL 5 C decelerating <0-10> K decelerALL 5 ating <0-10> CK decelALL 5 erating <0-10> BK decelALL 5 erating <0-10>
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
RAM M M
Contents Displays the 1st transfer bias in printing. (bit value)
Procedur e 10 10
M
10
M
10
M
10
M
10
M
10
M
10
M M M
2900-5 e-STUDIO2500c:97 e-STUDIO3500c:97 e-STUDIO3510c:108
M M M M M M
10 10 10 10
Sets the offset amount of the 1st transfer bias. Offsetting level 0: 0.75 1: 0.80 2: 0.85 3: 0.90 4: 0.95 5: 1.00 6: 1.05 7: 1.10 8: 1.15 9: 1.20 10: 1.25 (Unit: Correcting factor)
4 4 4 4 4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 77 06/09
2
Code
Classification
2920-0
Transfer
2920-1 2920-2 2920-3 2920-4 2920-5
2920-6 2920-7 2920-8 2920-9 2920-10 2920-11 2921-0 2921-1 2921-2 2921-3 2921-4 2921-5
2921-6 2921-7 2921-8 2921-9 2921-10 2921-11
Transfer
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- Y normal ALL 86 1st transfer speed <0-255> roller bias actual value M normal ALL 91 display of the speed <0-255> leading/trailC normal ALL 96 ing edge of speed <0-255> the paper K normal ALL 91 speed <0-255> CK norALL 86 mal speed <0-255> ALL 86 BK (35/45) <0-255> Normal speed / High speed Y decelerALL 77 ating <0-255> M decelerALL 81 ating <0-255> C decelerALL 91 ating <0-255> K decelerALL 81 ating <0-255> CK decelALL 77 erating <0-255> BK decelALL 77 erating <0-255> Y normal ALL 85 1st transfer speed <50-100> roller bias correction factor M normal ALL 85 of the leading/ speed <50-100> trailing edge ALL 85 C normal of the paper speed <50-100> K normal ALL 85 speed <50-100> CK norALL 85 mal speed <50-100> BK (35/45) ALL 85 Normal <50-100> speed / High speed Y decelerALL 85 ating <50-100> M decelerALL 85 ating <50-100> C decelerALL 85 ating <50-100> K decelerALL 85 ating <50-100> CK decelALL 85 erating <50-100> BK decelALL 85 erating <50-100>
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
RAM M M M
Contents Displays the 1st transfer roller bias (leading/ trailing edge of the paper) in printing (bit value)
Procedur e 10 10 10
M
10
M
10
M
10
M
10
M
10
M
10
M
10
M
10
M
10
M M
Corrects the 1st transfer leading/trailing edge bias
4 4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 78
Code
Classification
2924-0
Transfer
2924-1 2924-2 2924-3
2924-4 2924-5 2924-6 2924-7 2925-0 2925-1 2925-2 2925-3
2925-5 2925-6 2925-7
Transfer
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- Plain ALL Refer to 2nd transfer paper content bias RMS <0-255> value in the color mode Thick ALL 142 (Top side) paper 1 <0-255> Thick ALL 132 paper 2 <0-255> Thick ALL Refer to paper 3 / content Thick <0-255> paper 4 Overhead ALL 127 transpar<0-255> encies Special ALL 127 paper 1 <0-255> Special ALL 127 paper 2 <0-255> Recycled ALL Refer to paper content <0-255> Plain ALL Refer to 2nd transfer paper content bias RMS <0-255> value in the color mode Thick ALL 107 (Back side) paper 1 <0-255> Thick ALL 87 paper 2 <0-255> Thick ALL 87 paper 3 / <0-255> Thick paper 4 ALL 87 Special paper 1 <0-255> Special ALL 87 paper 2 <0-255> Recycled ALL Refer to paper content <0-255>
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
RAM
Contents
M
Displays the 2nd transfer bias when printing the top side in the color mode. (bit value)
M
Procedur e 10 10
M
10
M
10
M M M M M M
2924-0, 2924-7 e-STUDIO2500c:142 e-STUDIO3500c:142 e-STUDIO3510c:137 2924-3 e-STUDIO2500c:137 e-STUDIO3500c:137 e-STUDIO3510c:127 Displays the 2nd transfer bias when printing the back side in the color mode. (bit value)
10 10 10 10 10 10
M
10
M
10
M M M
2925-0, 2925-7 e-STUDIO2500c:125 e-STUDIO3500c:125 e-STUDIO3510c:120
10 10 10
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 79
2
Code
Classification
2926-0
Transfer
2926-1 2926-2 2926-3
2926-4 2926-5 2926-6 2926-7 2927-0 2927-1 2927-2 2927-3
2927-5 2927-6 2927-7
Transfer
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- Plain ALL Refer to 2nd transfer paper content bias RMS <0-255> value in the black mode Thick ALL 142 (Top side) paper 1 <0-255> Thick ALL 132 paper 2 <0-255> Thick ALL 127 paper 3 / <0-255> Thick paper 4 Overhead ALL 127 transpar<0-255> encies Special ALL 127 paper 1 <0-255> Special ALL 127 paper 2 <0-255> Recycled ALL Refer to paper content <0-255> Plain ALL Refer to 2nd transfer paper content bias RMS <0-255> value in the black mode Thick ALL 107 (Back side) paper 1 <0-255> Thick ALL 87 paper 2 <0-255> Thick ALL 87 paper 3 / <0-255> Thick paper 4 ALL 87 Special paper 1 <0-255> Special ALL 87 paper 2 <0-255> Recycled ALL Refer to paper content <0-255>
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
RAM
Contents
M
Displays the 2nd transfer bias when printing the top side in the black mode. (bit value)
M
Procedur e 10 10
M
10
M
10
M M M
10 2926-0, 2926-7 e-STUDIO2500c:142 e-STUDIO3500c:142 e-STUDIO3510c:137
M M M
10 10 10
Displays the 2nd transfer bias when printing the back side in the black mode. (bit value)
10 10
M
10
M
10
M M M
2927-0, 2927-7 e-STUDIO2500c:125 e-STUDIO3500c:125 e-STUDIO3510c:120
10 10 10
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 80 07/06
Code
Classification
2934-0
Transfer
2934-1 2934-2 2934-3
2934-4 2934-5 2934-6 2934-7 2935-0
Transfer
2935-1 2935-2 2935-3
2935-5 2935-6 2935-7 2936-0 2936-1 2936-2 2936-3
2936-4 2936-5 2936-6 2936-7
Transfer
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- Bias offset in Plain ALL 5 paper <0-10> the color mode (Top Thick ALL 5 side) paper 1 <0-10> Thick ALL 5 paper 2 <0-10> Thick ALL 5 paper 3 / <0-10> Thick paper 4 Overhead ALL 5 transpar<0-10> encies Special ALL 5 paper 1 <0-10> Special ALL 5 paper 2 <0-10> Recycled ALL 5 paper <0-10> Plain ALL 5 Bias offset in paper <0-10> the color mode (Back Thick ALL 5 side) paper 1 <0-10> Thick ALL 5 paper 2 <0-10> Thick ALL 5 paper 3 / <0-10> Thick paper 4 Special ALL 5 paper 1 <0-10> Special ALL 5 paper 2 <0-10> Recycled ALL 5 paper <0-10> Bias offset in ALL 5 Plain the black paper <0-10> mode (Top Thick ALL 5 side) paper 1 <0-10> Thick ALL 5 paper 2 <0-10> Thick ALL 5 paper 3 / <0-10> Thick paper 4 Overhead ALL 5 transpar<0-10> encies Special ALL 5 paper 1 <0-10> Special ALL 5 paper 2 <0-10> Recycled ALL 5 paper <0-10>
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
RAM
Contents
M
Sets the bias offset amount of the 2nd transfer bias in the color mode (Top side). Offsetting level 0: 0 1: 0.2 2: 0.4 3: 0.6 4: 0.8 5: 1.0 6: 1.2 7: 1.4 8: 1.6 9: 1.8 10: 2.0
M M M
M
Procedur e 4 4 4 4
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M M M M
M
Sets the bias offset amount of the 2nd transfer bias in the color mode (Back side). Offsetting level 0: 0 1: 0.2 2: 0.4 3: 0.6 4: 0.8 5: 1.0 6: 1.2 7: 1.4 8: 1.6 9: 1.8 10: 2.0
4 4 4 4
4
M
4
M
4
M M M M
M
Sets the bias offset amount of the 2nd transfer bias in the black mode (Top side). Offsetting level 0: 0 1: 0.2 2: 0.4 3: 0.6 4: 0.8 5: 1.0 6: 1.2 7: 1.4 8: 1.6 9: 1.8 10: 2.0
4 4 4 4
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 81 07/06
2
Code
Classification
2937-0
Transfer
2937-1 2937-2 2937-3
2937-5 2937-6 2937-7 2938-0
Transfer
2938-1 2938-2 2938-3
2938-4 2938-5 2938-6 2938-7 2939-0 2939-1 2939-2 2939-3
2939-5 2939-6 2939-7
Transfer
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- Bias offset in Plain ALL 5 paper <0-10> the black mode (Back Thick ALL 5 side) paper 1 <0-10> Thick ALL 5 paper 2 <0-10> Thick ALL 5 paper 3 / <0-10> Thick paper 4 Special ALL 5 paper 1 <0-10> Special ALL 5 paper 2 <0-10> Recycled ALL 5 paper <0-10> Plain ALL 0 2nd transfer paper <0-10> leading/trailing edge bias Thick ALL 0 correction facpaper 1 <0-10> tor Thick ALL 0 (Top side in paper 2 <0-10> the color ALL 0 Thick mode) paper 3 / <0-10> Thick paper 4 ALL 0 Overhead <0-10> transparencies ALL 0 Special paper 1 <0-10> Special ALL 0 paper 2 <0-10> Recycled ALL 0 paper <0-10> 2nd transfer ALL 0 Plain leading/trailpaper <0-10> ing edge bias Thick ALL 0 correction facpaper 1 <0-10> tor Thick ALL 0 (Back side in paper 2 <0-10> the color Thick ALL 0 mode) paper 3 / <0-10> Thick paper 4 Special ALL 0 paper 1 <0-10> Special ALL 0 paper 2 <0-10> Recycled ALL 0 paper <0-10>
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
RAM
Contents
M
Sets the bias offset amount of the 2nd transfer bias in the black mode (Back side). Offsetting level 0: 0 1: 0.2 2: 0.4 3: 0.6 4: 0.8 5: 1.0 6: 1.2 7: 1.4 8: 1.6 9: 1.8 10: 2.0
M M M
M
Procedur e 4 4 4 4
4
M
4
M
4
M M M M
M
Corrects the 2nd transfer leading/trailing edge bias (Top side in the color mode). Offsetting level 0: 1.00 1: 0.95 2: 0.90 3: 0.85 4: 0.80 5: 0.75 6: 0.70 7: 0.65 8: 0.60 9: 0.55 10: 0.50
4 4 4 4
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M M M M
M
Corrects the 2nd transfer leading/trailing edge bias (Back side in the color mode). Offsetting level 0: 0 1: 0.2 2: 0.4 3: 0.6 4: 0.8 5: 1.0 6: 1.2 7: 1.4 8: 1.6 9: 1.8 10: 2.0
4 4 4 4
4
M
4
M
4
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 82 07/06
Code
Classification
2940-0
Transfer
2940-1 2940-2 2940-3
2940-4 2940-5 2940-6 2940-7 2941-0
Transfer
2941-1 2941-2 2941-3
2941-5 2941-6 2941-7 2961-0
Transfer
2961-1 2962-0
Transfer
2962-1
2963-0
2963-1
Transfer
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- Plain ALL 0 2nd transfer paper <0-10> leading/trailing edge bias Thick ALL 0 correction facpaper 1 <0-10> tor Thick ALL 0 (Top side in paper 2 <0-10> the black Thick ALL 0 mode) paper 3 / <0-10> Thick paper 4 Overhead ALL 0 transpar<0-10> encies Special ALL 0 paper 1 <0-10> Special ALL 0 paper 2 <0-10> Recycled ALL 0 paper <0-10> Plain ALL 0 2nd transfer paper <0-10> leading/trailing edge bias Thick ALL 0 correction facpaper 1 <0-10> tor Thick ALL 0 (Back side in paper 2 <0-10> the black Thick ALL 0 mode) paper 3 / <0-10> Thick paper 4 Special ALL 0 paper 1 <0-10> Special ALL 0 paper 2 <0-10> Recycled ALL 0 paper <0-10> Number of Normal ALL 0 time of cleanspeed / <0-7> ing at printing High end speed DeceleratALL 0 ing <0-7> Normal ALL 5 Number of speed / <0-7> time of cleanHigh ing at jam speed recovery / bypass nonDeceleratALL 5 standard ing <0-7> printing / tab paper printing. Normal ALL 0 Number of speed / <0-7> time of cleanHigh ing at image speed quality control end DeceleratALL 0 ing <0-7>
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
RAM
Contents
M
Corrects the 2nd transfer leading/trailing edge bias (Top side in the black mode). Offsetting level 0: 1.00 1: 0.95 2: 0.90 3: 0.85 4: 0.80 5: 0.75 6: 0.70 7: 0.65 8: 0.60 9: 0.55 10: 0.50
M M M
M
Procedur e 4 4 4 4
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M M M M
M
Corrects the 2nd transfer leading/trailing edge bias (Back side in the black mode). Offsetting level 0: 1.00 1: 0.95 2: 0.90 3: 0.85 4: 0.80 5: 0.75 6: 0.70 7: 0.65 8: 0.60 9: 0.55 10: 0.50
4 4 4 4
4
M
4
M
4
M
0: once 1: twice 2: 3times 3: 5times 4: 7times 5: 10times 6: 12times 7: 15times
M M
4 0: once 1: twice 2: 3times 3: 5times 4: 7times 5: 10times 6: 12times 7: 15times
M
M
M
4
4
4
0: once 1: twice 2: 3times 3: 5times 4: 7times 5: 10times 6: 12times 7: 15times
4
4
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 83 07/09
2
Code
Classification
2966-0
Transfer
2966-1 2981-0
Transfer
2981-1
2983-0
Transfer
2983-1 2984-0
Transfer
2984-1 2985-0
Transfer
2985-1 2986-0
Transfer
2986-1 2987-0
Transfer
2987-1 2988-0
Transfer
2988-1 4065
Laser
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- Normal ALL 2 Enforced speed / <0-7> toner supply High / Number of speed time of cleaning at the end DeceleratALL 2 of fusing-wait ing <0-7> period 1st transfer Low ALL 5 bias constant<0-50> current transHigh ALL 50 former cali<0-50> bration value (K only) Low ALL -50 2nd transfer <-60-30> bias constantcurrent transHigh ALL 20 former cali<-60-30> bration value Low ALL -6000 2nd transfer <-7000bias constant3200> voltage transformer caliHigh ALL 2000 bration value <-70003200> Low ALL 400 1st transfer <300bias constant4400> voltage calibration value High ALL 4000 (Y) <3004400> 1st transfer Low ALL 400 bias constant<300voltage cali4400> bration value High ALL 4000 (M) <3004400> Low ALL 400 1st transfer <300bias constant4400> voltage calibration value High ALL 4000 (C) <3004400> Low ALL 400 1st transfer <300bias constant4400> voltage calibration value High ALL 4000 (K) <3004400> Leading edge position ALL 40 adjustment <0-80> / Common correction items when decelerating
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
RAM M
Contents 0: once 1: twice 2: 3times 3: 5times 4: 7times 5: 10times 6: 12times 7: 15times
M M
(Unit: µA)
(Unit: µA)
(Unit: V)
(Unit: V)
(Unit: V)
(Unit: V)
4 4
(Unit: V)
M M
4 4
M M
4 4
M M
4 4
M M
4 4
M M
4 4
M M
4
4
M
M
Procedur e
4 4
When the value increases by "1", the image shifts toward the trailing edge of the paper by approx. 0.15 mm.
1
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 84 07/06
Code
Classification
4066
Laser
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- Leading edge position ALL 40 <0-80> adjustment / Common correction items at high speed
4067-5
1st drawer 2nd drawer PFP upper drawer PFP lower drawer Bypass feed ADU
ALL
4067-6
LCF
ALL
Plain paper Long size Plain paper Middle size Plain paper Short size 1 Plain paper Short size 2 Plain paper Short size 3
ALL
4067-0
Laser
4067-1 4067-2
Leading edge position adjustment Correction items at high speed
4067-3 4067-4
4100-0 4100-1
4100-2
4100-3
4100-4
Paper feeding
Paper aligning amount adjustment at the registration section (1st drawer / Plain paper)
ALL
RAM
Contents
M
When the value increases by "1", the image shifts toward the trailing edge of the paper by approx. 0.2 mm. When the value increases by "1", the image shifts toward the trailing edge of the paper by approx. 0.2 mm.
20 <0-40> 20 <0-40> 20 <0-40> 20 <0-40> 20 <0-40> 20 <0-40> 20 <0-40> 25 <0~63>
M
ALL
25 <0-63>
M
ALL
25 <0-63>
M
ALL
25 <0-63>
M
ALL
25 <0-63>
M
ALL ALL ALL ALL
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
M M
Procedur e 1
2 4 4 4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
When the value increases by "1", the aligning amount increases by approx. 0.6 mm. Long size: 330 mm or longer Middle size: 220 mm to 329 mm Short size 1: 205 mm to 219 mm Short size 2: 160 mm to 204 mm Short size 3: 159 mm or shorter
4 4
4
4
4
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 85
Code 4101-0
Classification Paper feeding
4101-1
4101-2
4101-3
4101-4
4103-0
Paper feeding
4103-1
4103-2
4103-3
4103-4
4104-0 4104-1
4104-2
4104-3
4104-4
Paper feeding
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- Plain ALL 25 Paper aligning paper <0-63> amount Long size adjustment at the registraPlain ALL 25 tion section paper <0-63> (2nd drawer / Middle Plain paper) size Plain ALL 25 paper <0-63> Short size 1 Plain ALL 25 paper <0-63> Short size 2 ALL 25 Plain paper <0-63> Short size 3 ALL 20 Plain Paper aligning <0-63> paper amount Long size adjustment at the registraPlain ALL 20 tion section <0-63> paper (Bypass feed / Middle Plain paper) size Plain ALL 20 paper <0-63> Short size 1 Plain ALL 22 paper <0-63> Short size 2 Plain ALL 22 paper <0-63> Short size 3 Thick ALL 30 Paper aligning paper 1 <0-63> amount Long size adjustment at the registraThick ALL 30 tion section paper 1 <0-63> (Bypass feed / Middle Thick paper 1) size Thick ALL 35 paper 1 <0-63> Short size 1 Thick ALL 35 paper 1 <0-63> Short size 2 Thick ALL 35 paper 1 <0-63> Short size 3
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
RAM M M
M
M
M
M M
M
M
M
M M
M
M
M
Contents
Procedur e
When the value increases by "1", the aligning amount increases by approx. 0.6 mm. Long size: 330 mm or longer Middle size: 220 mm to 329 mm Short size 1: 205 mm to 219 mm Short size 2: 160 mm to 204 mm Short size 3: 159 mm or shorter
4
When the value increases by "1", the aligning amount increases by approx. 0.6 mm. Long size: 330 mm or longer Middle size: 220 mm to 329 mm Short size 1: 205 mm to 219 mm Short size 2: 160 mm to 204 mm Short size 3: 159 mm or shorter
4
When the value increases by "1", the aligning amount increases by approx. 0.6 mm. Long size: 330 mm or longer Middle size: 220 mm to 329 mm Short size 1: 205 mm to 219 mm Short size 2: 160 mm to 204 mm Short size 3: 159 mm or shorter
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 86
Code 4105-0
Classification Paper feeding
4105-1
4105-2
4105-3
4105-4
4106-0
Paper feeding
4106-1
4106-2
4106-3
4106-4
4107-0 4107-1 4107-2 4107-3 4107-4
Paper feeding
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- Thick ALL 35 Paper aligning paper 2 <0-63> amount Long size adjustment at the registraThick ALL 35 tion section paper 2 <0-63> (Bypass feed / Middle Thick paper 2) size Thick ALL 35 paper 2 <0-63> Short size 1 Thick ALL 35 paper 2 <0-63> Short size 2 ALL 35 Thick paper 2 <0-63> Short size 3 ALL 35 Thick Paper aligning <0-63> paper 3 amount Long size adjustment at the registraThick ALL 35 tion section <0-63> paper 3 (Bypass feed / Middle Thick paper 3) size Thick ALL 35 paper 3 <0-63> Short size 1 Thick ALL 35 paper 3 <0-63> Short size 2 Thick ALL 35 paper 3 <0-63> Short size 3 ALL 30 Paper aligning OHP film Long size <0-63> amount adjustment at OHP film ALL 30 the registraMiddle <0-63> tion section size (Bypass feed / OHP film ALL 30 OHP film) Short size <0-63> 1 ALL 30 OHP film <0-63> Short size 2 OHP film ALL 30 Short size <0-63> 3
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
RAM M M
M
M
M
M M
M
M
M
M M M M M
Contents
Procedur e
When the value increases by "1", the aligning amount increases by approx. 0.6 mm. Long size: 330 mm or longer Middle size: 220 mm to 329 mm Short size 1: 205 mm to 219 mm Short size 2: 160 mm to 204 mm Short size 3: 159 mm or shorter
4
When the value increases by "1", the aligning amount increases by approx. 0.6 mm. Long size: 330 mm or longer Middle size: 220 mm to 329 mm Short size 1: 205 mm to 219 mm Short size 2: 160 mm to 204 mm Short size 3: 159 mm or shorter
4
When the value increases by "1", the aligning amount increases by approx. 0.6 mm. Long size: 330 mm or longer Middle size: 220 mm to 329 mm Short size 1: 205 mm to 219 mm Short size 2: 160 mm to 204 mm Short size 3: 159 mm or shorter
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4 4 4 4
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 87
2
Code 4108-0
Classification Paper feeding
4108-1
4108-2
4108-3
4108-4
4109-0 4109-1
4109-2
4109-3
4109-4
Paper feeding
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- Plain ALL 25 Paper aligning paper <0-63> amount Long size adjustment at the registraPlain ALL 25 tion section paper <0-63> (PFP upper Middle drawer / Plain size paper) Plain ALL 25 paper <0-63> Short size 1 Plain ALL 25 paper <0-63> Short size 2 ALL 25 Plain paper <0-63> Short size 3 ALL 25 Plain Paper aligning <0-63> paper amount Long size adjustment at the registraPlain ALL 25 tion section <0-63> paper (PFP lower Middle drawer / Plain size paper) Plain ALL 25 paper <0-63> Short size 1 Plain ALL 25 paper <0-63> Short size 2 Plain ALL 25 paper <0-63> Short size 3
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
RAM M M
M
M
M
M M
M
M
M
Contents
Procedur e
When the value increases by "1", the aligning amount increases by approx. 0.6 mm. Long size: 330 mm or longer Middle size: 220 mm to 329 mm Short size 1: 205 mm to 219 mm Short size 2: 160 mm to 204 mm Short size 3: 159 mm or shorter
4
When the value increases by "1", the aligning amount increases by approx. 0.6 mm. Long size: 330 mm or longer Middle size: 220 mm to 329 mm Short size 1: 205 mm to 219 mm Short size 2: 160 mm to 204 mm Short size 3: 159 mm or shorter
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 88
Code 4110-0
Classification Paper feeding
4110-1
4110-2
4110-3
4110-4
4111
Paper feeding
4115-0
Paper feeding
4115-1
4115-2
4115-3
4115-4
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- Plain ALL 18 Paper aligning paper <0-63> amount Long size adjustment at the registraPlain ALL 18 tion section paper <0-63> (ADU / Plain Middle paper) size
RAM M M
Plain paper Short size 1 Plain paper Short size 2 Plain paper Short size 3 Paper aligning amount adjustment at the registration section (LCF)
ALL
6 <0-63>
M
ALL
6 <0-63>
M
ALL
6 <0-63>
M
ALL
25 <0-63>
M
Thick paper 1 Long size Thick paper 1 Middle size Thick paper 1 Short size 1 Thick paper 1 Short size 2 Thick paper 1 Short size 3
ALL
35 <0-63>
M
ALL
35 <0-63>
M
ALL
35 <0-63>
M
ALL
35 <0-63>
M
ALL
35 <0-63>
M
Paper aligning amount adjustment at the registration section (1st drawer / Thick paper 1)
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Contents
Procedur e
When the value increases by "1", the aligning amount increases by approx. 0.8 mm. Long size: 330 mm or longer Middle size: 220 mm to 329 mm When the value increases by "1", the aligning amount increases by approx. 1.0 mm. Short size 1: 205 mm to 219 mm Short size 2: 160 mm to 204 mm Short size 3: 159 mm or shorter
4
When the value increases by "1", the aligning amount increases by approx. 0.6 mm. When the value increases by "1", the aligning amount increases by approx. 0.6 mm. Long size: 330 mm or longer Middle size: 220 mm to 329 mm Short size 1: 205 mm to 219 mm Short size 2: 160 mm to 204 mm Short size 3: 159 mm or shorter
1
4
4
4
4
4 4
4
4
4
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 89
2
Code 4116-0
Classification Paper feeding
4116-1
4116-2
4116-3
4116-4
4117-0
Paper feeding
4117-1
4117-2
4117-3
4117-4
4118-0 4118-1
4118-2
4118-3
4118-4
Paper feeding
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- Thick ALL 35 Paper aligning paper 1 <0-63> amount Long size adjustment at the registraThick ALL 35 tion section paper 1 <0-63> (2nd drawer / Middle Thick paper 1) size Thick ALL 35 paper 1 <0-63> Short size 1 Thick ALL 35 paper 1 <0-63> Short size 2 ALL 35 Thick paper 1 <0-63> Short size 3 ALL 35 Thick Paper aligning <0-63> paper 1 amount Long size adjustment at the registraThick ALL 35 tion section <0-63> paper 1 (PFP upper Middle drawer / Thick size paper 1) Thick ALL 35 paper 1 <0-63> Short size 1 Thick ALL 35 paper 1 <0-63> Short size 2 Thick ALL 35 paper 1 <0-63> Short size 3 Thick ALL 35 Paper aligning paper 1 <0-63> amount Long size adjustment at the registraThick ALL 35 tion section paper 1 <0-63> (PFP lower Middle drawer / Thick size paper 1) Thick ALL 35 paper 1 <0-63> Short size 1 Thick ALL 35 paper 1 <0-63> Short size 2 Thick ALL 35 paper 1 <0-63> Short size 3
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
RAM M M
M
M
M
M M
M
M
M
M M
M
M
M
Contents
Procedur e
When the value increases by "1", the aligning amount increases by approx. 0.6 mm. Long size: 330 mm or longer Middle size: 220 mm to 329 mm Short size 1: 205 mm to 219 mm Short size 2: 160 mm to 204 mm Short size 3: 159 mm or shorter
4
When the value increases by "1", the aligning amount increases by approx. 0.6 mm. Long size: 330 mm or longer Middle size: 220 mm to 329 mm Short size 1: 205 mm to 219 mm Short size 2: 160 mm to 204 mm Short size 3: 159 mm or shorter
4
When the value increases by "1", the aligning amount increases by approx. 0.6 mm. Long size: 330 mm or longer Middle size: 220 mm to 329 mm Short size 1: 205 mm to 219 mm Short size 2: 160 mm to 204 mm Short size 3: 159 mm or shorter
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 90
Code 4120-0
Classification Paper feeding
4120-1
4120-2
4120-3
4120-4
4122-0
Paper feeding
4122-1
4122-2
4122-3
4122-4
4123-0 4123-1
4123-2
4123-3
4123-4
Paper feeding
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- Thick ALL 22 Paper aligning paper 1 <0-63> amount Long size adjustment at the registraThick ALL 22 tion section paper 1 <0-63> (ADU / Thick Middle paper 1) size Thick ALL 22 paper 1 <0-63> Short size 1 Thick ALL 22 paper 1 <0-63> Short size 2 ALL 22 Thick paper 1 <0-63> Short size 3 ALL 15 Plain Paper aligning <0-63> paper amount Long size adjustment at the registraPlain ALL 15 tion section: <0-63> paper 200mm/s(1st Middle drawer / Plain size paper) Plain ALL 15 paper <0-63> Short size 1 Plain ALL 15 paper <0-63> Short size 2 Plain ALL 15 paper <0-63> Short size 3 Plain ALL 15 Paper aligning paper <0-63> amount Long size adjustment at the registraPlain ALL 15 tion section: paper <0-63> 200mm/s(2nd Middle drawer / Plain size paper) Plain ALL 15 paper <0-63> Short size 1 Plain ALL 15 paper <0-63> Short size 2 Plain ALL 15 paper <0-63> Short size 3
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
RAM M M
M
M
M
M M
M
M
M
M M
M
M
M
Contents
Procedur e
When the value increases by "1", the aligning amount increases by approx. 0.8 mm. Long size: 330 mm or longer Middle size: 220 mm to 329 mm Short size 1: 205 mm to 219 mm Short size 2: 160 mm to 204 mm Short size 3: 159 mm or shorter
4
When the value increases by "1", the aligning amount increases by approx. 0.8 mm. Long size: 330 mm or longer Middle size: 220 mm to 329 mm Short size 1: 205 mm to 219 mm Short size 2: 160 mm to 204 mm Short size 3: 159 mm or shorter
4
When the value increases by "1", the aligning amount increases by approx. 0.8 mm. Long size: 330 mm or longer Middle size: 220 mm to 329 mm Short size 1: 205 mm to 219 mm Short size 2: 160 mm to 204 mm Short size 3: 159 mm or shorter
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 91
2
Code 4124-0
Classification Paper feeding
4124-1
4124-2
4124-3
4124-4
4125-0
Paper feeding
4125-1
4125-2
4125-3
4125-4
4126
Paper feeding
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- Plain ALL 15 Paper aligning paper <0-63> amount Long size adjustment at the registraPlain ALL 15 tion section: paper <0-63> 200mm/ Middle s(PFP upper size drawer / Plain Plain ALL 15 paper) paper <0-63> Short size 1 Plain ALL 15 paper <0-63> Short size 2 Plain ALL 15 <0-63> paper Short size 3 ALL 15 Plain Paper aligning <0-63> paper amount Long size adjustment at the registraPlain ALL 15 tion section: <0-63> paper 200mm/ Middle s(PFP lower size drawer / Plain Plain ALL 15 paper) paper <0-63> Short size 1 Plain ALL 15 paper <0-63> Short size 2 Plain ALL 15 paper <0-63> Short size 3 Paper aligning amount ALL 15 adjustment at the registra<0-63> tion section: 200mm/ s(LCF)
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
RAM M M
M
M
M
M M
M
M
M
M
Contents
Procedur e
When the value increases by "1", the aligning amount increases by approx. 0.8 mm. Long size: 330 mm or longer Middle size: 220 mm to 329 mm Short size 1: 205 mm to 219 mm Short size 2: 160 mm to 204 mm Short size 3: 159 mm or shorter
4
When the value increases by "1", the aligning amount increases by approx. 0.8 mm. Long size: 330 mm or longer Middle size: 220 mm to 329 mm Short size 1: 205 mm to 219 mm Short size 2: 160 mm to 204 mm Short size 3: 159 mm or shorter
4
When the value increases by "1", the aligning amount increases by approx. 0.8 mm.
1
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 92
Code 4127-0
Classification Paper feeding
4127-1
4127-2
4127-3
4127-4
4128-0
Paper feeding
4128-1
4128-2
4128-3
4128-4
4129-0 4129-1
4129-2
4129-3
4129-4
Paper feeding
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- Plain ALL 15 Paper aligning paper <0-63> amount Long size adjustment at the registraPlain ALL 15 tion section: paper <0-63> 200mm/ Middle s(Bypass feed size / Plain paper) Plain ALL 15 paper <0-63> Short size 1 Plain ALL 15 paper <0-63> Short size 2 ALL 15 Plain paper <0-63> Short size 3 ALL 30 Special Paper aligning <0-63> paper 1 amount Long size adjustment at the registraSpecial ALL 30 tion section <0-63> paper 1 (Bypass feed / Middle Special paper size 1) Special ALL 30 paper 1 <0-63> Short size 1 Special ALL 30 paper 1 <0-63> Short size 2 Special ALL 30 paper 1 <0-63> Short size 3 Special ALL 30 Paper aligning paper 2 <0-63> amount Long size adjustment at the registraSpecial ALL 30 tion section paper 2 <0-63> (Bypass feed / Middle Special paper size 1) Special ALL 30 paper 2 <0-63> Short size 1 Special ALL 30 paper 2 <0-63> Short size 2 Special ALL 30 paper 2 <0-63> Short size 3
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
RAM M M
M
M
M
M M
M
M
M
M M
M
M
M
Contents
Procedur e
When the value increases by "1", the aligning amount increases by approx. 0.8 mm. Long size: 330 mm or longer Middle size: 220 mm to 329 mm Short size 1: 205 mm to 219 mm Short size 2: 160 mm to 204 mm Short size 3: 159 mm or shorter
4
When the value increases by "1", the aligning amount increases by approx. 0.6 mm. Long size: 330 mm or longer Middle size: 220 mm to 329 mm Short size 1: 205 mm to 219 mm Short size 2: 160 mm to 204 mm Short size 3: 159 mm or shorter
4
When the value increases by "1", the aligning amount increases by approx. 0.6 mm. Long size: 330 mm or longer Middle size: 220 mm to 329 mm Short size 1: 205 mm to 219 mm Short size 2: 160 mm to 204 mm Short size 3: 159 mm or shorter
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 93
2
Code
Classification
4562
Laser
4563
Laser
4564
Laser
4565
Laser
4567-0
Laser
4567-1 4567-2 4567-3 4567-4 4567-5 4568
Laser
4703
Laser
4704
Laser
4707-0
Drive
4707-1 4707-2 4707-3 4707-4 4707-5 4707-6 4707-7 4707-8
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- 1st ALL 21 Leading edge drawer <0-40> position adjustment 2nd ALL 21 correction drawer <0-40> item on each PFP upper ALL 21 media type drawer <0-40> (when decelPFP lower ALL 21 erating) drawer <0-40> Thick ALL 21 Leading edge paper 1 <0-40> position adjustment Thick ALL 21 correction paper 2 <0-40> item on each Thick ALL 21 media type paper 3 <0-40> Bypass feed OHP film ALL 21 (when decel<0-40> erating) Special ALL 21 paper 1 <0-40> Special ALL 21 paper 2 <0-40> ADU ALL 21 Leading edge <0-40> position adjustment correction item on each media type (when decelerating) Fine adjustment of polygoALL 128 nal motor rotational speed <0-255> (PPC): High speed Fine adjustment of polygoALL 128 nal motor rotational speed <0-255> (PRT): High speed Fine adjustTransport PRT 128 ment of PFP speed: <0-255> motor rotaNormal FAX 128 tional speed speed <0-255> PPC 128 <0-255> Transport PRT 128 speed: <0-255> DeceleratFAX 128 ing <0-255> PPC 128 <0-255> Transport PRT 128 speed: <0-255> High FAX 128 speed <0-255> PPC 128 <0-255>
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
RAM
Contents
M
When the value increases by "1", the image shifts toward the trailing edge of the paper by approx. 0.15 mm.
M M M M M M
Procedur e 1 1 1 1
When the value increases by "1", the image shifts toward the trailing edge of the paper by approx. 0.15 mm.
4 4 4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
When the value increases by "1", the image shifts toward the trailing edge of the paper by approx. 0.15 mm.
1
M
1
M
1
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 94 07/02
Code
Classification
4708-0
Drive
4708-1 4708-2 4708-3 4708-4 4708-5 4708-6 4708-7 4708-8 4719
Image control
4720
Maintenance
4721
Maintenance
4731-0
Image
4731-1
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- Fine adjustTransport PRT 128 speed: <0-255> ment of TLCF motor rotaNormal FAX 128 tional speed speed <0-255> PPC 128 <0-255> Transport PRT 128 speed: <0-255> DeceleratFAX 128 ing <0-255> PPC 128 <0-255> Transport PRT 128 speed: <0-255> High FAX 128 speed <0-255> PPC 128 <0-255> Enforced position adjustALL ment
Displaying parameters for position adjustment detection abnormality Tilt motor initial excitation setting
Image void correction code
Top margin
4731-2 4731-3 4731-4
Bottom margin
4731-5 4731-6 4731-7 4732-0
4732-1
Image
Displaying corrected values of leading edge adjustment
Absolute humidity reference value Absolute humidity RMS value
RAM
Contents
Procedur e
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
Forcibly performs the color registration control adjustment in order to eliminate the color deviation of Y, M, C and K colors. Checks the cause of a “CA00“ error when it occurs. Perform this adjustment when the NVRAM on the laser unit or the LGC board has been replaced.
6
ALL
<0-255>
M
ALL
-
M
PPC (black) PPC (color) PRT (black) PRT (color) PPC (black) PPC (color) PRT (black) PRT (color) ALL
0 <0-255> 48 <0-255> 48 <0-255> 48 <0-255> 24 <0-255> 24 <0-255> 0 <0-255> 0 <0-255> 255 <0-255>
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
10
ALL
255 <0-255>
M
10
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 6
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 95 06/10
2
Code
Classification
7315-0
Image
7315-1 7315-2 7316-0
Image
7316-1 7316-2 7317-0
Image
7317-1 7317-2 7318-0
Image
7318-1 7318-2 7322-0
Image
7322-1 7324-0
Image
7324-1 7330
Image
7335
Image
7340
Image
7341
7346 7348
Image
Items Gamma balance adjustment (PS / Smooth / 8-bit)
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- L PRT 128 (black) <0-255> M PRT 128 (black) <0-255> H PRT 128 (black) <0-255> L
Gamma balance adjustment (PS / Detail / 8-bit)
M H
Gamma balance adjustment (PCL / Smooth / 8bit)
L M H L
Gamma balance adjustment (PCL / Detail / 8-bit)
M H
Tagbit extension processing for printing (Black mode)
PS
Filter process switching for printing (Black mode)
PS
Fine adjustment of sharpness center value for printer (Multilevel processing)
PS
PCL
PCL
PCL
Thin line reproduction adjustment
PS
Switchover on printer-related screens
PS
PCL
PCL
PRT (black) PRT (black) PRT (black)
128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255>
PRT (black) PRT (black) PRT (black)
128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255>
PRT (black) PRT (black) PRT (black)
128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255>
PRT (black) PRT (black) PRT (black) PRT (black)
1 <0-1> 1 <0-1> 0 <0-2> 0 <0-2>
PRT (black) PRT (black)
128 <0-255> 128 <0-255>
PRT (black) PRT (black)
0 <0-8> 0 <0-8>
PRT (black) PRT (black)
0 <0-1> 0 <0-1>
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
RAM
Contents
SYS
When the value increases, the density in the target area becomes higher. L: Low density area M: Medium density area H: High density area When the value increases, the density in the target area becomes higher. L: Low density area M: Medium density area H: High density area When the value increases, the density in the target area becomes higher. L: Low density area M: Medium density area H: High density area When the value increases, the density in the target area becomes higher. L: Low density area M: Medium density area H: High density area 0: OFF 1: ON
SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS
SYS SYS
SYS SYS
Procedur e 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
0: Default 1: Thin lines are emphasized. 2: All the lines are emphasized. The larger the value is, the sharper the image becomes. The smaller the value is, the softer the image becomes. The larger the value is, the darker the small characters or fine lines in a halftone image become. The image faint is then enhanced. 0: High screen ruling value (smoother image) 1: Low screen ruling value (rougher image)
4 4 1 1
1 1
1 1
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 96 06/10
Code
Classification
7465
Image
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- Range correction on origiSCN 12 (black) <11-14, nal manually set on the original glass / User cus21-24, tom mode 31-34, 41-44> Range correction on origiSCN 12 nal set on the RADF / User (black) <11-14, custom mode 21-24, 31-34, 41-44>
RAM
Contents
SYS
Sets whether the values of the background peak and text peak are fixed or not. One's place is an adjustment for "automatic density" and ten's place is for "manual density". Once they are fixed, the range correction is performed with standard values. The values of the background peak and text peak affect the reproduction of the background density and text density respectively. 1: fixed/fixed 2: varied/fixed 3: fixed/varied 4: varied/varied Background peak/Text peak When the value increases, the background of the image (low density area) becomes harder to be printed out. When the value increases, the image becomes sharper. When the value decreases, the image becomes softer. The smaller the value is, the less the moire becomes. The larger the value is, the darker the image of the center step density becomes. However, if the base is in the Text mode, the larger the value is, the lighter the image of the center step density becomes. Sets the changing amount by 1 step at density adjustment on the control panel The larger the value is, the lighter the image of the light steps becomes.
7466
Image
7467
Image
Range correction Background peak adjustment / User custom mode
SCN (black)
56 <0-255>
SYS
7470
Image
Sharpness adjustment / User custom mode
SCN (black)
128 <0-255>
SYS
7475
Image
Density adjustment "manual density" fine adjustment/Center value / User custom mode
SCN (black)
128 <0-255>
SYS
7476
Image
Density adjustment "manual density" fine adjustment/Light step value / User custom mode
SCN (black)
20 <0-255>
SYS
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
SYS
Procedur e 1
2 1
1
1
1
1
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 97 06/10
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- Density adjustment "manSCN 20 (black) <0-255> ual density" fine adjustment/Dark step value / User custom mode
Code
Classification
7477
Image
7478
Image
Density adjustment "automatic density" fine adjustment / User custom mode
7480-0
Image
Adjustment of gamma balance / User custom mode
7480-1
L M
7480-2 7641-0
H Image
7641-1
Black area adjustment value 1 (Twin color)
H M
7641-2
7642-0
L
Image
7642-1 7642-2 7811
Image
Black area adjustment value 2 (Twin color - red and black) STRC table selection
7812 7827 7828
H M L Text/Photo Text
Image
STRC table Text/Photo selection ACS Text
RAM
Contents
SYS
Sets the changing amount by 1 step at density adjustment on the control panel The larger the value is, the darker the image of the dark steps becomes. The larger the value is, the darker the image becomes. However, if the base is in the Text mode, the larger the value is, the lighter the image becomes. When the value increases, the density in the target area becomes higher. L: Low density area M: Medium density area H: High density area The larger the value is, the larger the area recognized as black in the original becomes. The smaller the value is, he Larger the area recognized as the color other than black becomes. The larger the value is, the larger the black area becomes. The smaller the value is, the larger the red area becomes.
SCN (black)
128 <0-255>
SYS
SCN (black) SCN (black) SCN (black)
128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255>
SYS
PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color)
128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255>
PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color)
128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 0 <0-8> 0 <0-8> 0 <0-8> 0 <0-8>
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS
SYS SYS SYS
Procedur e 1
1
4 4 4 4 4 4
4 4 4
SYS
1
SYS
1
SYS
1
SYS
1
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 98
Code
Classification
8050-0
Image
8050-1
Items Color balance adjustment (PS / Smooth / Y)
8050-2 8051-0
Image
8051-1
Color balance adjustment (PS / Smooth / M)
8051-2 8052-0
Image
8052-1
Color balance adjustment (PS / Smooth / C)
8052-2 8053-0
Image
8053-1
Color balance adjustment (PS / Smooth / K)
8053-2 8054-0
Image
8054-1
Color balance adjustment (PS / Detail / Y)
8054-2 8055-0
Image
8055-1
Color balance adjustment (PS / Detail / M)
8055-2 8056-0
Image
8056-1
Color balance adjustment (PS / Detail / C)
8056-2 8057-0 8057-1 8057-2
Image
Color balance adjustment (PS / Detail / K)
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- L PRT 128 (color) <0-255> M PRT 128 (color) <0-255> H PRT 128 (color) <0-255> L PRT 128 (color) <0-255> M PRT 128 (color) <0-255> H PRT 128 (color) <0-255> L PRT 128 (color) <0-255> M PRT 128 (color) <0-255> H PRT 128 (color) <0-255> L PRT 128 (color) <0-255> M PRT 128 (color) <0-255> H PRT 128 (color) <0-255> L PRT 128 (color) <0-255> M PRT 128 (color) <0-255> H PRT 128 (color) <0-255> L PRT 128 (color) <0-255> M PRT 128 (color) <0-255> 128 H PRT (color) <0-255> L PRT 128 (color) <0-255> M PRT 128 (color) <0-255> H PRT 128 (color) <0-255> L PRT 128 (color) <0-255> M PRT 128 (color) <0-255> 128 H PRT (color) <0-255>
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
RAM
Contents
SYS
The target color, mode and density area become darker as the value increases. L: Low density area M: Medium density area H: High density area
SYS SYS SYS
Procedur e 4 4 4 4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS SYS SYS SYS
The target color, mode and density area become darker as the value increases. L: Low density area M: Medium density area H: High density area
4 4 4 4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS
4
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 99 06/10
2
Code
Classification
8058-0
Image
8058-1 8058-2 8059-0
Image
8059-1 8059-2 8060-0
Image
8060-1 8060-2 8061-0
Image
8061-1 8061-2 8062-0
Image
8062-1 8062-2 8063-0
Image
8063-1 8063-2 8064-0
Image
8064-1 8064-2 8065-0
Image
8065-1 8065-2 8076-0 8076-1
Image
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- Color balL PRT 128 (color) <0-255> ance adjustment (PCL / M PRT 128 Smooth / Y) (color) <0-255> H PRT 128 (color) <0-255> Color balL PRT 128 ance adjust(color) <0-255> ment (PCL / M PRT 128 Smooth / M) (color) <0-255> H PRT 128 (color) <0-255> Color balL PRT 128 ance adjust(color) <0-255> ment (PCL / M PRT 128 Smooth / C) (color) <0-255> H PRT 128 (color) <0-255> Color balL PRT 128 (color) <0-255> ance adjustment (PCL / M PRT 128 Smooth / K) (color) <0-255> H PRT 128 (color) <0-255> Color balL PRT 128 (color) <0-255> ance adjustment (PCL / M PRT 128 Detail / Y) (color) <0-255> H PRT 128 (color) <0-255> Color balL PRT 128 ance adjust(color) <0-255> ment (PCL / M PRT 128 Detail / M) (color) <0-255> 128 H PRT (color) <0-255> Color balL PRT 128 ance adjust(color) <0-255> ment (PCL / M PRT 128 Detail / C) (color) <0-255> H PRT 128 (color) <0-255> Color balL PRT 128 ance adjust(color) <0-255> ment (PCL / M PRT 128 Detail / K) (color) <0-255> 128 H PRT (color) <0-255> PS PRT 113 Toner limit (color) <0-255> threshold setting / Special PCL PRT 113 paper 1: (color) <0-255> Smooth
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
RAM
Contents
SYS
The target color, mode and density area become darker as the value increases. L: Low density area M: Medium density area H: High density area
SYS SYS SYS
Procedur e 4 4 4 4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS SYS SYS SYS
The target color, mode and density area become darker as the value increases. L: Low density area M: Medium density area H: High density area
4 4 4 4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS SYS
The larger the value is, the darker the image in the high density area becomes.
4 4
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 100 06/10
Code
Classification
8077-0
Image
8077-1 8078-0
Image
8078-1 8079-0
Image
8079-1 8080-0
Image
8080-1 8081-0
Image
8081-1 8082-0
Image
8082-1 8083-0
Image
8083-1 8084-0
Image
8084-1 8085-0
Image
8085-1 8086-0
Image
8086-1 8087-0 8087-1
Image
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- PS PRT 113 Toner limit (color) <0-255> threshold setting / Special PCL PRT 113 paper 2: (color) <0-255> Smooth Toner limit PS PRT 128 threshold set(color) <0-255> ting / RecyPCL PRT 128 cled paper: (color) <0-255> Smooth PS PRT 113 Toner limit (color) <0-255> threshold setting / Thick PCL PRT 113 paper 4: (color) <0-255> Smooth Toner limit PS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> threshold setting / Plain PCL PRT 128 paper: Detail (color) <0-255> PS PRT 113 Toner limit (color) <0-255> threshold setting / Thick PCL PRT 113 paper 1: (color) <0-255> Detail PS PRT 113 Toner limit (color) <0-255> threshold setting / Thick PCL PRT 113 paper 2: (color) <0-255> Detail PS PRT 113 Toner limit (color) <0-255> threshold setting / Thick 113 PCL PRT paper 3: (color) <0-255> Detail 128 Toner limit PS PRT threshold set(color) <0-255> ting / OHP PCL PRT 128 film: Detail (color) <0-255> PS PRT 113 Toner limit (color) <0-255> threshold setting / Special 113 PCL PRT paper 1: (color) <0-255> Detail Toner limit PS PRT 113 threshold set(color) <0-255> ting / Special PCL PRT 113 paper 2: (color) <0-255> Detail PS PRT 128 Toner limit (color) <0-255> threshold setting / RecyPCL PRT 128 cled paper: (color) <0-255> Detail
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Procedur e
RAM
Contents
SYS
The larger the value is, the darker the image in the high density area becomes.
4
The larger the value is, the darker the image in the high density area becomes.
4
SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS
4
4
The larger the value is, the darker the image in the high density area becomes.
4
The larger the value is, the darker the image in the high density area becomes.
4
4
4
The larger the value is, the darker the image in the high density area becomes.
4
The larger the value is, the darker the image in the high density area becomes.
4
The larger the value is, the darker the image in the high density area becomes.
4
The larger the value is, the darker the image in the high density area becomes.
4
4
4
4
4
The larger the value is, the darker the image in the high density area becomes.
4
The larger the value is, the darker the image in the high density area becomes.
4
The larger the value is, the darker the image in the high density area becomes.
4
4
4
4
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 101 06/10
2
Code
Classification
8088-0
Image
8088-1 8102-0
Image
8102-1 8104-0
Image
8104-1 8110
Image
8111 8112
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- PS PRT 113 Toner limit (color) <0-255> threshold setting / Thick PCL PRT 113 paper 4: (color) <0-255> Detail Tagbit extenPS PRT 1 sion process(color) <0-1> ing for printing PCL PRT 1 (Color mode) (color) <0-1> Filter process PS PRT 0 switching for (color) <0-2> printing (Color PCL PRT 0 mode) (color) <0-2> Fine adjustment value of sharpness for printer / PS
8113 8114
Image
8115 8116
Fine adjustment value of sharpness for printer / PCL
8117 8120
Image
8130
Image
8131
8176
Image
8178
8196
Image
General Photographic Presentation Line art General Photographic Presentation Line art
Adjustment of sharpness boundary position Thin line PS reproduction adjustment PCL
Switchover on printer-related screens
PS PCL
Code length adjustment value
Contents
SYS
The larger the value is, the darker the image in the high density area becomes.
4
0: OFF 1: ON
4
SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS
PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color)
128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 0 <0-1> 0 <0-1> 0 <0-1>
PRT (color) PRT (color)
0 <0-1> 0 <0-1>
SYS
PRT (color)
63 <60-64>
SYS
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
Procedur e
RAM
SYS SYS SYS
4 0: Default 1: Thin lines are emphasized. 2: All the lines are emphasized. The larger the value is, the sharper the image becomes. The smaller the value is, the softer the image becomes.
SYS SYS SYS SYS
SYS SYS
SYS
4 4 1 1 1 1
The larger the value is, the sharper the image becomes. The smaller the value is, the softer the image becomes.
SYS SYS
4
1 1 1 1
P. 3-54 "3.8.16 Sharpness adjustment" The larger the value is, the darker the small characters or fine lines in a halftone image become. The image faint is then enhanced. 0: High screen ruling value (smoother image) 1: Low screen ruling value (rougher image) P. 3-55 "3.8.17 Quantization parameter for intermediate file creation"
1 1 1
1 1
1
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 102 07/06
Code
Classification
8210-0
Image
8210-1 8210-2 8210-3 8211-0
Image
8211-1 8211-2 8211-3 8212-0
Image
8212-1 8212-2 8212-3 8213-0
Image
8213-1 8213-2 8213-3 8214-0
Image
8214-1 8214-2 8214-3 8215-0 8215-1 8215-2 8215-3
Image
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- PureBlack General PRT 8 (color) <1-15> Text threshold (PCL) PhotoPRT 8 graphic (color) <1-15> PresentaPRT 8 tion (color) <1-15> Line art PRT 8 (color) <1-15> PureBlack General PRT 1 Graphics (color) <1-15> threshold PhotoPRT 1 (PCL) graphic (color) <1-15> PresentaPRT 1 tion (color) <1-15> Line art PRT 8 (color) <1-15> General PRT 1 PureBlack (color) <1-15> Image threshold (PCL) PhotoPRT 1 graphic (color) <1-15> PresentaPRT 1 tion (color) <1-15> Line art PRT 8 (color) <1-15> PRT 8 PureGray Text General (color) <1-15> threshold (PCL) PhotoPRT 8 graphic (color) <1-15> PresentaPRT 8 tion (color) <1-15> Line art PRT 8 (color) <1-15> PureGray General PRT 1 Graphics (color) <1-15> threshold PRT 1 Photo(PCL) graphic (color) <1-15> PresentaPRT 1 tion (color) <1-15> Line art PRT 8 (color) <1-15> PureGray 1 General PRT Image thresh(color) <1-15> old (PCL) PhotoPRT 1 graphic (color) <1-15> PresentaPRT 1 tion (color) <1-15> 8 Line art PRT (color) <1-15>
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Procedur e
RAM
Contents
SYS
When the value increases, the color range to be printed only with the black toner becomes wider. When the value decreases, this color range becomes narrower.
4
When the value increases, the color range to be printed only with the black toner becomes wider. When the value decreases, this color range becomes narrower.
4
When the value increases, the color range to be printed only with the black toner becomes wider. When the value decreases, this color range becomes narrower.
4
When the value increases, the color range to be printed only with the black toner becomes wider. When the value decreases, this color range becomes narrower.
4
When the value increases, the color range to be printed only with the black toner becomes wider. When the value decreases, this color range becomes narrower.
4
When the value increases, the color range to be printed only with the black toner becomes wider. When the value decreases, this color range becomes narrower.
4
SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS
4 4 4
4 4 4
4 4 4
4 4 4
4 4 4
4 4 4
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 103 07/06
2
Code
Classification
8252-0
Image
8252-1 8252-2 8252-3 8253-0
Image
8253-1 8253-2 8253-3 8254-0
Image
8254-1 8254-2 8254-3 8255-0 8255-1 8255-2 8255-3
Image
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- General PRT 128 DevicePure(color) <113Black/Gray 143> Text threshold adjustPhotoPRT 128 ment (PS) graphic (color) <113143> PresentaPRT 128 tion (color) <113143> Line art PRT 128 (color) <113143> General PRT 128 DevicePure(color) <113Black/Gray 143> Image threshold adjustPhotoPRT 128 ment (PS) graphic (color) <113143> PresentaPRT 128 tion (color) <113143> Line art PRT 128 (color) <113143> General PRT 128 DevicePure(color) <113Black/Gray Graphics 143> threshold PhotoPRT 128 adjustment graphic (color) <113(PS) 143> PresentaPRT 128 tion (color) <113143> Line art PRT 128 (color) <113143> General PRT 128 CIEBased(color) <113PureBlack/ 143> Gray Text threshold PRT 128 Photoadjustment graphic (color) <113(PS) 143> PresentaPRT 128 tion (color) <113143> Line art PRT 128 (color) <113143>
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
RAM
Contents
SYS
When the value increases, the color range to be printed only with the black toner becomes wider. When the value decreases, this color range becomes narrower.
SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS
SYS SYS
When the value increases, the color range to be printed only with the black toner becomes wider. When the value decreases, this color range becomes narrower.
SYS SYS SYS
4 4
4 4 4 4
When the value increases, the color range to be printed only with the black toner becomes wider. When the value decreases, this color range becomes narrower.
SYS SYS
4
4
SYS SYS
Procedur e
4 4 4 4
When the value increases, the color range to be printed only with the black toner becomes wider. When the value decreases, this color range becomes narrower.
4 4 4 4
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 104 06/10
Code
Classification
8256-0
Image
8256-1 8256-2 8256-3 8257-0
Image
8257-1 8257-2 8257-3 8325
Image
8326 8327 8340
Image
8341 8342 8344
Image
8345 8346
8348
Image
8349 8350
8370
Image
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- CIEBasedGeneral PRT 128 (color) <113PureBlack/ Gray Image 143> threshold PhotoPRT 128 adjustment graphic (color) <113(PS) 143> PresentaPRT 128 tion (color) <113143> Line art PRT 128 (color) <113143> General PRT 128 CIEBased(color) <113PureBlack/ 143> Gray Graphics threshold PhotoPRT 128 adjustment graphic (color) <113(PS) 143> PresentaPRT 128 tion (color) <113143> Line art PRT 128 (color) <113143> Saturation Text SCN 128 adjustment (color) <0-255> Photo SCN 128 (color) <0-255> Printed SCN 128 image (color) <0-255> Text SCN 128 Density (color) <0-255> adjustment Fine curve 128 Photo SCN compensation (color) <0-255> / Center value Printed SCN 128 image (color) <0-255> Density Text SCN 20 adjustment (color) <0-255> Fine curve Photo SCN 20 compensation (color) <0-255> / Light step Printed SCN 20 value image (color) <0-255> Density adjustment Fine curve compensation / Dark step value Fine adjustment of background peak adjustment
Text
Printed image
SCN (color) SCN (color) SCN (color)
20 <0-255> 20 <0-255> 20 <0-255>
User custom mode
SCN (color)
50 <0-50>
Photo
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
RAM
Contents
SYS
When the value increases, the color range to be printed only with the black toner becomes wider. When the value decreases, this color range becomes narrower.
SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS
SYS SYS SYS SYS
When the value increases, the color range to be printed only with the black toner becomes wider. When the value decreases, this color range becomes narrower.
SYS SYS
SYS SYS SYS
SYS
4 4
4 4 4 4
The larger the value is, the brighter the image becomes. The smaller the value is, the duller the image becomes. The larger the value is, the darker the image of the center step density becomes.
SYS SYS
4
4
SYS SYS
Procedur e
1 1 1 1 1 1
Sets the changing amount by 1 step at density adjustment on the control panel The larger the value is, the lighter the image of the light steps becomes. Sets the changing amount by 1 step at density adjustment on the control panel The larger the value is, the darker the image of the dark steps becomes. Adjusts the level of background. When the value increases, the background becomes darker.
1 1 1
1 1 1
1
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 105 06/10
2
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- Fine adjustUser cusSCN 0 <0-4> ment of black tom mode (color) density
Code
Classification
8371
Image
8372
Image
RGB conversion method selection
User custom mode
SCN (color)
0 <0-3>
SYS
8373
Image
Saturation adjustment
User custom mode
SCN (color)
128 <0-255>
SYS
8375
Image
Sharpness adjustment
User custom mode
SCN (color)
128 <0-255>
SYS
8380
Image
User custom mode
SCN (color)
128 <0-255>
SYS
8381
Image
Density adjustment Fine curve compensation / Center value Density adjustment / Light step value
User custom mode
SCN (color)
20 <0-255>
SYS
8382
Image
Density adjustment / Dark step value
User custom mode
SCN (color)
20 <0-255>
SYS
9104
Image
Compression quality of s SLIM PDF background processing
SCN (color)
5 <0-10>
SYS
9107
Image
Resolution adjustment of SLIM PDF background processing
SCN (color)
1 <0-3>
SYS
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
RAM
Contents
SYS
Adjusts the black density of the scanned image. When the value increases, the black density becomes darker. Sets the color space format of the output image. 0: sRGB 1: AppleRGB 2: ROMMRGB 3: AdobeRGB The larger the value is, the brighter the image becomes. The smaller the value is, the duller the image becomes. When the value increases, the image becomes sharper. When the value decreases, the image becomes softer. The smaller the value is, the less the moire becomes. The larger the value is, the darker the image of the center step density becomes. Sets the changing amount by 1 step at density adjustment on the control panel The larger the value is, the lighter the image of the light steps becomes. Sets the changing amount by 1 step at density adjustment on the control panel The larger the value is, the darker the image of the dark steps becomes. 0-10 0: High compression, low image quality 10: Low compression, high image quality 0: 75dpi 1: 100dpi 2: 150dpi 3: 200dpi
Procedur e 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 106 06/10
2.2.5
Setting mode (08)
The items in the setting code list can be set or changed in this setting mode (08). When the power should be turned OFF, be sure to shut down the equipment by pressing the [ENERGY SAVER] button for a few seconds.
2
Classification List of Setting Mode (08)
User interface
Classification [ACS] [AMS] [APS] [X in 1] [Color specification] [Indicator] [Edit copying] [Sound] [Counter] [Cascade] [ACS] [Screen] [Administrator] [Feeding setting] [Language] [Original counter] [Original direction] [Copy volume] [Automatic calibration] [Default setting] [Jam releasing] [Offsetting between jobs] [Security level] [Sorting] [Timer] [Template] [Image shift] [Tray reset] [Date] [Annotation] [Displaying number] [Job Build] [File] [Department management] [Black-free] [Book duplexing] [Box printing] [Paper size]
Setting Mode (08) 9698 605 9185 650 643, 644 671 645, 646 610, 969, 970 202 652, 653 268 207, 602 263, 9882 658, 659 220, 221, 1929, 1930, 1931, 1932, 1933, 1934, 1935 302 628 300 632 276, 277, 278, 279, 280, 281, 282, 283, 284, 285, 286, 289, 331, 503, 585, 587, 588, 603, 604, 607, 618, 642 9359 682 1708 627, 634, 641, 649 204, 205, 206 1140 636, 1429, 1430 648 640 651, 657 342 1130, 1131, 9891 209, 218, 219 617, 620, 621, 622, 623, 624, 629 343 611 951, 953, 954 613
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 107 06/10
User interface Scanner Fax
Image
Image control
Feeding system
Classification [Blank copy prevention] [User mode] [E-mail] [FAX mistransmission prevention function] [Function] [Destination] [Default setting] [Priority drawer] [ACS] [Gamma correction] [Automatic calibration] [Default setting] [Smoothing] [Image repeat gap] [2nd transfer] [Abnormality detection] [Contrast voltage] [Automatic starting] [Smoothing] [Laser power] [SFB setting] [Feeding setting] [Paper source] [detection] [Setting] [Coated paper Mode] [Paper size] [Paper dimension]
[Paper retry]
Laser Main charger
Developer
[Pushing Paper] [Polygonal motor] [Cleaning] [Charger] [Toner nearly empty] [Toner cartridge rotation counter] [Toner density ratio manual offset control] [Prevention of color toner low density] [Used toner mixing paddles] [Paper exit speed control switching] [Duplex reversing position correction control]
Setting Mode (08) 625 506, 508, 580, 590 272, 273 3847, 3848, 3849 1498, 1926 701 274 689 609-0 to 4, 7606, 7615, 7616, 7617, 9825 597 595 550, 1149, 9382, 9897, 9898, 9899 560, 562 7612 548 573, 574, 575, 576 556, 2513-0 to 3, 2514-0 to 3, 2515 559, 565, 566, 567, 568, 569, 570, 571, 572 560 557, 2525-0 to 3, 2526-0 to 3, 2527 3835 254, 255, 619 480, 481, 1135, 1431 449, 1492 988 675-0 to 4 224, 225, 226, 227, 228, 256 210, 229, 230, 231, 232, 233, 234, 235, 236, 237, 238, 239, 240, 241, 242, 243, 244, 245, 246, 247, 248, 249, 470, 471, 4567, 4568 463-0 to 1, 464-0 to 1, 465-0 to 1, 466-0 to 1, 467-0 to 1, 468-0 to 1, 482, 1390, 1391, 1392, 1393, 1394, 1395, 1396, 1397, 1398, 1399, 1400, 1401 4553-0 to 4 398, 399, 478, 483, 484, 485, 486, 489, 490 1389 808 1415, 1416, 1416-0 to 3, 6452-0 to 3, 6453-0 to 3, 6454-0 to 3 1376-0 to 3 2707-0 to 3 2692, 2693 4551-0 to 1, 4554-0 to 1, 4561, 6209-0 to 2 4563 4564
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 108 08/08
Classification
Transfer
Fuser
Image processing RADF Finisher
[1st transfer] [2nd transfer] [Position adjustment] [Enforced toner supply] [Resistance detection] [Transfer bias] [Drum reverse rotation amount control] [Discharge blade] [Toner cartridge] [Temperature]
[Status counter] [Fuser reverse rotation setting] [Pre-running] [Fuser unit] [Counter] [Switchback] [Stapling] [Hole punching] [Finisher model switching] [AppleTalk] [Bindery] [Community] [DDNS] [DHCP] [Directory] [DNS] [DPWS]
Network
[E-mail] [File] [FTP] [HTTP] [IP Conflict] [IP Filter]
[IPP] [IPv6] [IPX]
Setting Mode (08) 816, 2512 2490 4546, 4550-0 to1, 4562 2411-0 to 2, 2412-0 to 2, 2413-0 to 2 2511 2510 2367 2553 4554-0 to 1, 4561, 6209-0 to 2 409, 410-0 to 1, 412, 413-0 to 1, 437, 438, 448, 450-0 to 1, 451-0 to 1, 452, 453, 518, 534-0 to 1, 1902, 1903, 1904, 1905, 2017-0 to 1, 2018-0 to 1, 2019-0 to 1, 2151-0 to 1, 2153-0 to 1, 2155, 2159, 2161, 2255, 4545 400 4569 417, 439, 440-0 to 1, 441-0 to 1, 526, 584, 855, 2020-0 to 1 4549 1371, 1372, 1378, 1380, 1382, 1383, 1385, 1386, 1387, 1388 462 704-0 to 1, 1911, 9811 9847 1912 1014, 1015, 1936, 3729, 3730 1026 1065, 1066 1020, 1112, 3737, 3745, 3746, 3747, 3748 1755, 1756, 1757, 1759, 1760, 1762, 3772, 3773, 3774, 3778, 3779, 3780 1028, 1029 1017, 1018, 1019, 3736, 3781, 3782, 3784 3749, 3750, 3751, 3752, 3753, 3754, 3755, 3757, 3758, 3759, 3760, 3765, 3766, 3785 265, 1097, 1098, 1477, 1478, 1489, 1491, 3837, 9384, 9946, 9947 1779, 1782, 1783, 1784, 1785, 1786 1055, 1059, 1060, 1089, 1090, 1091, 1092, 3739, 3804 1030, 1031, 1032 1440 1720, 1721, 1722, 1723, 1724, 1725, 1726, 1727, 1728, 1729, 1730, 1731, 1732, 1733, 1734, 1735, 1736, 1737, 1738, 1739 1078, 1079, 1080, 1081, 1082, 1083, 1084, 1085, 1086, 1087, 1088, 1447,1448, 1449, 1450, 1451, 3725, 3726 3767, 3768, 3770, 3775, 3776, 3777 1011, 1099
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 109 08/08
2
Classification
Network
[IP address] [LDAP]
1006, 1007, 1008, 1009, 1010, 1767, 1768, 3769 1016, 1138, 1488, 1923, 1924, 3506, 3507, 3743, 9629
[LLTD] [LPD] [MAC address] [MIB] [NDS] [NIC] [Novell] [PCL setting] [POP3] [RawPort] [Raw/TCP] [Raw printing] [Bonjour] [Role Base Access] [Samba] [SearchRoot] [SMB] [SMTP]
3793 1075, 1076, 1077 1141 1063 1027 1002 1093, 1094 973 1046, 1047, 1048, 1049, 1050, 1051, 1052, 3742, 3744 945 1073, 1074, 3731, 3732 290, 291, 292, 293, 294, 295, 296, 297, 298, 299, 978, 979 1103, 1104, 1105 1493, 1928, 3831 1464, 3783, 3833 1095 1023, 1024, 1025, 1117, 1124, 1950, 1951 1022, 1037, 1038, 1039, 1040, 1041, 1042, 1100, 1101, 1102, 1111, 3741 3845 1441, 1442, 1444, 1445, 1446, 3740 1740, 1741, 1742, 1743, 1744, 1745, 1746, 1747, 1748, 1749, 1750, 9819, 9822 1069, 1070 266, 1114, 1485, 3812 1043, 1044, 1045 1432, 1435, 1436 660, 661 1119 1781-0 to 1, 1940, 3805, 3815, 3816, 3817, 3818 1003 3810, 3811 259, 260, 264 1113, 1121, 1122, 1123 1484, 1486, 1487, 1920, 1921, 1922, 1925, 1937, 1952, 1953, 1954, 1955, 1956, 1957, 1958, 1959, 3722, 3723, 3724 1096 3771
[SNMP] [SNTP] [SSL] [TRAP] [InternetFAX] [Offramp] [Function] [Automatic transferring] [Initialization] [Scan setting] [Speed and settings] [Direct SMTP] [Data retention period] [Domain] [Authentication]
[Print queue] [Prefix] [Frame type] [Local I/F] [Supplicant] Wireless LAN [Driver] Bluetooth
Setting Mode (08)
[Data encryption] [Setting]
1012 614 1679, 1681, 1682, 1684, 1685, 1686, 1689, 1690, 1691, 1692, 1693, 1696, 1697, 1699, 1700, 1701, 1704, 1705, 1706, 1707, 1764, 1765, 1766 1661, 1662, 1663, 1664, 1665, 1666, 1667, 1668, 1669, 1670, 1671, 1672, 1673, 1674, 1675, 1676, 1677, 1678 1715 1710, 1711, 1712, 1713, 1714, 1719, 1769, 1941
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 110 07/06
Classification [HDD] [External counter] [Counter copy] [Calibration counter] [Count method] [Paper source] [Black toner cartridge drive] [Paper size]
Counter
[Accelerating/Decelerating mode]
[Tab paper] [Special paper] [Extra long size] [Double count] [Large/Small size]
[n-UP printing]
Version
[FAX] [HDD] [Engine] [System] [Finisher]
Maintenance
[ACS] [FSMS] [HTTP] [PM counter] [Error history] [Equipment number] [Calibration] [Emergency Mode] [Service notification]
[Supply order]
Electronic Filing
[Telephone] [Panel calibration] [Setting]
Setting Mode (08) 390, 391, 392, 393 381, 1126 257 6817 616, 663 356, 357, 358, 359, 360, 370, 372, 374 1410-0 to 3 301-0 to 17, 303-0 to 17, 304-0 to 17, 305-0 to 17, 306-0 to 17, 307-0 to 17, 308-0 to 17, 309-0 to 17, 310-0 to 17, 311-0 to 17, 312-0 to 17, 313-0 to 17, 314-0 to 17, 315-0 to 17, 316-0 to 17, 6027-0 to 17, 6078-0 to 3 6900, 6901, 6905-0 to 3, 6906-0 to 3, 6907-0 to 3, 6908-0 to 3, 6925-0 to 3, 6926-0 to 3, 6927-0 to 3, 6928-0 to 3, 6929-0 to 3, 6930-0 to 3, 6931-0 to 3, 6932-0 to 3, 6933-0 to 3, 6935-0 to 3, 6950-0 to 3, 6955-0 to 3, 6956-0 to 3, 6960-0 to 3, 6962-0 to 3 1412 6243 3800-0 to 1 344, 346, 347, 348, 349, 352, 353, 6018 317-0 to 2, 318-0 to 2, 319-0 to 2, 320-0 to 2, 321-0 to 2, 322-0 to 2, 323-0 to 2, 324-0 to 2, 325-0 to 2, 326-0 to 2, 327-0 to 2, 328-0 to 2, 329-0 to 2, 330-0 to 2, 332-0 to 2, 333-0 to 2, 334-0 to 2, 335-0 to 2 1530-0 to 4, 1531-0 to 4, 1532-0 to 4, 1533-0 to 1, 1534-0 to 1, 1535, 6806-0 to 7,6810-0 to 7,6811-0 to 7, 6812-0 to 7,6813-0 to 7,6814-0 to 7, 6815-0 to 7,6816-0 to 7 915 944 903, 905, 907, 908 900, 920, 921, 922, 923, 924, 925, 926, 927, 928, 929, 930, 931, 933, 934, 935, 936, 937, 938, 939 911, 9945 9737 999 726, 727, 728, 729, 730, 731 223, 251, 252, 375, 376 253 995 9059 710, 711 702, 703, 707, 715, 716, 717, 718, 719, 720, 721, 723, 767, 768, 769, 770, 771, 772, 773, 774, 775, 776, 777, 778, 780, 781, 782, 783, 784, 785, 786, 787, 788, 789, 790, 791, 792, 793, 794, 795, 796, 1145, 1495, 9739 732, 733, 734, 738, 739, 740, 741, 742, 743, 744, 745, 746, 747, 748, 749, 750, 751, 752, 753, 754, 755, 756, 757, 758, 759, 760, 761, 762, 763, 764, 765 250 692 267, 270, 950, 976, 1497
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 111 07/11
2
Classification
Data overwrite kit
General
[HDD] [NVRAM] [SRAM] [Releasing F200] [HDD] [ASIC] [EFI] [Raw printing] [S-ACS] [USB] [TAT partition] [Address book] [Easy setup] [Card authentication] [Card reader] [Counter data transmission] [Custom size] [Administrator's password] [Summer time] [Destination] [Initialization] [Setting] [Direct print] [Databases] [Default repeat count] [Template] [Partition] [Banner] [Date/Time] [File] [Department management] [BANNER MESSAGE button] [Memory] [User data management] [Line] [Duplex printing] [KS/KSSM]
[Profile]
Setting Mode (08) 1422, 1424, 1426 1427 1428 633 271, 670, 690, 691, 693, 694, 9379 9046 700, 9950 9117 4565, 9934 3802, 9889 1118 1125 9047 1776 1772, 1773, 1774, 1775, 9801, 9802 9381 1778 612 201 947 949, 975, 986, 1132, 1470, 1471, 1494, 9814, 9815, 9826, 9828, 9829, 9848, 9892, 9893, 9894 3803 684, 685, 686 9789 9886, 9888 662, 666, 667 678, 679, 680 200, 638 288, 1913, 1914, 1916 672 681 615 1468, 1469, 1472, 1473, 1474, 1481, 1482, 1483, 1496 203 683 1960, 1961, 1963, 1964, 1965, 1966, 1967, 1968, 1970, 1971, 1972, 1973, 1974, 1975, 1976, 1977, 1978, 1979, 1980, 1984, 1985, 1986, 1987, 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994 1790-0 to 23, 1791, 1792, 1793, 1794-0 to 23, 1795, 1796, 1797, 1798-0 to 23, 3600-0 to 23, 3601, 3602, 3603, 3604-0 to 23, 3605, 3606, 3607, 3608-0 to 23,
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 112 07/06
Procedure 1 [CANCEL] [0][8] [POWER]
[Digital key] (Code)
[Digital key] *[FUNCTION CLEAR] Sets or changes value
[START]
[ENTER] [POWER] OFF/ON or (Exit) [INTERRUPT] (Stores value in RAM)
[CLEAR] (Corrects value)
*
2
Press [FUNCTION CLEAR] to enter minus (-).
Procedure 2 [0][8] [POWER]
[Digital key] (Code)
[ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] Adjustment value cannot be changed
[START]
[POWER]OFF/ON (Exit)
Procedure 3 [0][8] [POWER]
[Digital key] (Code)
[START]
[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]
[ENTER] or (Automatic setting) [INTERRUPT] (Stores value in RAM)
[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)
Procedure 4 [CANCEL] [START] [0][8] [POWER]
[Digital key] (Code)
[START]
[Digital key] (Sub-code)
[START]
[CLEAR] (Corrects value)
*
[ENTER] or [Digital key] [INTERRUPT] * [FUNCTION CLEAR] (Stores value Sets or in RAM) changes value [CLEAR] (Corrects value)
[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)
Press [FUNCTION CLEAR] to enter minus (-).
Procedure 5 [CANCEL] [0][8] [POWER]
[Digital key] (Code)
[START]
[Digital key] *[HELP] Sets or changes value
[ENTER] [POWER] OFF/ON or (Exit) [INTERRUPT] (Stores value in RAM)
[CLEAR] (Corrects value)
*
Press [HELP] to enter "-".
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 113 07/06
Procedure 7 [CANCEL] [0][8] [POWER]
[Digital key] (Code)
[START]
[Digital key] (Setting)
[ENTER] or (HDD formatting) [INTERRUPT] (Stores value in RAM)
[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)
[CLEAR] (Corrects value)
Procedure 9 [CANCEL] [0][8] [POWER]
[Digital key] (Code)
[START]
[ENTER] [POWER] OFF/ON or (Exit) [INTERRUPT] (Stores value in RAM) [CLEAR] (Corrects value)
[Select button]
Procedure 10 [CANCEL] [0][8] [POWER]
[Digital key] (Code)
[START]
[Digital key] (1st setting)
[START]
[ENTER] [POWER] or OFF/ON [INTERRUPT] (Exit) (Stores value in RAM) [CLEAR] (Corrects value)
[Digital key] (2nd setting)
[CLEAR] (Corrects value)
Procedure 11 and 12 [CANCEL] [0][8] [POWER]
[Digital key] (Code)
[Digital key] or [ENTER] [START] [Software keyboard] *2(Stores value in RAM) *1 [MONITOR/PAUSE] Sets or changes value [CLEAR] (Corrects value)
[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)
*1 Press [MONITOR/PAUSE] to enter "-", when entering telephone number. *2 The data are stored in SYS-RAM in procedure 11 and stored in NIC-RAM in procedure 12. Procedure 14 [CANCEL] [0][8] [POWER]
[Digital key] (Code)
[START]
[Digital key] (Sub-code)
[START]
[CLEAR] (Corrects value)
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
[ENTER] or [INTERRUPT]
[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)
Adjustment value cannot be changed
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 114
Notes: 1. The digit after the hyphen in “Code” of the following table is a sub code. 2. In “RAM”, the NVRAM of the board in which the data of each code is stored is indicated. “M” stands for the LGC board, “SYS”, “NIC” and “UTY” stands for the SYS board. Setting mode (08) Default Func- ALL <13 digits>
Code
Classification
200
General
Date and time setting
201
General
Destination selection
ALL
202
User interface
Counter installed externally
ALL
203
General
Line adjustment mode
204
User interface
Auto-clear timer setting
205
User interface
Items
Auto power save mode timer setting
RAM
Contents
-
Year/month/date/day/ hour/minute/second Example: 03 07 0 13 13 27 48 “Day” - “0” is for “Sunday”. Proceeds Monday through Saturday from “1” to “6”. 0: EUR 1: UC 2: JPN 3: Other 0: No external counter 1: Coin controller 2: Copy key card (This value is valid only when “2” is set to 08-201.) 3: Key copy counter 4: Key card for OEM1 0: For factory shipment 1: For line * Field: “0” must be selected Timer to return the equipment to the default settings when the [START] button is not pressed after the function and the mode are set 0: Not cleared 1 to 10: Set number x 15 sec. Timer to automatically switch to the energy saving mode when the equipment has not been used 0: Invalid 6: 3min. 7: 4min. 8: 5min. 9: 7min. 10: 10min. 11: 15min. 12: 20min. 13: 30min. 14: 45min. 15: 60min.
EUR: 0 UC: 1 JPN: 2 <0-3> 0 <0-4>
M
ALL
0 <0-1>
M
ALL
3 <0-10>
SYS
ALL
6 <0, 6-15>
SYS
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
M
Procedur e 5
1
1
1
1
1
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 115
2
206
User interface
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Auto Shut Off Mode timer ALL 0 setting (Sleep Mode) <0-20>
207
User interface
Highlighting display on LCD
209
User interface
210
Code
Classification
RAM
Contents
SYS
Timer to enter the Sleep Mode automatically when the equipment has not been used 0: 3min. 1: 5min. 2: 10min. 3: 15min. 4: 20min. 5: 25min. 6: 30min. 7: 40min. 8: 50min. 9: 60min. 10: 70min. 11: 80min. 12: 90min. 13: 100min. 14: 110min. 15: 120min. 16: 150min. 17:180min. 18: 210min. 19:240min. 20: Not used 0: Black letter on white background 1: White letter on black background 0: TIFF (Multi) 1: PDF (Multi) 2: Not used 3: TIFF (Single) 4: PDF (Single) 5: XPS (Multi) 6: XPS (Single)
ALL
0 <0-1>
SYS
Default setting of filing format when E-mailing (black mode)
ALL (color)
1 <0-6>
SYS
Paper feeding
Paper size (A6-R) feeding/widthwise direction
PRT
M
218
User interface
Default setting of filing format when storing files (at color/ACS modes)
SCN (color)
148/105 <148432/105297> 1 <0-8>
219
User interface
Default setting of filing format when storing files (at black mode)
ALL (black)
0 <0-6>
SYS
220
User interface
Language displayed at power-ON
ALL
EUR: 0 UC: 0 JPN: 5 <0-6>
SYS
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
SYS
Procedur e 1
1
1
10
0: TIFF (Multi) 1: PDF (Multi) 2: JPG 3: TIFF (Single) 4: PDF (Single) 5: SLIM PDF (Multi) 6: SLIM PDF (Single) 7: XPS (Multi) 8: XPS (Single) 0: TIFF (Multi) 1: PDF (Multi) 2: JPG 3: TIFF (Single) 4: PDF (Single) 5: XPS (Multi) 6: XPS (Single) 0: Language 1 1: Language 2 2: Language 3 3: Language 4 4: Language 5 5: Language 6 6: Language 7
1
1
1
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 116 07/06
Code 221
Classification User interface
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Language selection in UI ALL EUR: 0 data at Web power ON UC: 0 JPN: 5 <0-6>
RAM
Contents
SYS
0: Language 1 1: Language 2 2: Language 3 3: Language 4 4: Language 5 5: Language 6 6: Language 7 Selects the reference to notify the PM timing. (The message is displayed on the LCD screen.) 0: PM counter (The number of output pages is set at 08251.) 1: PM time counter (The timing is set at 08-375.) Press the button on the LCD to select the size.
223
Maintenance
Switching of output pages/ driving counts at PM
ALL
0 <0-1>
M
224
Paper feeding
Paper size for bypass feed
PPC
SYS
225
Paper feeding
Paper size for 1st drawer
ALL
226
Paper feeding
Paper size for 2nd drawer
ALL
227
Paper feeding
Paper size for PFP upper drawer
ALL
228
Paper feeding
Paper size for PFP lower drawer
ALL
229
Paper feeding
Paper size (A3-R) feeding/widthwise direction
ALL
230
Paper feeding
Paper size (A4-R) feeding/widthwise direction
ALL
231
Paper feeding
Paper size (A5-R) feeding/widthwise direction
ALL
232
Paper feeding
Paper size (B4-R) feeding/widthwise direction
ALL
233
Paper feeding
Paper size (B5-R) feeding/widthwise direction
ALL
UNDEF (255) <0-255> EUR: A4 UC: LT JPN: A4 EUR: A3 UC: LD JPN: A3 EUR: A4-R UC: LT-R JPN: A4-R EUR: A4 UC: LG JPN: B4 420/297 <182432/140297> 297/210 <182432/140297> 210/148 <182432/140297> 364/257 <182432/140297> 257/182 <182432/140297>
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Procedur e 1
2 1
9
M
Press the button on the LCD to select the size.
9
M
Press the button on the LCD to select the size.
9
M
Press the button on the LCD to select the size.
9
M
Press the button on the LCD to select the size.
9
M
10
M
10
M
10
M
10
M
10
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 117 07/06
Code
Classification
234
Paper feeding
235
Paper feeding
236
Paper feeding
237
Paper feeding
238
Paper feeding
239
Paper feeding
240
Paper feeding
241
Paper feeding
242
Paper feeding
243
Paper feeding
244
Paper feeding
245
Paper feeding
246
Paper feeding
247
Paper feeding
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Paper size (LT-R) ALL 279/216 feeding/widthwise direction <182432/140297> Paper size (LD) ALL 432/279 feeding/widthwise direction <182432/140297> Paper size (LG) ALL 356/216 feeding/widthwise direction <182432/140297> Paper size (ST-R) ALL 216/140 feeding/widthwise direction <182432/140297> Paper size (COMPUTER) ALL 356/257 feeding/widthwise direction <182432/140297> Paper size (FOLIO) ALL 330/210 feeding/widthwise direction <182432/140297> Paper size (13”LG) ALL 330/216 feeding/widthwise direction <182432/140297> Paper size (8.5”X8.5”) ALL 216/216 feeding/widthwise direction <182432/140297> Paper size (Non-standard) ALL 432/279 feeding/widthwise direction <148432/105297> Memory 1 ALL 148/100 Paper size (bypass feed<148ing/non-standard type) 432/100feeding/widthwise direction 297> Paper size (8K) ALL 390/270 feeding/widthwise direction <182432/140297> Paper size (16K-R) ALL 270/195 feeding/widthwise direction <182432/140297> Paper size (A3-wide) ALL 457/305 feeding/widthwise direction <182457/140305> Memory 2 ALL 148/100 Paper size (bypass feed<148ing/non-standard type) 432/100feeding/widthwise direction 297>
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
RAM
Contents
Procedur e
M
10
M
10
M
10
M
10
M
10
M
10
M
10
M
10
SYS
10
SYS
Registers the paper size of bypass feed (non-standard type) into [MEMORY 1].
10
M
10
M
10
M
10
SYS
Registers the paper size of bypass feed (non-standard type) into [MEMORY 2].
10
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 118
Code
Classification
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Memory 3 ALL 148/100 <148Paper size (bypass feeding/non-standard type) 432/100feeding/widthwise direction 297> Memory 4 ALL 148/100 Paper size (bypass feed<148ing/non-standard type) 432/100feeding/widthwise direction 297> Service technician teleALL 0 phone number <32 digits>
RAM
Contents
SYS
Registers the paper size of bypass feed (non-standard type) into [MEMORY 3]. Registers the paper size of bypass feed (non-standard type) into [MEMORY 4]. A telephone number can be entered up to 32 digits. Use the [MONITOR/PAUSE] button to enter a hyphen(-). e-STUDIO2500c UC, EUR: 50,000 JPN: 0 e-STUDIO3500c UC, EUR: 70,000 JPN: 0 e-STUDIO3510c UC, EUR: 70,000 JPN: 0 Counts up when the registration sensor is ON. Displays the latest 20 errors data Sets whether the data is printed on the different but similar size paper or not when the paper of corresponding size is not available. 0: Valid (The data is printed on A4/A3 when LT/LD is selected or vice versa.) 1: Invalid (The message to use the selected paper size is displayed.) 0: Automatic 1: PFP single-drawer type installed 2: PFP dual-drawer type installed 3: LCF installed 4: Not installed Press the icon on the LCD to select the size.
248
Paper feeding
249
Paper feeding
250
Maintenance
251
Maintenance
Setting value of PM counter
ALL
Refer to content <8 digits>
M
252
Maintenance
Current value of PM counter Display/0 clearing
ALL
0 <8 digits>
M
253
Maintenance Paper feeding
Error history display
ALL
-
SYS
LT↔A4/LD↔A3
PRT
0 <0-1>
SYS
254
SYS
SYS
255
Paper feeding
PFP/LCF installation
ALL
0 <0-4>
M
256
Paper feeding
Paper size setting /LCF
ALL
EUR: A4 UC: LT JPN: A4
M
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Procedur e 10
10
11
1
1 2 1
1
9
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 119 07/02
2
Setting mode (08) Default Func- ALL <1-2>
Code
Classification
257
Counter
Counter copy
259
Network
Storage period at trail and private
PRT
14 <0-35>
SYS
260
Network
Web data retention period
ALL
10 <3 digits>
SYS
263
User interface
Administrator's password (Maximum 10 digits)
ALL
123456 <10 digits>
-
264
Network
File retention period
ALL
SYS
265
Network
ALL
266
Network
267
Electronic filing
Maximum data capacity at E-mailing Maximum data capacity at Internet FAX e-Filing document guarantee mode
30 <0-999> 30 <2-30> 30 <2-30> 1 <0-1>
Items
ALL ALL
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
Procedur e
RAM
Contents
-
SYS
1: Electrical counter -> Backup counter (LGC board -> SYS board) 2: Backup counter -> Electrical counter (SYS board -> LGC board) (P. 2-276) 0: No limits 1 to 30: 1 to 30 days 31: 1 hour 32: 2 hours 33: 4 hours 34: 8 hours 35: 12 hours When a certain period of time has passed without operation after accessing TopAccess, the data being registered is automatically reset. This period is set at this code. (Unit: Minute) The password can be entered in alphabets and figures (A-Z, a-z and 0-9) within 10 digits. 0: No limits 1 to 999: 1 to 999 days 2 to 30 M bytes
SYS
2 to 30 M bytes
1
SYS
Sets the file retention level during edition in eFiling (when the document cut/save command is used) 0: Not retained (Documents could be lost due to We session timeout / electricity cutoff during document cut/save.) 1: Full retained - Documents are retained until cut/save command completion. * When "1" is set, documents are not lost even if disk full occurs during command execution.
1
6
1
1
11
1 1
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 120 06/10
Code 268
Classification User interface
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Binarizing level selection ALL 3 <1-5> (When judging as black in the ACS Mode)
RAM SYS
270
Electronic filing
Default setting of user box retention period
ALL
0 <0-999>
SYS
271
General
Warning notification of the File Share and e-Filling partitions are filled
ALL
90 <0-100>
SYS
272
Scanning Notification setting of Email saving time limit
ALL
3 <0-99>
SYS
273
Scanning Default setting of partial size when transmitting Email
ALL
0 <0-6>
SYS
ALL
0 <0-4>
SYS
274
FAX
Default setting of page by page when transmitting Internet FAX
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Contents 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: *
Step -2 Step -1 Step 0 (center) Step 1 Step 2 The binarizing level of each step is set at 08-609. Sets the data retention period when creating a user box. 0: Not deleted 1 to 999: Retention period (Unit: Day) Sets the percentage of HDD partition filled when warning notification is sent. 0 to 100: 0 to 100% * Related code 08-288 Sets the days left the notification of E-mail saving time limit appears 0 to 99: 0 to 99 days Sets the default value for the partial size of Email to be transmitted when creating a template. 0: Not divided 1: 64 2: 128 3: 256 4: 512 5: 1024 6: 2048 (Unit: KB) Sets the default value for the page by page of Internet FAX to be transmitted when creating a template. 0: Not divided 1: 256 2: 512 3: 1024 4: 2048 (Unit: KB)
Procedur e 1
2
1
1
1
1
1
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 121 07/06
Code
Classification
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Default setting of density SCN 0 adjustment (Black) (black) <0-11>
RAM
Contents
SYS
0: Automatic density 1: Step -5 2: Step -4 3: Step -3 4: Step -2 5: Step -1 6: Step 0 (center) 7: Step +1 8: Step +2 9: Step +3 10: Step +4 11: Step +5 (1 to 11: Manual density) 1: Step -2 2: Step -1 3: Step 0 (center) 4: Step +1 5: Step +2 0: Black 1: Gray Scale 2: Unused 3: Full Color 4: Auto Color 0: 100 dpi 1: 150 dpi 2: 200 dpi 3: 300dpi 4: 400 dpi 5: 600dpi 0: 100 dpi 1: 150 dpi 2: 200 dpi 3: 300dpi 4: 400 dpi 5: 600 dpi 0: 150 dpi 1: 200 dpi 2: 300 dpi 3: 400dpi 4: 600 dpi 0: Text 1: Photo 2: Print 3: Custom (Valid only when other than “0” is set in 08-590) 0: Text 1: Text/Photo 2: Photo 3: Custom (Valid only when other than “0” is set in 08-580) 0: Single 1: Book 2: Tablet
276
User interface
277
User interface
Default setting of background adjustment (Full Color)
SCN (color)
5 <1-9>
SYS
278
User interface
Default setting of color mode
SCN
0 <0-4>
SYS
279
User interface
Default setting of resolution (Full Color)
SCN (color)
2 <0-3>
SYS
280
User interface
Default setting of resolution (Gray Scale)
SCN (black)
2 <0-4>
SYS
281
User interface
Default setting of resolution (Black)
SCN (black)
1 <0-4>
SYS
282
User interface
Default setting of original mode (Full Color)
SCN (color)
0 <0-3>
SYS
283
User interface
Default setting of original mode (Black)
SCN (black)
0 <0-3>
SYS
284
User interface
Default setting of scanning mode
SCN
0 <0-2>
SYS
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
Procedur e 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 122
285
User interface
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Default setting of rotation SCN 0 mode <0-3>
286
User interface
Default setting of original paper size
ALL
0 <0-22>
SYS
288
General
Searching interval of deleting expired files and checking capacity of HDD partitions
ALL
12 <1-24>
SYS
289
User interface
Default setting of background adjustment (Gray Scale)
ALL
5 <1-9>
SYS
290
Network
Raw printing job (Duplex)
PRT
SYS
291
Network
Raw printing job (Paper size)
PRT
1 <0-1> EUR: 6 UC: 2 JPN: 6 <0 -13>
292
Network
Raw printing job (Paper type)
PRT
0 <0-5>
SYS
293
Network
PRT
Network
295
Network
Raw printing job (Exit tray)
PRT
0 <0-1> 1 <0-1> 0 <0-6>
SYS
294
Raw printing job (Paper direction) Raw printing job (Staple)
Code
Classification
PRT
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
RAM
Contents
SYS
0: 0 degree 1: 90 degrees 2: 180 degrees 3: 270 degrees 0: Automatic 1: A3 2: A4 3: LD 4: LT 5: A4-R 6: A5-R 7: LT-R 8: LG 9: B4 10: B5 11: ST-R 12: COMP 13: B5-R 14: FOLIO 15: 13"LG 16: 8.5"x 8.5" 18: A6-R 19: Size mixed 20: 8K 21: 16K 22: 16K-R Sets the search interval of deleting expired files and checking capacity of HDD partitions. (Unit: Hour) * Related code 08-271 1: Step -2 2: Step -1 3: Step 0 (center) 4: Step +1 5: Step +2 0: Valid 1: Invalid 0: LD 1: LG 2: LT 3: COMP 4: ST 5: A3 6: A4 7: A5 8: A6 9: B4 10: B5 11: FOLIO 12: 13 "LG 13: 8.5" x 8.5" 0: Plain paper 1: Thick paper 1 2: Thick paper 2 3: Thick paper 3 4: OHP film 5: Thick paper 4 0: Portrait 1: Landscape 0: Valid 1: Invalid 0:Inner Tray 1:Finisher Tray1 2:Finisher Tray2 3:Unused 4:Job Separator Upper 5:Job Separator Lower 6:Exit Tray
SYS
SYS SYS
Procedur e 1
1
1
1
1 1
1
1 1 1
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 123 07/06
2
Setting mode (08) Default Func- PRT 1200 <50012800>
Procedur e
Code
Classification
296
Network
Raw printing job (Number of form lines)
297
Network
Raw printing job (PCL font pitch)
PRT
1000 <449999>
SYS
298
Network
Raw printing job (PCL font size)
PRT
1200 <40099975>
SYS
299
Network
PRT
User interface Counter
0 <0-79> 0 <0-2> 0 <8 digits>
SYS
300
Raw printing job (PCL font number) Maximum number of copy volume (MAX9) A3 Number of output pages A4 at Full Color A5 Mode in Copier Func- A6 B4 tion B5 FOLIO LD LG LT ST COMP 13”LG 8.5” x 8.5” 16K 8K Others Original counter display
SYS
Counts the output pages at the Full Color Mode in the Copier Function for each paper size according to the setting for the count setting of large sized paper (08-352) and the definition setting of large-sized paper (08353).
4
EUR: 2 UC: 0 JPN: 0 <0, 2, 4>
SYS
Sets whether the original counter is displayed or not. 0: Not displayed 2: Displayed 4: Displayed (Double sized original is counted as 2.)
1
301-0 301-1 301-2 301-3 301-4 301-5 301-6 301-7 301-8 301-9 301-10 301-11 301-12 301-13 301-14 301-15 301-17 302
User interface
Items
PPC PPC (color)
PPC
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
RAM
Contents
SYS
Sets the number of form lines from 5 to 128. (A hundredfold of the number of form lines is defined as the setting value.) Sets the font pitch from 0.44 to 99.99. (A hundredfold of the font pitch is defined as the setting value.) Sets the font size from 4 to 999.75. (A hundredfold of the font size is defined as the setting value.) Sets the PCL font number. 0: 999 1: 99 2: 9
SYS
1
1
1
1 1
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 124 07/06
Code 303-0 303-1 303-2 303-3 303-4 303-5 303-6 303-7 303-8 303-9 303-10 303-11 303-12 303-13 303-14 303-15 303-16 303-17 304-0 304-1 304-2 304-3 304-4 304-5 304-6 304-7 304-8 304-9 304-10 304-11 304-12 304-13 304-14 304-15 304-17
Classification Counter
Counter
Items Number of output pages at Full Color Mode in Printer Function
Number of output pages at Twin Color / Monocolor Mode in Copier Function
Setting mode (08) Default Func- PRT 0 (color) <8 digits>
A3 A4 A5 A6 B4 B5 FOLIO LD LG LT ST COMP 13”LG 8.5” x 8.5” 16K 8K Extra long size paper Others A3 A4 A5 A6 B4 B5 FOLIO LD LG LT ST COMP 13”LG 8.5” x 8.5” 16K 8K Others
PPC (color)
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
0 <8 digits>
Procedur e
RAM
Contents
SYS
Counts the output pages at the Full Color Mode in the Printer Function for each paper size according to the setting for the count setting of large sized paper (08-352) and the definition setting of large-sized paper (08353).
4
Counts the output pages at the Twin Color Mode in the Copier Function for each paper size according to the setting for the count setting of large sized paper (08-352) and the definition setting of large-sized paper (08353).
4
SYS
2
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 125
Code 305-0 305-1 305-2 305-3 305-4 305-5 305-6 305-7 305-8 305-9 305-10 305-11 305-12 305-13 305-14 305-15 305-17 306-0 306-1 306-2 306-3 306-4 306-5 306-6 306-7 306-8 306-9 306-10 306-11 306-12 306-13 306-14 306-15 306-16
Classification
Items
Counter
Number of output pages at Black Mode in Copier Function
Counter
Number of output pages at Black Mode in Printer Function
306-17
Setting mode (08) Default Func- PPC 0 (black) <8 digits>
A3 A4 A5 A6 B4 B5 FOLIO LD LG LT ST COMP 13”LG 8.5” x 8.5” 16K 8K Others A3 A4 A5 A6 B4 B5 FOLIO LD LG LT ST COMP 13”LG 8.5” x 8.5” 16K 8K Extra long size paper Others
PRT 0 (black) <8 digits>
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
Procedur e
RAM
Contents
SYS
Counts the output pages at the Black Mode in the Copier Function for each paper size according to the setting for the count setting of large-sized paper (08-352) and the definition setting of large-sized paper (08353).
4
SYS
Counts the output pages at the Black Mode in the Printer Function for each paper size according to the setting for the count setting of large-sized paper (08-352) and the definition setting of large-sized paper (08353).
4
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 126 07/06
Code 307-0 307-1 307-2 307-3 307-4 307-5 307-6 307-7 307-8 307-9 307-10 307-11 307-12 307-13 307-14 307-15 307-17 308-0 308-1 308-2 308-3 308-4 308-5 308-6 308-7 308-8 308-9 308-10 308-11 308-12 308-13 308-14 308-15 308-17
Classification Counter
Counter
Items Number of output pages at List Print Mode
Number of output pages in FAX Function
Setting mode (08) Default Func- PRT 0 (black) <8 digits>
A3 A4 A5 A6 B4 B5 FOLIO LD LG LT ST COMP 13”LG 8.5” x 8.5” 16K 8K Others A3 A4 A5 A6 B4 B5 FOLIO LD LG LT ST COMP 13”LG 8.5” x 8.5” 16K 8K Others
FAX
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
0 <8 digits>
Procedur e
RAM
Contents
SYS
Counts the output pages at the List Print Mode for each paper size according to the setting for the count setting of large-sized paper (08-352) and the definition setting of large sized paper (08353).
4
Counts the output pages in the FAX Function for each paper size according to the setting for the count setting of large-sized paper (08352) and the definition setting of large-sized paper (08-353).
4
SYS
2
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 127 07/06
Code 309-0 309-1 309-2 309-3 309-4 309-5 309-6 309-7 309-8 309-9 309-10 309-11 309-12 309-13 309-14 309-15 309-17 310-0 310-1 310-2 310-3 310-4 310-5 310-6 310-7 310-8 310-9 310-10 310-11 310-12 310-13 310-14 310-15 310-17
Classification
Items
Counter
Number of scanning pages at Full Color Mode in Copier Function
Counter
Number of scanning pages at Full Color Mode in Scanning Function
Setting mode (08) Default Func- PPC 0 (color) <8 digits>
A3 A4 A5 A6 B4 B5 FOLIO LD LG LT ST COMP 13”LG 8.5” x 8.5” 16K 8K Others A3 A4 A5 A6 B4 B5 FOLIO LD LG LT ST COMP 13”LG 8.5” x 8.5” 16K 8K Others
SCN (color)
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
0 <8 digits>
Procedur e
RAM
Contents
SYS
Counts the scanning pages at the Full Color Mode in the Copier Function for each paper size according to the setting for the count setting of large-sized paper (08-352) and the definition setting of large-sized paper (08353).
4
SYS
Counts the scanning pages at the Full Color Mode in the Scanning Function for each paper size according to the setting for the count setting of large-sized paper (08-352) and the definition setting of large-sized paper (08353).
4
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 128 06/10
Code 311-0 311-1 311-2 311-3 311-4 311-5 311-6 311-7 311-8 311-9 311-10 311-11 311-12 311-13 311-14 311-15 311-17 312-0 312-1 312-2 312-3 312-4 312-5 312-6 312-7 312-8 312-9 312-10 312-11 312-12 312-13 312-14 312-15 312-17
Classification Counter
Counter
Items Number of scanning pages at Twin Color / Monocolor Mode in Copier Function
Number of scanning pages at Black Mode in Copier Function
Setting mode (08) Default Func- PPC 0 (color) <8 digits>
A3 A4 A5 A6 B4 B5 FOLIO LD LG LT ST COMP 13”LG 8.5” x 8.5” 16K 8K Others A3 A4 A5 A6 B4 B5 FOLIO LD LG LT ST COMP 13”LG 8.5” x 8.5” 16K 8K Others
PPC 0 (black) <8 digits>
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Procedur e
RAM
Contents
SYS
Counts the scanning pages at the Twin Color Mode in the Copier Function for each paper size according to the setting for the count setting of large-sized paper (08-352) and the definition setting of large-sized paper (08353).
4
Counts the scanning pages at the Black Mode in the Copier Function for each paper size according to the setting for the count setting of large sized paper (08-352) and the definition setting of large-sized paper (08353).
4
SYS
2
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 129
Code 313-0 313-1 313-2 313-3 313-4 313-5 313-6 313-7 313-8 313-9 313-10 313-11 313-12 313-13 313-14 313-15 313-17 314-0 314-1 314-2 314-3 314-4 314-5 314-6 314-7 314-8 314-9 314-10 314-11 314-12 314-13 314-14 314-15 314-17
Classification
Items
Counter
Number of scanning pages in Scanning Function
Counter
Number of scanning pages in FAX Function
Setting mode (08) Default Func- SCN 0 (black) <8 digits>
A3 A4 A5 A6 B4 B5 FOLIO LD LG LT ST COMP 13”LG 8.5” x 8.5” 16K 8K Others A3 A4 A5 A6 B4 B5 FOLIO LD LG LT ST COMP 13”LG 8.5” x 8.5” 16K 8K Others
FAX
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
0 <8 digits>
Procedur e
RAM
Contents
SYS
Counts the scanning pages at the Black Mode in the Scanning Function for each paper size according to the setting for the count setting of large sized paper (08-352) and the definition setting of large-sized paper (08353).
4
SYS
Counts the scanning pages in the FAX Function for each paper size according to the setting for the count setting of large-sized paper (08352) and the definition setting of large sized paper (08-353).
4
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 130
Code 315-0 315-1 315-2 315-3 315-4 315-5 315-6 315-7 315-8 315-9 315-10 315-11 315-12 315-13 315-14 315-15 315-17 316-0 316-1 316-2 316-3 316-4 316-5 316-6 316-7 316-8 316-9 316-10 316-11 316-12 316-13 316-14 316-15 316-17
Classification Counter
Counter
Items Number of transmitted pages in FAX Function
Number of received pages in FAX Function
Setting mode (08) Default Func- FAX 0 <8 digits>
A3 A4 A5 A6 B4 B5 FOLIO LD LG LT ST COMP 13”LG 8.5” x 8.5” 16K 8K Others A3 A4 A5 A6 B4 B5 FOLIO LD LG LT ST COMP 13”LG 8.5” x 8.5” 16K 8K Others
FAX
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
0 <8 digits>
Procedur e
RAM
Contents
SYS
Counts the transmitted pages in the FAX Function for each paper size according to the setting for the count setting of large-sized paper (08352) and the definition setting of large sized paper (08-353).
4
Counts the received pages in the FAX Function for each paper size according to the setting for the count setting of large-sized paper (08352) and the definition setting of large sized paper (08-353).
4
SYS
2
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 131 06/10
Code
Classification
317-0
Counter
317-1
Counter
317-2
Counter
318-0
Counter
318-1
Counter
318-2
Counter
319-0
Counter
319-1
Counter
319-2
Counter
Items Display of number of output pages at Full Color Mode in Copier Function
Display of number of output pages at Full Color Mode in Printer Function
Display of number of output pages at Twin Color / Monocolor Mode in Copier Function
Large Small Total
Large Small Total
Large Small Total
Setting mode (08) Default Func- PPC 0 (color) <8 digits> PPC 0 (color) <8 digits> PPC 0 (color) <8 digits>
PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color)
0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits>
PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color)
0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits>
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
RAM
Contents
SYS
Counts the number of output pages at the Full Color Mode in the Copier Function according to its size (large/small). Large: Number of output pages of large-sized paper defined at 08353 Small: Number of output pages other than set as large-sized paper Total: Total number output pages of all paper sizes. Counts the number of output pages at the Full Color Mode in the Printer Function according to its size (large/small). Large: Number of output pages of large-sized paper defined at 08353 Small: Number of output pages other than set as large-sized paper Total: Total number output pages of all paper sizes. Counts the number of output pages at the Twin Color Mode in the Copier Function according to its size (large/small). Large: Number of output pages of large-sized paper defined at 08353 Small: Number of output pages other than set as large-sized paper Total: Total number output pages of all paper sizes.
SYS SYS
SYS SYS SYS
SYS SYS SYS
Procedur e 14 14 14
14 14 14
14 14 14
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 132
Code
Classification
320-0
Counter
320-1
Counter
320-2
Counter
321-0
Counter
321-1
Counter
321-2
Counter
322-0
Counter
322-1
Counter
322-2
Counter
Items Display of number of output pages at Black Mode in Copier Function
Display of number of output pages at Black Mode in Printer Function
Display of number of output pages at List Print Mode
Large Small Total
Setting mode (08) Default Func- PPC 0 (black) <8 digits> PPC 0 (black) <8 digits> PPC 0 (black) <8 digits>
Large Small Total
Large Small Total
PRT 0 (black) <8 digits> PRT 0 (black) <8 digits> PRT 0 (black) <8 digits>
PRT 0 (black) <8 digits> PRT 0 (black) <8 digits> PRT 0 (black) <8 digits>
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
RAM
Contents
SYS
Counts the number of output pages at the Black Mode in the Copier Function according to its size (large/small). Large: Number of output pages of large-sized paper defined at 08353 Small: Number of output pages other than set as large-sized paper Total: Total number output pages of all paper sizes. Counts the number of output pages at the Black Mode in the Printer Function according to its size (large/small). Large: Number of output pages of large-sized paper defined at 08353 Small: Number of output pages other than set as large-sized paper Total: Total number output pages of all paper sizes. Counts the number of output pages at the List Print Mode Function according to its size (large/small). Large: Number of output pages of large-sized paper defined at 08353 Small: Number of output pages other than set as large-sized paper Total: Total number output pages of all paper sizes.
SYS SYS
SYS SYS SYS
SYS SYS SYS
Procedur e 14 14 14
14 14 14
14 14 14
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 133
2
Code
Classification
323-0
Counter
323-1
Counter
323-2
Counter
324-0
Counter
324-1
Counter
324-2
Counter
325-0
Counter
325-1
Counter
325-2
Counter
Items Display of number of output pages in FAX Function
Display of number of scanning pages at Full Color Mode in Copier Function
Display of number of scanning pages at Full Color Mode in Scanning Function
Large Small Total
Large Small Total
Large Small Total
Setting mode (08) Default Func- FAX 0 <8 digits> FAX 0 <8 digits> FAX 0 <8 digits>
PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color)
0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits>
SCN (color) SCN (color) SCN (color)
0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits>
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
RAM
Contents
SYS
Counts the number of output pages in the FAX Function according to its size (large/small). Large: Number of output pages of large-sized paper defined at 08353 Small: Number of output pages other than set as large-sized paper Total: Total number output pages of all paper sizes. Counts the number of scanning pages at the Full Color Mode in the Copier Function according to its size (large/small). Large: Number of output pages of large-sized paper defined at 08353 Small: Number of output pages other than set as large-sized paper Total: Total number output pages of all paper sizes. Counts the number of scanning pages at the Full Color Mode in the Scanning Function according to its size (large/small). Large: Number of output pages of large-sized paper defined at 08353 Small: Number of output pages other than set as large-sized paper Total: Total number output pages of all paper sizes.
SYS SYS
SYS SYS SYS
SYS SYS SYS
Procedur e 14 14 14
14 14 14
14 14 14
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 134 06/10
Code
Classification
326-0
Counter
326-1
Counter
326-2
Counter
327-0
Counter
327-1
Counter
327-2
Counter
328-0
Counter
328-1
Counter
328-2
Counter
Items Display of number of scanning pages at Twin Color / Monocolor Mode in Copier Function
Display of number of scanning pages at Black Mode in Copier Function
Display of number of scanning pages in FAX Function
Large Small Total
Setting mode (08) Default Func- PPC 0 (color) <8 digits> PPC 0 (color) <8 digits> PPC 0 (color) <8 digits>
Large Small Total
PPC 0 (black) <8 digits> PPC 0 (black) <8 digits> PPC 0 (black) <8 digits>
Large
FAX
Small
FAX
Total
FAX
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits>
RAM
Contents
SYS
Counts the number of scanning pages at the Twin Color Mode in the Copier Function according to its size (large/small). Large: Number of output pages of large-sized paper defined at 08353 Small: Number of output pages other than set as large-sized paper Total: Total number output pages of all paper sizes. Counts the number of scanning pages at the Black Mode in the Copier Function according to its size (large/small). Large: Number of output pages of large-sized paper defined at 08353 Small: Number of output pages other than set as large-sized paper Total: Total number output pages of all paper sizes. Counts the number of scanning pages in the FAX Function according to its size (large/small). Large: Number of output pages of large-sized paper defined at 08353 Small: Number of output pages other than set as large-sized paper Total: Total number output pages of all paper sizes.
SYS SYS
SYS SYS SYS
SYS SYS SYS
Procedur e 14 14 14
14 14 14
14 14 14
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 135 06/10
2
Code
Classification
329-0
Counter
329-1
Counter
329-2
Counter
330-0
Counter
330-1
Counter
330-2
Counter
331
User interface
Items Display of number of scanning pages in Scanning Function
Display of number of transmitted pages in FAX Function
Large Small Total
Setting mode (08) Default Func- SCN 0 (black) <8 digits> SCN 0 (black) <8 digits> SCN 0 (black) <8 digits>
Large
FAX
Small
FAX
Total
FAX
Default setting of screen
ALL
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits>
0 <0-5>
RAM
Contents
SYS
Counts the number of scanning pages in the Scanning Function according to its size (large/small). Large: Number of output pages of large-sized paper defined at 08353 Small: Number of output pages other than set as large-sized paper Total: Total number output pages of all paper sizes. Counts the number of transmitted pages in the FAX Function according to its size (large/small). Large: Number of output pages of large-sized paper defined at 08353 Small: Number of output pages other than set as large-sized paper Total: Total number output pages of all paper sizes. Sets the screen to be displayed after the auto-clear time has passed or it has recovered from the energy saving mode or sleep mode. 0: Copier 1: Fax 2: Scan 3: Box 4: Job Status 5: Template
SYS SYS
SYS SYS SYS
SYS
Procedur e 14 14 14
14 14 14
1
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 136 06/10
Code
Classification
332-0
Counter
332-1
Counter
332-2
Counter
333-0
Counter
333-1
Counter
333-2
Counter
334-0
Counter
334-1
Counter
334-2
Counter
335-0
Counter
335-1
Counter
335-2
Counter
342
User interface
Displaying number of original pages placed on original glass
343
User interface
344
Counter
346
Counter
347
Counter
Items Display of number of received pages in FAX Function
Large Small Total
Setting mode (08) Default Func- FAX 0 <8 digits> FAX 0 <8 digits> FAX 0 <8 digits>
SYS
Counts the number of received pages in the FAX Function according to its size (large/small). Large: Number of output pages of large-sized paper defined at 08353 Small: Number of output pages other than set as large-sized paper Total: Total number output pages of all paper sizes. Displays the total number of pages at Full Color Mode in the Copier/Printer/Scanning Functions.
14
Displays the total number of pages at Twin Color Mode in the Copier Function.
14
SYS SYS
0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <0-1>
Black-free function
ALL
0 <0-1>
SYS
Count setting of tab paper (PM) Count setting of largesized paper (PM) Definition setting of large sized paper (PM)
ALL
1 <0-1> 1 <0-1> 1 <0-1>
M
Display of total number of pages at Twin Color / Monocolor Mode Display of total number of pages at Black Mode
Large
Contents
ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (black) ALL (black) ALL (black) PPC
Display of total number of pages at Full Color Mode
Small Total Large Small Total Large Small Total
ALL ALL
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Procedur e
RAM
SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS
M M
14 14
14 14 14
14 14
Displays the total number of pages at Black Mode in the Copier/ Printer/Scanning/FAX Functions.
14
This setting is whether the number of pages of originals placed on the original glass is displayed or not. 0: Not displayed 1: Displayed 0: Disabled 1: Enabled When "1" (enabled) is set at this code, "1" (black) is automatically set at the code 08-588. 0: Counted as 1 1: Counted as 2 0: Counted as 1 1: Counted as 2 0: A3/LD 1: A3/LD/B4/LG/ FOLIO/COMP
1
14 14
1
1 1 1
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 137
2
Code
Classification
348
Counter
349
Counter
352
Counter
353
Counter
356
Counter
357
Counter
358
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Count setting of thick paper ALL 1 (PM) <0-1> Count setting of OHP film ALL 1 (PM) <0-1> ALL JPN: 0 Count setting of largeOTHER: sized paper (Fee charging 1 system counter) <0-2>
M M M
ALL
0 <0-1>
M
ALL
0 <8 digits>
M
Counter for 2nd drawer feeding
ALL
0 <8 digits>
M
Counter
Counter for bypass feeding
ALL
0 <8 digits>
M
359
Counter
Counter for LCF feeding
ALL
M
360
Counter
Counter for PFP upper drawer feeding
ALL
0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits>
370
Counter
Counter for PFP lower drawer feeding
ALL
0 <8 digits>
M
372
Counter
Counter for ADU
ALL
0 <8 digits>
M
374
Counter
Counter for RADF
ALL
SYS
375
Maintenance
Setting value of PM time counter display/0 clearing
ALL
0 <8 digits> Refer to content <8 digits>
376
Maintenance Counter
Current value of PM time counter Setting for counter installed externally
ALL
0 <8 digits> 1 <0-7>
M
381
Definition setting of large sized paper (Fee charging system counter) Counter for 1st drawer feeding
RAM
ALL
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
M
M
M
Contents 0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1: 2:
Counted as 1 Counted as 2 Counted as 1 Counted as 2 Counted as 1 Counted as 2 Counted as 1 (Mechanical counter is double counter) 0: A3/LD 1: A3/LD/B4/LG/ FOLIO/COMP/8k Counts the number of sheets fed from 1st drawer Counts the number of sheets fed from 2nd drawer Counts the number of sheets fed from bypass feed Counts the number of sheets fed from LCF Counts the number of sheets fed from PFP upper drawer Counts the number of sheets fed from PFP lower drawer Counts the number of output pages of duplex printing. Counts the number of originals fed from RADF e-STUDIO2500c JPN:0 UC, EUR: 140,000 e-STUDIO3500c JPN:0 UC, EUR: 140,000 e-STUDIO3510c JPN:0 UC, EUR: 140,000 Counts the drum driving time. Selects the job to count up for the external counter. 0: Not selected 1: Copier 2: FAX 3: Copier/FAX 4: Printer 5: Copier/Printer 6: Printer/FAX 7: Copier/Printer/FAX
Procedur e 1 1 1
1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1
1 1
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 138
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Number of errors in HDD PPC 0 (Copying) <8 digits> Number of errors in HDD FAX 0 (FAX) <8 digits> Number of errors in HDD SCN 0 (Scanning) <8 digits> Number of errors in HDD PRT 0 (Printer) <8 digits> Number of polygonal motor ALL 0 rotational speed switching <8 digits>
Code
Classification
390
Counter
391
Counter
392
Counter
393
Counter
398
Laser
399
Laser
Accumulated time of polygonal motor at normal rotation
ALL
0 <8 digits>
M
400
Fuser
Fuser unit error status counter
ALL
0 <0-65>
M
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
RAM SYS SYS
Contents The number of error is reset at HDD formatting.
Procedur e 2 2
SYS
2
SYS
2
M
Counts the number of time the polygonal motor has switched its rotational speed between normal rotation and standby rotation Accumulates the time the polygonal motor has rotated at normal rotation. 0: No error 1: C411 2: C412 3: C433 4: Unused 5: C445, C465 6: C446 7: C447 8: C468 9: C449 10 to 17: Unused 18: C468 19: C449 20: C468 21: C449 22: C449 23: C449 24: C446, C447 25: C449 26: C468 27: C449 28: C468 29: C449 30: C4C0 31: C4D0 32: C448 33: C467 34: C467 35 to 41: Unused 42: C443 43 to 50: Unused 51: C443 52: C445 53: C448 54: C445 55: C448 56: C443 57 to 58: Unused 59: C445 60: Unused 61: C448 62: Unused 63: C448 64: C446 65: C448
2
2
1
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 139 08/08
2
Code
Classification
409
Fuser
410-0
Fuser
410-1
Fuser
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Fusing temperature in the ALL 3 <0-25> low power mode (Center)
Fusing temperature during printing (Center / Plain paper)
RAM M
ALL (black)
8 <0-16>
M
ALL (color)
Refer to content <0-16>
M
Contents 0: OFF 1: 40°C 2: 45°C 3: 50°C 4: 55°C 5: 60°C 6: 65°C 7: 70°C 8: 75°C 9: 80°C 10: 85°C 11: 90°C 12: 95°C 13: 100°C 14: 105°C 15: 110°C 16: 115°C 17: 120°C 18: 125°C 19: 130°C 20: 135°C 21: 140°C 22: 145°C 23: 150°C 24: 155°C 25: 160°C 0: 120°C 1: 125°C 2: 130°C 3: 135°C 4: 140°C 5: 145°C 6: 150°C 7: 155°C 8: 160°C 9: 165°C 10: 170°C 11: 175°C 12: 180°C 13: 185°C 14: 190°C 15: 195°C 16: 200°C
Procedur e 1
4
4
e-STUDIO2500c:8 e-STUDIO3500c:8 e-STUDIO3510c:9 412
Fuser
Fusing temperature during printing (Center / Thick paper 3) / (Center / Thick paper 4)
ALL
9 <0-16>
M
413-0
Fuser
Normal Fusing temperature during printing Extra long (Center / size paper Thick paper 1)
ALL (black) ALL (black)
8 <0-16> 8 <0-16>
M
ALL
0 <0-16>
M
413-1
417
Fuser
Pre-running time for first printing (Thick paper 3) / (Thick paper 4)
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
M
0: 120°C 1: 125°C 2: 130°C 3: 135°C 4: 140°C 5: 145°C 6: 150°C 7: 155°C 8: 160°C 9: 165°C 10: 170°C 11: 175°C 12: 180°C 13: 185°C 14: 190°C 15: 195°C 16: 200°C 0: 120°C 1: 125°C 2: 130°C 3: 135°C 4: 140°C 5: 145°C 6: 150°C 7: 155°C 8: 160°C 9: 165°C 10: 170°C 11: 175°C 12: 180°C 13: 185°C 14: 190°C 15: 195°C 16: 200°C 0: Invalid 1: 0 sec. 2: 2 sec. 3: 3 sec. 4: 4 sec. 5: 5 sec. 6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec. 8: 8 sec. 9: 10 sec. 10: 12 sec. 11: 14 sec. 12: 16 sec. 13: 18 sec. 14: 20 sec. 15: 25 sec. 16: 30 sec.
1
4 4
1
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 140 07/09
Code
Classification
437
Fuser
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Fusing temperature during ALL 8 <0-16> printing (Center / Thick paper 2)
RAM M
438
Fuser
Fusing temperature during printing (Center / OHP film)
ALL
9 <0-16>
M
439
Fuser
Pre-running time for first printing (Thick paper 2)
ALL
0 <0-16>
M
440-0
Fuser
Pre-running time for first printing (Plain paper/Low temperature environment)
ALL (black) ALL (color)
0 <0-16> 0 <0-16>
M
Normal
ALL
M
Extra long size paper
ALL
0 <0-16> 0 <0-16>
440-1
441-0 441-1
Fuser
Pre-running time for first printing (Thick paper 1)
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
M
M
Contents 0: 120°C 1: 125°C 2: 130°C 3: 135°C 4: 140°C 5: 145°C 6: 150°C 7: 155°C 8: 160°C 9: 165°C 10: 170°C 11: 175°C 12: 180°C 13: 185°C 14: 190°C 15: 195°C 16: 200°C 0: 120°C 1: 125°C 2: 130°C 3: 135°C 4: 140°C 5: 145°C 6: 150°C 7: 155°C 8: 160°C 9: 165°C 10: 170°C 11: 175°C 12: 180°C 13: 185°C 14: 190°C 15: 195°C 16: 200°C 0: Invalid 1: 0 sec. 2: 2 sec. 3: 3 sec. 4: 4 sec. 5: 5 sec. 6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec. 8: 8 sec. 9: 10 sec. 10: 12 sec. 11: 14 sec. 12: 16 sec. 13: 18 sec. 14: 20 sec. 15: 25 sec. 16: 30 sec. 0: Invalid 1: 0 sec. 2: 2 sec. 3: 3 sec. 4: 4 sec. 5: 5 sec. 6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec. 8: 8 sec. 9: 10 sec. 10: 12 sec. 11: 14 sec. 12: 16 sec. 13: 18 sec. 14: 20 sec. 15: 25 sec. 16: 30 sec. 0: Invalid 1: 0 sec. 2: 2 sec. 3: 3 sec. 4: 4 sec. 5: 5 sec. 6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec. 8: 8 sec. 9: 10 sec. 10: 12 sec. 11: 14 sec. 12: 16 sec. 13: 18 sec. 14: 20 sec. 15: 25 sec. 16: 30 sec.
Procedur e 1
2
1
1
4 4
4 4
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 141 07/09
Code
Classification
448
Fuser
449
Paper feeding Fuser
450-0 450-1
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Fusing temperature in the ALL 3 <0-25> low power mode (Side)
Switching for incorrect paper size jam detection Fusing temBK mode perature during printing (Side / Plain C or CK paper) mode
ALL ALL (black) ALL (color)
0 <0-1> Refer to content <0-16> 8 <0-16>
RAM M
M M M
Contents 0: OFF°C1: 40°C 2: 45°C 3: 50°C 4: 55°C 5: 60°C 6: 65°C 7: 70°C 8: 75°C 9: 80°C 10: 85°C 11: 90°C 12: 95°C 13: 100°C 14: 105°C 15: 110°C 16: 115°C 17: 120°C 18: 125°C 19: 130°C 20: 135°C 21: 140°C 22: 145°C 23: 150°C 24: 155°C 25: 160°C 0: Enabled 1: Disabled 0: 120°C 1: 125°C 2: 130°C 3: 135°C 4: 140°C 5: 145°C 6: 150°C 7: 155°C 8: 160°C 9: 165°C 10: 170°C 11: 175°C 12: 180°C 13: 185°C 14: 190°C 15: 195°C 16: 200°C
Procedur e 1
1 4 4
e-STUDIO2500c:8 e-STUDIO3500c:8 e-STUDIO3510c:9 451-0
Fuser
451-1
Fusing temperature during printing (Side / Thick paper 1)
Normal length paper Extra long size paper
ALL
8 <0-16>
M
ALL
8 <0-16>
M
452
Fuser
Fusing temperature during printing (Side / Thick paper 2)
ALL
8 <0-16>
M
453
Fuser
Fusing temperature during printing (Side / Overhead transparencies)
ALL
9 <0-16>
M
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
0: 120°C 1: 125°C 2: 130°C 3: 135°C 4: 140°C 5: 145°C 6: 150°C 7: 155°C 8: 160°C 9: 165°C 10: 170°C 11: 175°C 12: 180°C 13: 185°C 14: 190°C 15: 195°C 16: 200°C 0: 120°C 1: 125°C 2: 130°C 3: 135°C 4: 140°C 5: 145°C 6: 150°C 7: 155°C 8: 160°C 9: 165°C 10: 170°C 11: 175°C 12: 180°C 13: 185°C 14: 190°C 15: 195°C 16: 200°C 0: 120°C 1: 125°C 2: 130°C 3: 135°C 4: 140°C 5: 145°C 6: 150°C 7: 155°C 8: 160°C 9: 165°C 10: 170°C 11: 175°C 12: 180°C 13: 185°C 14: 190°C 15: 195°C 16: 200°C
4 4
1
1
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 142 07/09
Code
Classification
462
RADF
463-0 463-1
Paper feeding
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Setting for switchback ALL 0 <0-2> operation in mixed-size copying using RADF
Feeding retry number setting (1st drawer)
Plain paper Others
ALL ALL
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
5 <0-5> 5 <0-5>
RAM
Contents
SYS
This setting is whether the original length is detected or not by transporting without scanning in reverse when A4-R/FOLIO paper or LT-R/LG paper is detected in a mixedsize copying. 0: Disabled AMS: A series - Judges as A4-R without transporting in reverse with no scanning. LT series - Judges whether it is LT-R or LG by its length without transporting in reverse with no scanning. APS: A series - Judges whether it is A4-R or FOLIO without transporting in reverse with no scanning. LT series - Judges whether it is LT-R or LG without transporting in reverse with no scanning. 1: Enable 1 AMS: A series - Judges whether it is A4-R or FOLIO by transporting without scanning in reverse to detect its length. LT series - Judges whether it is LT-R or LG by transporting without scanning in reverse to detect its length. APS: The same as that of APS in 0: Disabled. 2: Enable 2 AMS/APS: The same as that of AMS in 1: Enable 1. Sets the number of times of the feeding retry from the 1st drawer.
M M
Procedur e 1
2
4 4
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 143
Code 464-0
Classification Paper feeding
464-1 465-0
Paper feeding
465-1 466-0
Paper feeding
466-1 467-0
Paper feeding
467-1 468-0
Paper feeding
468-1 470
Paper feeding
471
Paper feeding
478
Laser
480
Paper feeding
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Feeding retry Plain ALL 5 paper <0-5> number setting (2nd Others ALL 5 drawer) <0-5> Feeding retry Plain ALL 5 number setpaper <0-5> ting (PFP Others ALL 5 upper drawer) <0-5> Feeding retry Plain ALL 5 number setpaper <0-5> ting (PFP Others ALL 5 lower drawer) <0-5> Feeding retry Plain ALL 5 number setpaper <0-5> ting (bypass Others ALL 5 feed) <0-5> ALL 5 Feeding retry Plain paper <0-5> number setting (LCF) Others ALL 5 <0-5> Paper size (305x457 mm) ALL 457/305 feeding/widthwise direction <148457/105305> Paper size (Post card) ALL 148/100 feeding/widthwise direction <148432/100297> Judged number of polygoALL 0 nal motor rotation error <0-2> (Normal rotation)
Default setting of paper source
PPC
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
0 <0-5>
RAM M M M M M M M M M M
Contents
Procedur e
Sets the number of times of the feeding retry from the 2nd drawer.
4
Sets the number of times of the feeding retry from the PFP upper drawer.
4
Sets the number of times of the feeding retry from the PFP lower drawer.
4
Sets the number of times of the feeding retry from the bypass tray.
4
Sets the number of times of the feeding retry from the LCF.
4
M
4
4
4
4
4 10
M
*
Post card is supported only for JPN model.
10
M
Displays the error [CA10] when the set number of rotation error has been detected. 0: 2 times 1: 10 times 2: 20 times 0: A4/LT 1: LCF 2: 1st drawer 3: 2nd drawer 4: PFP upper drawer 5: PFP lower drawer
1
SYS
1
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 144 07/02
Code 481
482
Classification Paper feeding
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Automatic change of paper PPC 1 source <0-2>
Feeding retry setting
ALL
Feeding retry setting
ALL
Pre-running rotation of polygonal motor
ALL
Contents
SYS
Sets whether or not changing the drawer automatically to the other drawer with the paper of the same size when paper in the selected drawer has run out. 0: OFF 1: ON (Changes to the drawer with the same paper direction and size: ex. A4 to A4) 2: ON (Changes to the drawer with the same paper size. Paper with the different direction is acceptable as long as the size is the same: ex., A4 to A4R, LT-R to LT. “1” is applied when the staple/holepunch is specified.) 0: ON 1: OFF 0: ON 1: OFF Sets whether or not switching the polygonal motor from the standby rotation to the normal rotation when the original is set on the RADF or the platen cover is opened. 0: Valid (when using RADF and the original is set manually) 1: Invalid 2: Valid (when using RADF only) Sets whether or not switching the polygonal motor from the normal rotation to the standby rotation at the Auto Clear Mode. 0: Valid 1: Invalid Sets the rotational status of polygonal motor on standby. 0: Rotated (The rotational speed is set at 08-490.) 1: Stopped
482 (EFI) 483
Paper feeding Paper feeding Laser
484
Laser
Polygonal motor rotational status switching at the Auto Clear Mode
ALL
0 <0-1>
SYS
485
Laser
Rotational status of polygonal motor on standby
ALL
0 <0-1>
SYS
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
0 <0-1> 1 <0-1> 0 <0-2>
RAM
M M SYS
Procedur e 1
2
1 1 1
1
1
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 145
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Timing of auto-clearing of ALL 0 <0-2> polygonal motor pre-running rotation
Code
Classification
486
Laser
489
Laser
Polygonal motor rotation number on standby
ALL
3 <0-3>
M
490
Laser
ALL
Transfer
0 <0-3> 1 <0-2>
M
499
Polygonal motor rotation in the energy saving mode Detection level of toner cartridge detection sensors
503
User interface User interface
Default setting of density adjustment User mode setting
PPC (black) PPC (color)
0 <0-1> 0 <0-1>
SYS
User mode setting
PPC (black) ALL
0 <0-1> 9 <0-16>
SYS
518
User interface Fuser
526
Fuser
ALL
0 <0-16>
M
506 508
Fusing temperature during printing (Side / Thick paper 3) / (Side / Thick paper 4)
Pre-running time for first printing (OHP film)
ALL
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
RAM
Contents
SYS
Switches the polygonal motor to the standby rotation when a certain period of time has passed from the prerunning. At this code, the period to switch the status to the standby rotation is set. 0: 15 sec. 1: 30 sec. 2: 45 sec. * This setting is effective when “0” or “2” is set at 08-483. 0: 38090.55rpm 1: 35000rpm 2: 30000rpm 3: 25000rpm 4: 20000rpm 5: 10000rpm 0: Stopped 1: 10000rpm. 0: Level 0 (No detection) 1: Level 1 (Only warning display) 2: Level 3 (Warning display -> Stop) 0: Automatic 1: Manual (Center) 0: Unused 1: TEXT/PHOTO base 0: Unused 1: TEXT/PHOTO base 0: 120°C 1: 125°C 2: 130°C 3: 135°C 4: 140°C 5: 145°C 6: 150°C 7: 155°C 8: 160°C 9: 165°C 10: 170°C 11: 175°C 12: 180°C 13: 185°C 14: 190°C 15: 195°C 16: 200°C 0: Invalid 1: 0 sec. 2: 2 sec. 3: 3 sec. 4: 4 sec. 5: 5 sec. 6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec. 8: 8 sec. 9: 10 sec. 10: 12 sec. 11: 14 sec. 12: 16 sec. 13: 18 sec. 14: 20 sec. 15: 25 sec. 16: 30 sec.
M
SYS
M
Procedur e 1
1
1 1
1 1 1 1
1
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 146
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Temperature drop control ALL 1 during printing (black) <0-8> ALL 1 (color) <0-8>
Code
Classification
534-0
Fuser
534-1
Fuser
548
Transfer
Setting of 2nd transfer bias table (for each destination/ paper thickness)
ALL
EUR:0 UC:1 JPN:2 <0-5>
M
550
Image
Default setting of Original mode
PPC (black)
0 <0-4>
SYS
556
Image control
Image quality closed-loop control/Contrast voltage
ALL
1 <0-1>
M
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
RAM
Contents
M
0: Disabled 1: Enabled - Plain paper, thick paper 1 (Fuser roller and pressure roller at the normal or low temperature) 2: Enabled - Plain paper, thick paper 1 (Fuser roller at the normal or low temperature) 3: Enabled - Plain paper (Fuser roller at the normal or low temperature) 4: Enabled - Plain paper (Fuser roller at the normal temperature) 5: Enabled - Plain paper, thick paper 1 (Fuser roller at the normal temperature) 6: Enabled - Plain paper (Fuser roller and pressure roller at the normal or low temperature) 7: Enabled - Plain paper (Fuser roller and pressure roller at the normal temperature) 8: Enabled - Plain paper, thick paper 1 (Fuser roller and pressure roller at the normal temperature) 0:80 g/m2 (21.3 lb.)/ EUR 1: 75 g/m2 (20 lb.)/UC 2: 64 g/m2 (17.1 lb.)/ JPN 3: 4: 5: 0: Text/Photo 1: Photo 2: Text 3: Gray Scale Sets whether or not correcting the contrast voltage in closed-loop control. 0: Invalid 1: Valid
M
Procedur e 4 4
1
1
1
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 147 07/06
2
Code
Classification
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Image quality closed-loop ALL 1 control/Laser power <0-1>
RAM
Contents
M
Sets whether or not correcting the laser power in closed-loop control. 0: Invalid 1: Valid Sets whether performing closed-loop control automatically at powerON when the fuser roller temperature becomes below the specified level. 0: Invalid 1: Valid (mode1: for Quick Image Quality Control) 2: Valid (mode2: for Standard Image Quality Control) Sets whether or not performing a smoothing process (primary scanning direction, 2,400 dpi or equivalent). 0: Invalid 1: Valid Sets whether or not performing a smoothing process (primary scanning direction, 2,400 dpi or equivalent). 0: Invalid 1: Valid Sets whether or not performing closed-loop control automatically when the relative humidity becomes below the specified level from the previous control. 0: Invalid 1: Valid (mode1: for Quick Image Quality Control) 2: Valid (mode2: for Standard Image Quality Control)
557
Image control
559
Image control
Image quality closed-loop control automatic start-up / At the first power-ON in the morning
ALL (color)
2 <0-2>
M
560
Image
Process switching for image smoothing (Text/ Photo)
PPC (black)
1 <0-1>
M
562
Image
Process switching for image smoothing (Text)
PPC (black)
1 <0-1>
M
565
Image control
Image quality closed-loop control automatic start-up/ Relative humidity variation
ALL (color)
2 <0-2>
M
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
Procedur e 1
1
1
1
1
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 148 06/11
Code 566
Classification Image control
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Image quality closed-loop ALL 2 (color) <0-2> control automatic start-up/ Period of time unattended
RAM
Contents
M
Sets whether or not performing closed-loop control automatically at the operation start when the equipment has not been used for a specified period of time in the energy saving mode. 0: Invalid 1: Valid (mode1: for Quick Image Quality Control) 2: Valid (mode2: for Standard Image Quality Control) Sets whether or not performing closed-loop control automatically when the specified number of sheets has been printed out from the previous control. 0: Invalid 1: Valid (mode1: for Quick Image Quality Control) 2: Valid (mode2: for Standard Image Quality Control) Sets whether or not performing closed-loop control automatically when recovered from “Toner empty”. 0: Invalid 1: Valid (mode1: for Quick Image Quality Control) 2: Valid (mode2: for Standard Image Quality Control) Sets the fuser roller temperature to perform closed-loop control when “1” or “2” (valid) is set in 08-559. 0: 20°C 1: 25°C 2: 30°C 3: 35°C 4: 40°C 5: 45°C 6: 50°C 7: 55°C 8: 60°C 9: 65°C 10: 70°C 11: 75°C 12: 80°C 13: 85°C 14: 90°C 15: 95°C 16: 100°C 17: 105°C 18: 110°C 19: 115°C 20: 120°C
567
Image control
Image quality closed-loop control automatic start-up/ Accumulated print volume
ALL (color)
2 <0-2>
M
568
Image control
Image quality closed-loop control automatic start-up/ When recovered from “Toner empty”
ALL (color)
2 <0-2>
M
569
Image control
Image quality closed-loop control automatic start-up/ Temperature setting of fuser roller at power-ON
ALL (color)
8 <0-20>
M
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Procedur e 1
2
1
1
1
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 149
Code
Classification
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Image quality closed-loop ALL 2 (color) <0-6> control automatic start-up/ Relative humidity difference setting
RAM
Contents
M
Sets the relative humidity difference to perform the closed-loop control when “1” or “2” (valid) is set in 08-565. 0: 0% 1: 5% 2: 10% 3: 15% 4: 20% 5: 25% 6: 30% Sets the period of time unattended to perform closed-loop control when “1” or “2” (valid) is set in 08-566. Setting value x 1 (hour) Sets the number of accumulated print volume to perform closedloop control when “1” or “2” (valid) is set in 08567. Setting value x 100 (pages) Counts the abnormality detection of image quality control. Accumulating total of [CE10], [CE20] and [CE40] Counts the abnormality detection of image quality control. Accumulating total of [CE10], [CE20] and [CE40] Counts the abnormality detection of image quality control. Accumulating total of [CE10], [CE20] and [CE40] Counts the abnormality detection of image quality control. Accumulating total of [CE10], [CE20] and [CE40] 0: Unused 1: B/W TEXT/PHOTO base 2: B/W TEXT base 3: B/W PHOTO base 0: 150mm/s 1: 75mm/s 0: Text/Photo 1: Text 2: Printed image 3: Photo 4: Map 5: Custom 0: Automatic 1: Manual (Center)
570
Image control
571
Image control
Image quality closed-loop control automatic start-up/ Setting of period of time unattended
ALL (color)
4 <0-24>
M
572
Image control
Image quality closed-loop control automatic start-up/ Setting of accumulated print volume
ALL (color)
10 <0-30>
M
573
Image control
Abnormality detection count (Y) Display/0 clearing
ALL
0 <0-16>
M
574
Image control
Abnormality detection count (M) Display/0 clearing
ALL
0 <0-16>
M
575
Image control
Abnormality detection count (C) Display/0 clearing
ALL
0 <0-16>
M
576
Image control
Abnormality detection count (K) Display/0 clearing
ALL
0 <0-16>
M
580
User interface
User custom mode setting
SCN (black)
0 <0-3>
SYS
584
Fuser
ALL
User interface
PPC (color)
1 <0-1> 0 <0-5>
M
585
Fuser motor speed of prerunning at ready status Default setting of Original mode
587
User interface
Default setting of Density mode
PPC (color)
1 <0-1>
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
SYS
SYS
Procedur e 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 1
1
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 150
Code
Classification
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Default setting of Color PPC 2 mode <0-2>
RAM
588
User interface
590
User interface
User custom mode setting
SCN (color)
0 <0-4>
SYS
595
Image
Scanning operation switching at automatic calibration
PPC (color)
0 <0-1>
SYS
597
Image
Gamma correction table all clearing
PRT (color)
-
SYS
602
User interface
Screen setting for automatic energy saver/automatic power OFF
ALL
SYS
603
User interface
Setting for automatic duplexing mode
ALL
EUR:0 UC:1 JPN:1 <0-1> 0 <0-3>
604
User interface
Default setting for APS/ AMS
ALL
0 <0-2>
SYS
605
User interface
PPC
1 <0-1>
SYS
607
User interface
Centering printing of primary/secondary direction at AMS Default setting of RADF mode
PPC
0 <0-1>
SYS
609-0
Image
Step -2
ALL
SYS
Step -1
ALL ALL
609-3
Step 0 (center) Step +1
ALL
609-4
Step +2
ALL
88 <0-255> 108 <0-255> 148 <0-255> 178 <0-255> 208 <0-255> 1 <0-1>
609-1 609-2
610
User interface
Binarizing level setting (When judging as black in the ACS Mode)
Key touch sound of control panel
ALL
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
SYS
SYS
SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS
Contents 0: 1: 2: 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 0:
Auto color Black Full color Unused TEXT base Printed image base Photo base e-document base Scanning color/ black integrated pattern 1: Scanning color pattern only Initializes the status of automatic gamma adjustment in color printing. 0: OFF 1: ON 0: Invalid 1: Single-sided to duplex copying 2: Two-sided to duplex copying 3: User selection 0: APS (Automatic Paper Selection) 1: AMS (Automatic Magnification Selection) 2: Not selected 0: Invalid 1: Valid
0: Continuous feeding (by pressing the [START] button) 1: Single feeding (by setting original on the tray) Sets the binarizing level of each step. When the value increases, the image becomes darker. When the value decreases, the image becomes lighter. * Refer to 08-268. 0: OFF 1: ON
Procedur e 1 1
1
3
1
1
1
1 1
4 4 4 4 4 1
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 151
2
611
User interface
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Book type original priority PPC 0 <0-1>
612
General
Summer time mode
ALL
613
User interface
Paper size selection for [OTHER] button
PPC
614
Network
Local I/F time-out period
ALL
615
General
Size information of main memory and page memory
616
Counter
617 618
Code
619
620 621 622
Classification
Contents
SYS
0: Left page to right page 1: Right page to left page 0: Not summer time 1: Summer time Press the icon on the LCD to select the size.
1
Sets the period of time when the job is judged as completed in local I/ F printing (USB or parallel). 1: 1.0 sec. 2: 1.5 sec. 50: 25.5 sec. (in increments of 0.5 sec.) Displays the sizes of the main memory and page memory. Enables to check if each memory is properly recognized. Sets the counting method in Twin Color Mode with the Limitation Function. 0: Count as color 1: Count as black 0: Printed forcibly 1: Not printed 2: Deleted forcibly 0: Same size originals 1: Mixed size originals Sets the time taken to add paper feeding when paper in the bypass tray has run out during the bypass feed copying. 0: Paper is not drawn in unless the [START] button is pressed. 1-10: Setting value x 0.5sec. 0: Invalid 1: Valid 0: Invalid 1: Valid 0: Invalid 1: Valid
1
0 <0-1> EUR: FOLIO UC: COMP JPN: A5-R 6 <1-50>
SYS
ALL
-
SYS
Counting method in Twin Color Mode (Limitation Function)
ALL
JPN: 1 UC: 0 EUR: 0 <0-1>
SYS
User interface
Print setting without department code
ALL
1 <0-2>
SYS
User interface Paper feeding
Default setting of RADF original size Time lag before auto-start of bypass feeding
PPC
0 <0-1> 4 <0-10>
SYS
User interface User interface User interface
Department management setting (Copier) Department management setting (FAX) Department management setting (Printer)
PPC
1 <0-1> 1 <0-1> 1 <0-1>
SYS
ALL
FAX PRT
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
Procedur e
RAM
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS SYS
1 9
2
1
1 1 1
1 1 1
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 152
Code 623 624 625
627 628 629 632
633 634 636
Classification User interface User interface User interface
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Department management SCN 1 setting (Scanner) <0-1> Department management PRT 1 setting (List print) <0-1> PPC 0 Blank copying prevention <0-1> mode during RADF jamming
User interface User interface User interface User interface
Rotation printing at the nonsorting Direction priority of original image Department management setting Automatic calibration disclosure level
Data overwrite kit User interface User interface
Releasing F200 service call Inner receiving tray priority at Non-sort Mode Width setting for image shift copying (linkage of front side and back side) Time differences
638
General
640
User interface
Date display format
ALL
RAM
Contents
SYS
0: Invalid 1: Valid 0: Invalid 1: Valid 0: OFF 1: ON (Start printing when the scanning of each page is finished) 0: Not rotating 1: Rotating 0: Automatic 1: Portrait 0: Invalid 1: Valid Sets the disclosing level of automatic calibration. 0: Service technician 1: Administrator 2: User 0: Not used 1: Board installed 2: Service call 0: Normal 1: Inner receiving tray 0: ON 1: OFF
SYS SYS
0 <0-1> 0 <0-1> 0 <0-1> 1 <0-2>
SYS
ALL
0 <0-2>
SYS
ALL
0 <0-1> 0 <0-1>
SYS
ALL
EUR: 24 UC: 40 JPN: 6 <0-47>
SYS
ALL
EUR:1 UC:2 JPN:0 <0-2>
SYS
PPC ALL PPC
PPC
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
SYS SYS SYS
SYS
0: +12.0h 1: +11.5h 2: +11.0h 3: +10.5h 4: +10.0h 5: 9.5h 6: +9.0h 7: +8.5h 8: +8.0h 9: +7.5h 10: +7.0h 11: +6.5h 12: +6.0h 13: +5.5h 14: +5.0h 15: +4.5h 16: +4.0h 17: +3.5h 18: +3.0h 19: +2.5h 20: +2.0h 21: +1.5h 22: +1.0h 23: +0.5h 24: 0.0h 25:-0.5h 26: -1.0h 27: -1.5h 28: -2.0h 29: -2.5h 30: -3.0h 31: -3.5h 32: -4.0h 33: -4.5h 34: -5.0h 35: -5.5h 36: -6.0h 37: -6.5h 38: -7.0h 39: -7.5h 40: -8.0h 41: -8.5h 42: -9.0h 43: -9.5h 44: -10.0h 45: -10.5h 46: -11.0h 47: -11.5h 0: YYYY.MM.DD. 1: DD.MM.YYYY 2: MM.DD.YYYY
Procedur e 1 1 1
1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1
1
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 153 06/10
2
641
User interface
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Automatic Sorting Mode PPC 2 setting (RADF) <0-4>
642
User interface
Default setting of Sorter Mode
643
User interface
644
User interface
645
User interface
Color 1 at twin color selection (Select what color black in original is copied) Color 2 at twin color selection (Select what color other than black in original is copied) Correction of reproduction ratio in editing copy
646
User interface
648
Code
Classification
RAM SYS
PPC
0 <0-4>
SYS
PPC (color)
0 <0-6>
SYS
PPC (color)
4 <0-6>
SYS
PPC
10 <0-10>
SYS
Image position in editing
ALL
2 <0-3>
SYS
User interface
Returning finisher tray when printing is finished
ALL
0 <0-1>
SYS
649
User interface
Magazine sort setting
PPC
0 <0-1>
SYS
650
User interface
2 in 1/4 in 1 page allocating order setting
PPC
0 <0-1>
SYS
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
Contents
Procedur e
0: Invalid 1: STAPLE 2: SORT 3: GROUP 4: ROTATE SORT 0: NON-SORT 1: STAPLE 2: SORT 3: GROUP 4: ROTATE SORT 0: K 1: Y 2: M 3: C 4: R 5: G 6: B 0: K 1: Y 2: M 3: C 4: R 5: G 6: B
1
Sets the reproduction ratio for the “X in 1” printing (including magazine sort) to the “Reproduction ratio x Correction ratio”. 0: 90% 1: 91% 2: 92% 3: 93% 4: 94% 5: 95% 6: 96% 7: 97% 8: 98% 9: 99% 10: 100% Sets the page pasted position for “X in 1” to the upper left corner/ center. 0: Cornering (PPC)/ Cornering (PRT) 1: Centering (PPC)/ Cornering (PRT) 2: Cornering (PPC)/ Centering (PRT) 3: Centering (PPC)/ Centering (PRT) Sets whether or not returning the finisher tray to the bin 1 when printing is finished. 0: Not returned 1: Returned 0: Left page to right page 1: Right page to left page 0: Horizontal 1: Vertical
1
1
1 1
1
1
1
1
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 154 07/02
Code 651
652 653 657
Classification User interface
User interface User interface User interface
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Printing format setting for PPC 2 <0-3> Time Stamp and Page Number
Cascade operation setting
PPC
Cascade operation setting
PRT
Default setting of printing direction for Time Stamp and Page Number Auto-start setting for bypass feed printing (Remote)
PPC
Contents
SYS
Hyphen (with page number) /Dropout (with date, time and page number) 0: OFF/OFF 1: ON/OFF 2: OFF/ON 3: ON/ON Note: Note: Hyphen printing format ON: -1- OFF: 1 0: OFF 1: ON 0: OFF 1: ON 0: Short edge 1: Long edge
1
Sets whether or not feeding a paper automatically into the copier when it is placed on the bypass tray. 0: OFF (Press the [START] button to start feeding.) 1: ON (Automatic feeding) Sets whether or not feeding a paper automatically into the copier when it is placed on the bypass tray. 0: OFF (Press the [START] button to start feeding.) 1: ON (Automatic feeding) 0: Invalid 1: Valid 0: Invalid 1: Valid Clears SMS partition. (Performs when the service call [F106] has occurred.) Sets the counting method of fee charging or duplexing count in the Twin Color Mode. 0: Count as Twin Color Mode 1: Count as Black Mode 2: Count as Full Color Mode
1
0 <0-1> 0 <0-1> 0 <0-1>
SYS
PRT
0 <0-1>
SYS
SYS SYS
658
User interface
659
User interface
Auto-start setting for bypass feed printing (Local)
PPC
1 <0-1>
SYS
660
Network
ALL
Network
662
General
0 <0-1> 0 <0-1> -
SYS
661
Auto-forwarding setting of received FAX Auto-forwarding setting of received E-mail Clearing of SMS partition
663
Counter
Counting method in Twin Color Mode
PPC
0 <0-2>
SYS
ALL ALL
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Procedur e
RAM
SYS SYS
2
1 1 1
1
1 1 3
1
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 155 07/06
Setting mode (08) Default Func- ALL -
Code
Classification
666
General
BOX partition clearing
667
General
/SHA partition clearing
ALL
-
SYS
670
General
HDD diagnostic menu display
ALL
-
SYS
671
User interface General
Size indicator
ALL
0 <0-1> -
SYS
672
675-0
Paper feeding
Items
Initialization of department management information
Coated Paper Mode setting for paper source
-
RAM SYS
SYS
1st drawer
ALL
0 <0-1>
SYS
675-1
2nd drawer
ALL
0 <0-1>
SYS
675-2
PFP upper drawer
ALL
0 <0-1>
SYS
675-3
PFP lower drawer
ALL
0 <0-1>
SYS
675-4
LCF
ALL
0 <0-1>
SYS
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
Contents
Procedur e
Initializes the Electronic Filing. Initializes the shared folder. Display the HDD information (Chap. 5.3.7) 0: Invalid 1: Valid
3
Initializing of the department management information * Enter the code with the digital keys and press the [INITIALIZE] button to perform the initialization. If the area storing the department management information is destroyed for some reason, “Enter Department Code” is displayed on the control panel even if the department management function is not set on. In this case, initialize the area with this code. This area is normally initialized at the factory. Sets whether or not applying the Coated Paper Mode to each paper source. 0: Normal mode 1: Coated Paper Mode * Coated Paper Mode - This mode is selected when the paper which often causes the misfeeding (ex. coated paper) is used. The occurrence of misfeeding is reduced by lengthening the jam detection time. However, the printing speed is lowered since the printing cycle is also lengthened with the lengthened jam detection time.
3
3 2 1
4
4
4
4
4
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 156
Code
Classification
678
General
679
General
680
General
681
General
682 683
Use interface General
684 685
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Setting of banner advertisALL 0 ing display <0-1>
RAM
Contents
SYS
Sets whether or not displaying the banner advertising. The setting contents of 08-679 and 08-680 are displayed at the time display section on the right top of the screen. When both are set, each content is displayed alternately. 0: Not displayed 1: Displayed Maximum 27 letters (one-byte character) Maximum 27 letters (one-byte character) 0: Not displayed 1: Displayed * This button enables the entry of “Banner advertising display 1 (08-679)” and “Banner advertising display 2 (08-680)” on the control panel. 0: Invalid 1: Valid When the duplex printing is short paid with a coin controller, reverse side of the original is not printed and is considered as a defect (printing job may be cleared). To solve this problem, the selection of printing method is enabled with this setting. 0: Invalid (Both sides printed) 1: Valid (Only one side printed) Rebuilds all databases. Rebuilds all databases related to the Address Book. Rebuilds all databases related to the logs. 0: Not subjected for APS judgment 1: Subjected for APS judgment 2: Normal formatting
Banner advertising display 1 Banner advertising display 2 Display of [BANNER MESSAGE] button
ALL
-
SYS
ALL
-
SYS
ALL
0 <0-1>
SYS
Offsetting between jobs
ALL
SYS
Duplex printing setting when coin controller is used
ALL
1 <0-1> 1 <0-1>
General General
Rebuilding all databases Rebuilding all databases related to Address Book
ALL ALL
-
SYS SYS
686
General
ALL
-
SYS
689
FAX
Rebuilding all databases related to log Adaptation of paper source priority selection
FAX
0 <0-1>
SYS
690
General
HDD formatting
ALL
SYS
691
General
HDD type display
ALL
2 <2> <0-2>
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
SYS
SYS
0: Not formatted 1: Not used 2: Normal format
Procedur e 1
2
11 11 1
1 1
3 3 3 1
7 7
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 157 06/10
Code
Classification
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Performing panel calibraALL tion
RAM
Contents
SYS
Performs the calibration of the pressing position on the touch panel (LCD screen). The calibration is performed by pressing 2 reference positions after this code is started up. Returns the value to the factory shipping default value. Checks the bad sector. Performs when the EFI controller is used 0: Japan 1: Asia 2: Australia 3: Hong Kong 4: U.S.A./Canada 5: Germany 6: U.K. 7: Italy 8: Belgium 9: Netherlands 10: Finland 11: Spain 12: Austria 13: Switzerland 14: Sweden 15: Denmark 16: Norway 17: Portugal 18: France 19: Greece 20: Poland 21: Hungary 22: Czech 23: Turkey 24: South Africa 25: Taiwan 0: Valid (Remote-controlled server) 1: Valid (L2) 2: Invalid Maximum 256 Bytes
692
Maintenance
693
General
Initialization of NIC information
ALL
-
SYS
694 700
General General
ALL ALL
-
SYS -
701
FAX
Performing HDD testing Default setting of the EFI controller Destination setting for FAX
FAX
EUR: 5 UC: 4 JPN: 0 Other: 1 <0-25>
SYS
702
Maintenance
Remote-controlled service function
ALL
2 <0-2>
SYS
703
Maintenance
Remote-controlled service HTTP server URL setting Interruption of Copying stapling operation (no staple) Printing / BOX printing
ALL
-
SYS
ALL
1 <0-1>
SYS
ALL
0 <0-1>
SYS
704-0
704-1
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
0: Continues printing by switching sort setting 1: Interrupts printing 0: Continues printing by switching sort setting 1: Interrupts printing
Procedur e 1
3 3 3 1
1
11 4
4
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 158
Code 707
710
711 715
Setting mode (08) Default ClassifiFunc- Mainte- Remote-controlled service ALL https:// device.mf nance HTTP initially-registered server p-supURL setting port.com: 443/ device/firstregist.ashx Mainte- Short time interval setting ALL 24 nance of recovery from Emer<1-48> (Remote) gency Mode Maintenance Maintenance
716
Maintenance
717
Maintenance
718
Maintenance
719
Maintenance Maintenance
720
Short time interval setting of Emergency Mode Remote-controlled service periodical polling timing (Hour/Hour/Minute/Minute) Remote-controlled service Writing data of self-diagnostic code Remote-controlled service response waiting time (Timeout) Remote-controlled service initial registration
Remote-controlled service tentative password Status of remote-controlled service initial registration (Display only) Service center call function
RAM SYS
Contents Maximum 256 Bytes
Procedur e 11
2
60 <30-360> 1230
SYS
Sets the time interval to recover from the Emergency Mode to the Normal Mode. (Unit: Hour) Unit: Minute
SYS
0 (0:00) to 2359 (23:59)
1
ALL
0 <0-1>
SYS
0: Prohibited 1: Accepted
1
ALL
3 <1-30>
SYS
Unit: Minute
1
ALL
0 <0-3>
SYS
1
ALL
-
SYS
0: OFF 1: Start 2: Only certification is scanned 3: Satellite communication starts Maximum 10 letters
ALL
0 <0-1>
SYS
0: Not registered 1: Registered
2
ALL
2 <0-2>
SYS
1
ALL
-
SYS
0: OFF 1: Notifies all service calls 2: Notifies all but paper jams Maximum 256 letters
ALL
1 <0-1> -
SYS
SYS SYS
Maximum 30 letters
11
ALL ALL
SYS
1
1
11
721
Maintenance
723
Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance
HTTP proxy IP address setting
ALL
728
Maintenance
HTTP proxy port number setting
ALL
729
Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance
HTTP proxy ID setting
ALL
0 <065535> -
HTTP proxy password setting HTTP proxy panel display
ALL
-
SYS
Maximum 30 letters
11
ALL
1 <0-1>
SYS
0: Valid 1: Invalid
1
726 727
730 731
Service center call HTTP server URL setting HTTP proxy setting
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
SYS
0: Valid 1: Invalid 000.000.000.000 255.255.255.255 (Default value 000.000.000.000)
11 1 11
1
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 159
Code
Classification
732
Maintenance (Remote)
733
Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote)
734 738 739 740 741 742 743 744
745
Maintenance (Remote)
746
Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote)
747 748 749 750 751 752
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Automatic ordering funcALL 3 tion of supplies <0-3> Automatic ordering function of supplies FAX number Automatic ordering function of supplies E-mail address Automatic ordering function of supplies User's name Automatic ordering function of supplies User's telephone number Automatic ordering function of supplies User's E-mail address Automatic ordering function of supplies User's address Automatic ordering function of supplies Service number Automatic ordering function of supplies Service technician's name Automatic ordering function of supplies Service technician's telephone number Automatic ordering function of supplies Service technician's E-mail address Automatic ordering function of supplies Supplier's name Automatic ordering function of supplies Supplier's address Automatic ordering function of supplies Notes Information about supplies Part number of toner cartridge C Information about supplies Order quantity of toner cartridge C Information about supplies Condition number of toner cartridge C Information about supplies Part number of toner cartridge M
Procedur e
RAM
Contents
SYS
0: Ordered by FAX 1: Ordered by E-mail 2: Ordered by HTTP 3: OFF Maximum 32 digits Enter hyphen with the [Monitor/Pause] button Maximum 192 letters List: 256 digits
11
ALL
-
SYS
ALL
-
SYS
1
11
ALL
SYS
Maximum 50 letters
11
ALL
SYS
11
ALL
SYS
Maximum 32 digits Enter hyphen with the [Monitor/Pause] button Maximum 192 letters List: 256 digits
ALL
SYS
Maximum 100 letters
11
ALL
SYS
Maximum 5 digits
11
ALL
SYS
Maximum 50 letters
11
ALL
SYS
Maximum 32 digits Enter hyphen with the [Monitor/Pause] button
11
ALL
SYS
Maximum 192 letters List: 256 digits
11
ALL
SYS
Maximum 50 letters
11
ALL
SYS
Maximum 100 letters
11
ALL
SYS
Maximum 128 letters
11
ALL
SYS
Maximum 20 digits
11
11
ALL
1 <1-99>
SYS
1
ALL
1 <1-99>
SYS
1
ALL
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
SYS
Maximum 20 digits
11
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 160 07/06
Code 753 754 755 756 757 758 759 760 761 762 763 764 765
Classification Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote)
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Information about supplies ALL 1 Order quantity of toner car<1-99> tridge M ALL 1 Information about supplies <1-99> Condition number of toner cartridge M Information about supplies ALL Part number of toner cartridge Y Information about supplies ALL 1 Order quantity of toner car<1-99> tridge Y ALL 1 Information about supplies <1-99> Condition number of toner cartridge Y Information about supplies ALL Part number of toner cartridge K ALL 1 Information about supplies <1-99> Order quantity of toner cartridge K Information about supplies ALL 1 Condition number of toner <1-99> cartridge K Information about supplies ALL Part number of toner bag
RAM
Procedur e
SYS
1
SYS
1
SYS
Maximum 20 digits
11
SYS
1
SYS
1
SYS
Maximum 20 digits
11
SYS
1
SYS
1
SYS
Maximum 20 digits
11
Information about supplies Order quantity of toner bag
ALL
1 <1-99>
SYS
1
Information about supplies Condition number of toner bag Automatic ordering supplies Result table printout Automatic ordering supplies Display
ALL
1 <1-99>
SYS
1
ALL
1 <0-2>
SYS
ALL
EUR: 2 UC: 0 JPN: 2 <0-2>
SYS
767
Mainte- Service Notification setting nance (Remote)
ALL
0 <0-2>
SYS
768
Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote)
Destination E-mail address 1
ALL
-
SYS
Total counter information transmission setting
ALL
0 <0-1>
SYS
769
Contents
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
0: 1: 2: 0:
OFF Always ON Error Valid (FAX/Internet FAX) 1: Valid (FAX/Internet FAX/ HTTP) 2: Invalid Enables to set up to 3 E-mail addresses to be sent. (08-768, 777, 778) 0: Invalid 1: Valid (E-mail) 2: Valid (FAX) Maximum 192 letters 0: Invalid 1: Valid
1 1
1
11 1
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 161 06/10
2
Code 770 771 772 773
Classification
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Total counter transmission ALL 0 date setting <0-31>
Maintenance (Remote) Mainte- PM counter notification setting nance (Remote) Mainte- Dealer's name nance Maintenance
Login name
RAM
Contents
Procedur e
SYS
0 to 31
1
ALL
0 <0-1>
SYS
0: Invalid 1: Valid
1
ALL
-
SYS
11
ALL
-
SYS
EUR: 0 UC: 1 JPN: 0 <0-1> 0 <0-1>
SYS
Maximum 100 letters Needed at initial registration Maximum 20 letters Needed at initial registration 0: Not displayed 1: Displayed 0: Invalid 1: Valid
1
11
774
Mainte- Display setting of [Service Notification] button nance (Remote)
ALL
775
Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance
Sending error contents of equipment
ALL
Setting total counter transmission interval (Hour/Hour/Minute/Minute) Destination E-mail address 2
ALL
-
SYS
ALL
-
SYS
Maximum 192 letters
11
Destination E-mail address 3
ALL
-
SYS
Maximum 192 letters
11
Remote-controlled service polling day selection Day-1
ALL
0 <0-31>
SYS
1
781
Maintenance
Remote-controlled service polling day selection Day-2
ALL
0 <0-31>
SYS
782
Maintenance
Remote-controlled service polling day selection Day-3
ALL
0 <0-31>
SYS
783
Maintenance
Remote-controlled service polling day selection Day-4
ALL
0 <0-31>
SYS
784
Maintenance
ALL
0 <0-1>
SYS
785
Maintenance
ALL
0 <0-1>
SYS
0: Invalid 1: Valid
1
786
Maintenance
ALL
0 <0-1>
SYS
0: Invalid 1: Valid
1
787
Maintenance
Remote-controlled service polling day selection Sunday Remote-controlled service polling day selection Monday Remote-controlled service polling day selection Tuesday Remote-controlled service polling day selection Wednesday
0: OFF 1 to 31: 1st to 31st of a month 0: OFF 1 to 31: 1st to 31st of a month 0: OFF 1 to 31: 1st to 31st of a month 0: OFF 1 to 31: 1st to 31st of a month 0: Invalid 1: Valid
ALL
0 <0-1>
SYS
0: Invalid 1: Valid
1
776 777 778 780
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
SYS
1
1
1
1
1
1
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 162 06/10
Code
Classification
788
Maintenance
789
Maintenance Maintenance
790 791 792 793 794 795 796
Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance
808
Main charger
816
Transfer
855
Fuser
900
Version
903 905 907 908 911
Version Version Version Version Version
915 920
Version Version
921
Version
922
Version
923
Version
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Remote-controlled service ALL 0 <0-1> polling day selection Thursday Remote-controlled service ALL 0 polling day selection Friday <0-1> Remote-controlled service ALL 0 <0-1> polling day selection Saturday Information of supplies setALL 0 ting of toner cartridge C <0-1> Information of supplies setALL 0 ting of toner cartridge M <0-1> Information of supplies setALL 0 ting of toner cartridge Y <0-1> Information of supplies setALL 0 ting of toner cartridge K <0-1> Information of supplies setALL 0 ting of toner bag <0-1> Remote-controlled service ALL 0 lengthened interval polling <0-1> (End of month) Main charger / Slit glass ALL 4 cleaning cycle setting <0-9>
RAM
Contents
Procedur e
SYS
0: Invalid 1: Valid
1
SYS
0: 1: 0: 1:
Invalid Valid Invalid Valid
1
0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1:
Invalid Valid Invalid Valid Invalid Valid Invalid Valid Invalid Valid Invalid Valid
1
0: Invalid 1: 3000pages 2: 5000pages 3: 7500pages 4: 10000pages 5: 15000pages 6: 20000pages 7: 25000pages 8: 30000pages 9: 35000pages 0: Disabled 1: Enabled
1
SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS M
1
1 1 1 1 1
1st transfer roller bias resistance detection control Pre-running ON/OFF setting when recovering to warming-up System firmware ROM version
ALL
1 <0-1>
M
ALL
1 <0-1>
M
1: Valid 2: Invalid
1
ALL
-
-
2
Engine ROM version Scanner ROM version RADF ROM version Finisher ROM version Finisher punch ROM version FAX board ROM version FROM basic section software version FROM internal program version UI data fixed section version UI data common section version
ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL
-
-
JPN: T380SY0JXXX UC: T380SY0UXXX EUR: T380SY0EXXX Others: T380SY0XXXX 380M-XXX 380S-XXX DF-XXXX SDL-XX FIN-XX PUN-XXX
2 2 2 2 2
FAX ALL
-
-
F562-XXX VX.XX/X.XX
2 2
ALL
-
-
VXXX.XXX X
2
ALL
-
-
VXXX.XXX X
2
ALL
-
-
VXXX.XXX X
2
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
1
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 163
2
Code
Classification
924
Version
925
Version
926
Version
927
Version
928
Version
929
Version
930
Version
931
Version
933 934
Version Version
935
Version
936
Version
937
Version
938
Version
939
Version
944
Version
945
Network
947
General
949
General
Automatic interruption page number setting for printing
950
Electronic filing
951
User interface
Items
Setting mode (08) Default Func- ALL -
Version of UI data language 1 in HDD Version of UI data language 2 in HDD Version of UI data language 3 in HDD Version of UI data language 4 in HDD Version of UI data language 5 in HDD Version of UI data language 6 in HDD Version of UI data in FROM displayed at powerON Version of UI data language 7 in HDD Web data whole version Web UI data in HDD Version: Language 1 Web UI data in HDD Version: Language 2 Web UI data in HDD Version: Language 3 Web UI data in HDD Version: Language 4 Web UI data in HDD Version: Language 5 Web UI data in HDD Version: Language 6 HDD version
RAM
Contents
Procedur e
-
VXXX.XXX X
2
ALL
-
-
VXXX.XXX X
2
ALL
-
-
VXXX.XXX X
2
ALL
-
-
VXXX.XXX X
2
ALL
-
-
VXXX.XXX X
2
ALL
-
-
VXXX.XXX X
2
ALL
-
-
VXXX.XXX X
2
ALL
-
-
VXXX.XXX X
2
ALL ALL
-
-
VXXX.XXX X VXXX.XXX X
2 2
ALL
-
-
VXXX.XXX X
2
ALL
-
-
VXXX.XXX X
2
ALL
-
-
VXXX.XXX X
2
ALL
-
-
VXXX.XXX X
2
ALL
-
-
VXXX.XXX X
2
ALL
-
-
2
ALL
2 <1-2> -
UTY
ALL
5 <0-100>
SYS
Start-up method of Electronic Filing
ALL
0 <0-2>
SYS
Image setting for Electronic Filing printing (Only for color image)
ALL
0 <0-3>
SYS
JPN: T380HD0JXXX UC: T380HD0UXXX EUR: T380HD0EXXX Others: T380HD0XXXX 1: Valid 2: Invalid Perform this code when the software in this equipment has been upgraded. Sets the number of pages to interrupt the printing automatically. 0-100: 0 to 100 pages Sets the start-up method of the Electronic Filing. 0: Standard 1: Forced start-up (Not recovered) 2: Forced start-up (Recovered) 0: General 1: Photograph 2: Presentation 3: Line art
Two-way setting of RawPort 9100 Initialization after software version upgrade
ALL
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
SYS
12 3
1
1
1
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 164 06/10
953
User interface
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Access code entry for ALL 0 Electronic Filing printing <0-1>
954
User interface
Clearing timing for files and Electronic Filing Agent
ALL
1 <0-1>
SYS
969
User interface User interface
Error sound
ALL
SYS
Sound setting when switching to Energy Saving Mode
ALL
973
Network
PCL line feed code setting
PRT
1 <0-1> EUR: 1 UC: 1 JPN: 0 <0-1> 0 <0-3>
975
General
Job handling when printing is short paid with coin controller
ALL
1 <0-1>
SYS
Code
970
Classification
RAM
Contents
SYS
0: Renewed automatically 1: Enter every time 0: Immediately after the completion of scanning 1: Cleared by Auto Clear 0: OFF 1: ON 0: OFF 1: ON
SYS
SYS
976
Scanning Equipment name and user name setting to a folder when saving files
ALL
0 <0-2>
SYS
978
Network
PRT
0 <0-5>
SYS
Raw printing job (Paper feeding drawer)
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Sets the PCL line feed code. 0: Automatic setting 1: CR=CR, LF=LF 2: CR=CR+LF, LF=LF 3: CR=CR, LF=CR+LF Sets whether pause or stop the printing job when it is short paid using a coin controller. 0: Pause the job 1: Stop the job Sets whether or not adding the equipment name and user name to the folder when saving files. 0: Not add 1: Add the equipment name 2: Add the user name 0: AUTO 1: 1st drawer 2: 2nd drawer 3: PFP upper drawer 4: PFP lower drawer 5: LCF
Procedur e 1 1
1 1
1
1
1
1
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 165 07/06
2
Setting mode (08) Default Func- PRT 0 <0-39>
Code
Classification
979
Network
Raw printing job (PCL symbol set)
983
User interface General
JOB STATUS initial screen setting Copy function setting
988
Paper feeding
Setting of paper size switching to 13" LG
995
Maintenance
Equipment number (serial number) display
986
Items
ALL
RAM SYS
0 <0-1> 0 <0-1>
SYS
ALL
0 <0-2>
SYS
ALL
<10 digits>
SYS
PPC
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
SYS
Contents 0: 1: 2: 3: 4:
Roman-8 ISO 8859/1 Latin 1 ISO 8859/2 Latin 2 ISO 8859/9 Latin 5 PC-8, Code Page 437 5: PC-8 D/N, Danish/ Norwegian 6: PC-850, Multilingual 7: PC-852, Latin2 8: PC-8 Turkish 9: Windows 3.1 Latin 1 10: Windows 3.1 Latin 2 11: Windows 3.1 Latin 5 12: DeskTop 13: PS Text 14: Ventura International 15: Ventura US 16: Microsoft Publishing 17: Math-8 18: PS Math 19: Ventura Math 20: Pi Font 21: Legal 22: ISO 4: United Kingdom 23: ISO 6: ASCII 24: ISO 11 25: ISO 15: Italian 26: ISO 17 27: ISO 21: German 28: ISO 60: Danish/Norwegian 29: ISO 69: French 30: Windows 3.0 Latin 1 31: MC Text 32: PC Cyrillic 33: ITC Zapf Dingbats 34: ISO 8859/10 Latin 6 35: PC-775 36: PC-1004 37: Symbol 38: Windows Baltic 39: Wingdings 0: Print 1: Private Sets the copy function to be invalid. 0: Valid 1: Invalid 0: Not switched 1: LG→13"LG 2: FOLIO→13"LG This code can be also keyed in from the adjustment mode (05976). 10 digits
Procedur e 1
1 1
1 11
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 166 06/10
Code 999
Classification
Setting mode (08) Default Func- FSMS total counter ALL 0 <8 digits> Selection of NIC board staALL 1 tus information <1-2>
RAM
Contents
SYS
Refer to values of total counter. 1: Not printed out when the copier is restarted 2: Printed out when the copier is restarted 1: Auto 2: 10MBPS Half Duplex 3: 10MBPS Full Duplex 4: 100MBPS Half Duplex 5: 100MBPS Full Duplex 1: Fixed IP address 2: Dynamic IP address 3: Dynamic IP address without AutoIP 1: Fixed IP address 2: Dynamic IP address 3: Dynamic IP address without AutoIP * The default value is reflected by performing 08-700 when the EFI controller is connected. Maximum 96 letters 000.000.000.000255.255.255.255 (Default value 000.000.000.000) 000.000.000.000255.255.255.255 (Default value 10.250.250.249) * The default value is reflected by performing 08-700 when the EFI controller is connected. 000.000.000.000255.255.255.255 (Default value 000.000.000.000) 000.000.000.000255.255.255.255 (Default value 255.255.255.252) * The default value is reflected by performing 08-700 when the EFI controller is connected.
1002
Maintenance Network
1003
Network
Communication speed and settings of Ethernet
ALL
1 <1-5>
NIC
1006
Network
Address Mode
ALL
2 <1-3>
NIC
1006 (EFI)
Network
Address Mode
ALL
1 <1-3>
NIC
1007 1008
Network Network
Domain name IP address
ALL ALL
-
NIC NIC
1008 (EFI)
Network
IP address
ALL
-
NIC
1009
Network
Subnet mask
ALL
-
NIC
1009 (EFI)
Network
Subnet mask
ALL
-
NIC
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
NIC
Procedur e 1 12
12
12
12
12 12
12
12
12
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 167 06/10
2
Setting mode (08) Default Func- ALL -
Code
Classification
1010
Network
Gateway
1010 (EFI)
Network
Gateway
ALL
-
NIC
1011
Network
Availability of IPX
ALL
NIC
1011 (EFI)
Network
Availability of IPX
ALL
1 <1-2> 2 <1-2>
1012
Network
Network frame type
ALL
1 <1-5>
NIC
1014
Network
Availability of AppleTalk
ALL
NIC
1014 (EFI)
Network
Availability of AppleTalk
ALL
1 <1-2> 2 <1-2>
1015
Network
Zone setting of AppleTalk
ALL
*
NIC
1016
Network
Availability of LDAP
ALL
NIC
1017
Network
Availability of DNS
ALL
1018
Network
IP address to DNS server (Primary)
ALL
1 <1-2> 1 <1-2> -
NIC
1019
Network
IP address to DNS server (Secondary)
ALL
-
NIC
1020
Network
DDNS Desired level
ALL
1 <1-5>
NIC
Items
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
RAM
Contents
NIC
000.000.000.000255.255.255.255 (Default value 000.000.000.000) 000.000.000.000255.255.255.255 (Default value 10.250.250.250) * The default value is reflected by performing 08-700 when the EFI controller is connected. 1: Available 2: Not available 1: Available 2: Not available * The default value is reflected by performing 08-700 when the EFI controller is connected. 1: Automatic 2: IEEE802.3 3: Ethernet II 4: IEEE802.3 SNAP 5: IEEE802.2 1: Available 2: Not available 1: Available 2: Not available * The default value is reflected by performing 08-700 when the EFI controller is connected. Maximum 32 letters *: Wildcard character 1: Available 2: Not available 1: Available 2: Not available 000.000.000.000255.255.255.255 (Default value 000.000.000.000) 000.000.000.000255.255.255.255 (Default value 000.000.000.000) 1: Invalid 2: Valid 3: Valid 4: Valid 5: Valid
NIC
NIC
NIC
Procedur e 12
12
12 12
12
12 12
12 12 12 12
12
12
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 168
Setting mode (08) Default Func- From Name Creation setALL 0 <0-1> ting in SMTP authentication
Code
Classification
1022
Network
1023
Network
NetBios name
ALL
MFP_ serial
UTY
1024
Network
Name of WINS server or IP address (Primary)
ALL
-
UTY
1025
Network
Name of WINS server or IP address (Secondary)
ALL
-
UTY
1026
Network
Availability of Bindery
ALL
NIC
1027
Network
Availability of NDS
ALL
1028 1029 1030
Network Network Network
Directory service context Directory service tree Availability of HTTP server
ALL ALL ALL
1031
Network
Port number to NIC HTTP server
ALL
1032
Network
Port number to system HTTP server
ALL
1037
Network
Availability of SMTP client
ALL
1038
Network
ALL
1039
Network
FQDN or IP address to SMTP server TCP port number of SMTP client
1 <1-2> 1 <1-2> 1 <1-2> 80 <165535> 8080 <165535> 1 <1-2> -
1040
Network
Availability of SMTP server
ALL
1041
Network
TCP port number of SMTP server
ALL
1042
Network
ALL
1043
Network
E-mail box name to SMTP server Availability of Offramp
ALL
1044
Network
Offramp security
ALL
1045
Network
Printing at Offramp
ALL
1046
Network
Availability of POP3 clients
ALL
1047
Network
FQDN or IP address to POP3 server
ALL
ALL
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
25 <165535> 1 <1-2> 25 <165535> 2 <1-2> 1 <1-2> 1 <1-2> 1 <1-2> -
RAM SYS
NIC NIC NIC NIC
Contents 0: Not edited 1: Account name of From Address +Device name Maximum 15 letters The network-related serial number of the equipment appears at "serial" 000.000.000.000255.255.255.255 (Default value 000.000.000.000) 000.000.000.000255.255.255.255 (Default value 000.000.000.000) 1: Available 2: Not available 1: Available 2: Not available Maximum 127 letters Maximum 47 letters 1: Available 2: Not available
Procedur e 1
12
12
12
12 12 12 12 12
NIC
12
NIC
12
NIC NIC
1: Available 2: Not available Maximum 128 Bytes
NIC UTY
12 12 12
1: Available 2: Not available
UTY
12 12
UTY
Maximum 192 letters
12
UTY
1: Available 2: Not available 1: Available 2: Not available 1: Available 2: Not available 1: Available 2: Not available Maximum 128 Bytes
12
UTY UTY NIC NIC
12 12 12 12
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 169 07/06
2
Setting mode (08) Default Func- ALL 1 <1-3>
Code
Classification
1048
Network
Types of POP3 server
1049
Network
1050 1051
Network Network
Login name to POP3 server Login password to POP3 E-mail reception interval
1052
Network
TCP port number of POP3 client
ALL
1055
Network
TCP port number of FTP client
ALL
1059
Network
Availability of FTP server
ALL
1060
Network
TCP port number of FTP server
ALL
1060 (EFI)
Network
TCP port number of FTP server
ALL
1063
Network
MIB function
ALL
1065 1066
Network Network
1069
Network
Setting of read Community Setting of read/Write Community TRAP destination IP address
1070
Network
1073
Network
Community setting of TRAP (via IP) Availability of Raw/TCP
1073 (EFI)
Network
Availability of Raw/TCP
ALL
1074
Network
TCP port number of Raw
ALL
1075
Network
Availability of LPD client
ALL
1075 (EFI)
Network
Availability of LPD client
ALL
Items
RAM NIC
Contents
ALL
-
NIC
1: Automatic 2: POP3 3: APOP Maximum 96 letters
ALL ALL
5 <0-4096> 110 <165535> 21 <165535> 1 <1-2> 21 <165535> 50021 <165535>
NIC NIC
Maximum 96 letters Unit: Minute
12
12 12
12
NIC
12
UTY
12
NIC
1: Available 2: Not available
UTY UTY
ALL ALL
1 <1-2> public private
NIC NIC
ALL
-
UTY
ALL
public
NIC
ALL
1 <1-2> 2 <1-2>
NIC
9100 <165535> 1 <1-2> 2 <1-2>
NIC
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
Procedur e
NIC
NIC
NIC NIC
12 12
The default value is reflected by performing 08-700 when the EFI controller is connected. 1: Valid 2: Invalid Maximum 31 letters Maximum 31 letters
12
000.000.000.000255.255.255.255 (Default value 000.000.000.000) Maximum 31 letters
12
1: 2: 1: 2: *
12
*
Valid Invalid Valid Invalid The default value is reflected by performing 08-700 when the EFI controller is connected.
12 12 12
12
12
12 1: 2: 1: 2: *
Valid Invalid Valid Invalid The default value is reflected by performing 08-700 when the EFI controller is connected.
12 12
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 170 06/10
Code
Classification
1076
Network
1077 1078
Network Network
1078 (EFI)
Network
1079
Network
1080
Setting mode (08) Default Func- TCP port number of LPD ALL 515 <165535> LPD queue name ALL Availability of IPP ALL 1 <1-2> Availability of IPP ALL 2 <1-2>
ALL
Network
Availability of IPP port number “80” TCP port number of IPP
1081
Network
IPP printer name
ALL
1082 1083 1084
Network Network Network
IPP printer location IPP printer information IPP printer information (more)
ALL ALL ALL
1085
Network
Installer of IPP printer driver
ALL
1086
Network
1087
Network
1088
Network
1089
Network
IPP printer “Make and Model” IPP printer information (more) MFGR IPP message from operator Availability of FTP print
1089 (EFI)
Network
Availability of FTP print
ALL
1090 1091
Network Network
Printer user name of FTP Printer user password of FTP
ALL ALL
ALL
1 <1-2> 631 <165535> MFP_ serial
RAM
Contents
NIC NIC NIC NIC
NIC
12 Maximum 31 letters 1: Valid 2: Invalid 1: Valid 2: Invalid * The default value is reflected by performing 08-700 when the EFI controller is connected. 1: Valid 2: Invalid
NIC
12 12 12
12 12 12
NIC NIC NIC
NIC
Maximum 127 letters
12
ALL
http:// www.estudioseries.c om http:// www.estudioseries.c om -
Maximum 127 letters The network-related serial number of the equipment appears at "serial" Maximum 127 letters Maximum 127 letters Maximum 127 letters
NIC
Maximum 127 letters
12
ALL
-
NIC
Maximum 127 letters
12
ALL
-
NIC
Maximum 127 letters
12
ALL
1 <1-2> 2 <1-2>
NIC
1: 2: 1: 2: *
12
print -
NIC NIC
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
NIC
Procedur e
NIC
Available Not available Available Not available The default value is reflected by performing 08-700 when the EFI controller is connected. Maximum 31 letters Maximum 31 letters
12 12 12
12
12 12
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 171 07/06
2
Setting mode (08) Default Func- TCP port number to FTP ALL 21 print server <165535> Login name to Novell print ALL MFP_ server serial
Procedur e
Code
Classification
1092
Network
1093
Network
1094
Network
1095
Network
1096
Network
1097
Network
1098
Network
1099
Network
1100
Network
Method of SMTP server authentication
ALL
1 <1-7,10>
NIC
1101
Network
ALL
-
NIC
1102
Network
ALL
-
NIC
Maximum 64 letters
12
1103
Network
Login name for SMTP server authentication Login password for SMTP server authentication Bonjour setting
1: Valid 2: Invalid 24 letters (Valid from 0 to 9 and from A to F) 1: Disable 2: Plain 3: Login 4; Cram-MD5 5: Digest MD5 6: Kerberos 7: NTLM 10: Auto Maximum 64 letters
ALL
NIC
Network
Bonjour setting
ALL
1104
Network
Link local host name
ALL
MFP_ serial
NIC
1: Valid 2: Invalid 1: Valid 2: Invalid * The default value is reflected by performing 08-700 when the EFI controller is connected. Maximum 127 letters The network-related serial number of the equipment appears at "serial"
12
1103 (EFI)
1 <1-2> 2 <1-2>
Login password to Novell print server Name of SearchRoot server Scan rate setting of print queue Page number limitation for printing text of received Email MDN return mail setting when receiving E-mail Trap destination of IPX
RAM
Contents
NIC
12
ALL
-
NIC
Maximum 47 letters The network-related serial number of the equipment appears at "serial" Maximum 31 letters
ALL
-
NIC
Maximum 31 letters
12
ALL
5 <1-255> 5 <1-99>
NIC
Unit: Second
12
ALL ALL ALL
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 <1-2> -
NIC
12
UTY UTY UTY
NIC
12
12 12 12 12
12
12
12
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 172
Code
Classification
1105
Network
Items Service name setting
Setting mode (08) Default Func- ALL Refer to contents
1111
Network
POP Before SMTP setting
ALL
1112
Network
Host name
ALL
1113
Network
1114
Network
1117
Network
Windows domain No.1 of user authentication Sending mail text of InternetFAX SMB time-out period
1118 1119
General Network
Clearing of TAT partition Initialization of NIC information
1121
Network
1122
Network
1123
Network
PDC (Primary Domain Controller) name No.1 of authentication BDC (Backup Domain Controller) name No.1 of authentication Windows domain of device authentication
1124
Network
1125
General
1126
Counter
1130
User interface
RAM
Contents
NIC
Maximum 63 letters The network-related serial number of the equipment appears at "serial" e-STUDIO2500c: TOSHIBA e-STUDIO2500c_serial e-STUDIO3500c: TOSHIBA e-STUDIO3500c_serial e-STUDIO3510c: TOSHIBA e-STUDIO3510c_serial 1: Valid 2: Invalid Maximum 63 letters The network-related serial number of the equipment appears at "serial" Maximum 128 letters
2 <1-2> MFP_ serial
NIC
ALL
-
UTY
ALL
SYS
ALL ALL
1 <0-1> 300 <1-9999> -
SYS -
ALL
-
ALL
ALL
NIC
SYS
0: Invalid 1: Valid Unit: Second
Procedur e 12
2
12 12
12 1 1 3 3
UTY
Initializes only the information of the Network setting items. Maximum 128 letters
12
-
UTY
Maximum 128 letters
12
ALL
4 <3-4>
UTY
12
Workgroup name
ALL
UTY
Data writing of address book data import (overwriting method) Validity of interrupt copying when external counters are installed Job Build Function
ALL
workgroup 0 <0-1>
3: ON (Domain selected) 4: OFF (Work group selected) Maximum 15 letters
SYS
0: Invalid 1: Valid
1
12
ALL
0 <0-1>
SYS
0: Invalid 1: Valid
1
ALL
1 <0-1>
SYS
Sets the Job Build Function. 0: Invalid 1: Valid
1
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 173 06/10
Code
Classification
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Maximum number of time ALL 1000 job build performed <5-1000>
RAM
Contents
SYS
Sets the maximum number of time a job build has been performed. 5-1000: 5 to 1000 times Selects the default screen when entering the User Function menu by pressing the [USER FUNCTIONS] button. 0: ADDRESS 1: COUNTER 1: LCF 2: 1st drawer 3: 2nd drawer 4: PFP upper drawer 5: PFP lower drawer Sets the search method when performing a LDAP search. 0: Partial match 1: Prefix match 2: Suffix match 3: Full match Selects the restriction of the template function usage setting. 0: No restriction 1: Only available with the administrator privilege. (**:**:**:**:**:**) The address is displayed as above (6-byte data is divided by a colon at every 1 bytes). Maximum 32 digits Enter a hyphen with the [MONITOR/PAUSE] button. 0: OFF 1: ON(Enhanced bold for PCL6.) Cleared to “0” by the image quality closedloop control. Counts up with the number of printing job received after this control.
1131
User interface
1132
General
Default screen selection of the User Function menu
ALL
1 <0-1>
SYS
1135
Paper feeding
Default setting of drawers (Printer/BOX)
ALL
1 <1-5>
SYS
1138
Network
LDAP search method setting
ALL
0 <0-3>
SYS
1140
User interface
Restriction of the template function with the administrator privilege
ALL
0 <0-1>
SYS
1141
Network
Display of MAC address
ALL
-
SYS
1145
Mainte- Counter notification Remote FAX setting nance (Remote)
ALL
-
SYS
1149
General
Enhanced bold for PCL6
ALL
0 <0-1>
SYS
1371
Image processing
Accumulated counter of output pages since the performing of image quality control
ALL
0 <4 digits>
M
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
Procedur e 1
1
1
1
1
2
11
1 2
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 174 07/06
Code 1372
1376-0
Classification Image processing
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Heater and energizing time ALL 0 accumulating counter Dis<8 digits> play/0 clearing
Y
ALL
M
ALL
1376-2
C
ALL
1376-3
K
ALL
1376-1
Develop- Toner carment tridge rotation counter
RAM
Contents
M
Counts up the heater lamp control time accumulated (when power of the copier is ON) but does not count at the Sleep Mode. When the counter value of the fuser belt is cleared, this counter value is also cleared in sync at PM support mode.
1
2
0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits>
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
1378
Image processing
Fuser roller ready temperature time accumulating counter
ALL
1380
Image processing
Fuser roller printing temperature time accumulating counter
ALL
0 <8 digits>
M
1382
Image processing
Fuser roller energy saving temperature time accumulating counter Display/0 clearing
ALL
0 <8 digits>
M
1383
Image processing
Number of output pages (Thick paper 4)
ALL
0 <8 digits>
M
1385
Image processing
Number of output pages (Thick paper 1)
ALL
0 <8 digits>
M
1386
Image processing
Number of output pages (Thick paper 2)
ALL
0 <8 digits>
M
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Procedur e
M
Counts up the heater lamp control time accumulated (on standby). When the counter value of the fuser belt is cleared, this counter value is also cleared in sync at PM support mode. Counts up the heater lamp control time accumulated (during printing). When the counter value of the fuser belt is cleared, this counter value is also cleared in sync at PM support mode. Counts up the heater lamp control time accumulated (at energy saving mode). When the counter value of the fuser belt is cleared, this counter value is also cleared in sync at PM support mode. Counts up when the registration sensor is ON in the thick paper 4 mode. Counts up when the registration sensor is ON in the thick paper 1 mode. Counts up when the registration sensor is ON in the thick paper 2 mode.
1
1
1
1
1
1
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 175 07/06
Code
Classification
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Number of output pages ALL 0 (Thick paper 3) <8 digits>
RAM
Contents
M
Counts up when the registration sensor is ON in the thick paper 3 mode. Counts up when the registration sensor is ON in the OHP film mode. Does not count up when cleaning is not effective. Counts the number of times of the feeding retry from the 1st drawer. Counts the number of times of the feeding retry from the 2nd drawer. Counts the number of times of the feeding retry from the PFP upper drawer. Counts the number of times of the feeding retry from the PFP lower drawer. Counts the number of times of the feeding retry from the bypass tray. Counts the number of times of the feeding retry from the LCF. When the number of feeding retry (08-1390 to 08-1395) exceeds the setting value, the feeding retry will not be performed subsequently. In case “0” is set as a setting value, however, the feeding retry continues regardless of the counter setting value. Refer to (Note 1).
1387
Image processing
1388
Image processing
Number of output pages (OHP film)
ALL
0 <8 digits>
M
1389
Main charger
ALL
0 <8 digits>
M
1390
Paper feeding
Main charger needle electrode cleaning counter display/0 clearing Feeding retry counter (1st drawer)
ALL
0 <8 digits>
M
1391
Paper feeding
Feeding retry counter (2nd drawer)
ALL
0 <8 digits>
M
1392
Paper feeding
Feeding retry counter (PFP upper drawer)
ALL
0 <8 digits>
M
1393
Paper feeding
Feeding retry counter (PFP lower drawer)
ALL
0 <8 digits>
M
1394
Paper feeding
Feeding retry counter (bypass feed)
ALL
0 <8 digits>
M
1395
Paper feeding
Feeding retry counter (LCF)
ALL
0 <8 digits>
M
1396
Paper feeding
ALL
10 <8 digits>
M
1397
Paper feeding
ALL
10 <8 digits>
M
1398
Paper feeding
ALL
10 <8 digits>
M
1399
Paper feeding
ALL
10 <8 digits>
M
1400
Paper feeding
ALL
20 <8 digits>
M
1401
Paper feeding
Feeding retry counter upper limit value (1st drawer) Feeding retry counter upper limit value (2nd drawer) Feeding retry counter upper limit value (PFP upper drawer) Feeding retry counter upper limit value (PFP lower drawer) Feeding retry counter upper limit value (bypass feed) Feeding retry counter upper limit value (LCF)
ALL
10 <8 digits>
M
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
Procedur e 1
1
1 1
1
1
1
1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 176 07/06
Code
Classification
1410-0
Counter
1410-1 1410-2
Items Counter for period of toner cartridge rotation time
1410-3
Y M C K
Setting mode (08) Default Func- ALL 0 <8 digits> ALL 0 <8 digits> ALL 0 <8 digits> ALL 0 <8 digits> ALL 0 <8 digits>
RAM
Contents
M
Counts up the period of rotation time of toner cartridge.
M
Procedur e 4 4
M
4
M
4
1412
Counter
Counter for tab paper
1415
Image processing
Detection/control that the toner cartridge is nearly empty
ALL
1 <0-1>
M
1416-0
Image processing
Threshold for detecting that black toner cartridge is nearly empty
Threshold to display the nearempty message Remaining level threshold: 75 Remaining level threshold: 50 Remaining level threshold: 25 HDD data overwriting type setting
ALL
136800 <8 digits>
M
4
ALL
41800 <8 digits>
M
4
ALL
83600 <8 digits>
M
4
ALL
125400 <8 digits>
M
4
ALL
0 <0-2>
SYS
HDD data clearing type setting (forcible clearing)
ALL
0 <0-2>
SYS
1416-1
1416-2
1416-3
1422
Data overwrite kit
1424
Data overwrite kit
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
M
Counts up when the registration sensor is ON in the tab paper mode. Sets ON or OFF of the detection/control that the toner cartridge is nearly empty. 0: OFF 1: ON
Select the type of the overwriting level; LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH for deleting HDD data. (This setting is enabled only when the GP-1060 is installed.) 0: LOW 1: MEDIUM 2: HIGH Select the type of the overwriting level; LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH for deleting HDD data. (This setting is enabled only when the GP-1060 is installed.) 0: LOW 1: MEDIUM 2: HIGH
1
1
1
1
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 177
2
Code
Classification
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Forcible HDD data clearing ALL -
RAM
Contents
-
HDD data is cleared in the procedure set in 081424. * This setting is enabled only when the GP-1060 is installed. When this code is performed, the equipment cannot be started up. * This setting is enabled only when the GP-1060 is installed. When this code is performed, the equipment cannot be started up. * This setting is enabled only when the GP-1060 is installed. This setting is not reflected in "Right", even if the value less than 2 is set for "Back".
1426
Data overwrite kit
1427
Data overwrite kit
Forcible NVRAM data all clearing
ALL
-
-
1428
Data overwrite kit
Forcible SRAM backup data all clearing
ALL
-
-
1429
User interface
Margin width (Top/Bottom, Left/Right)
ALL
SYS
1430
Margin width (Bookbinding margin) ACC (AT_CASETTE_CHANGE) for Printer/Box printing
ALL
1431
User interface Network
ALL
Front: 7/ Back: 7 <2-100/ -100100> 14 <2-30> 1 <0-2>
1432
Network
Private-print-only mode
ALL
0 <0-1>
SYS
1435
Network
"Disable private and proof print save" function
ALL
0 <0-1>
SYS
1436
Network
"Disable fax save" function
ALL
0 <0-1>
SYS
1440
Network
IP Conflict Detect
ALL
1 <1-2>
-
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
SYS SYS
Procedur e 3
3
3
10
1 0: ACC prohibited 1: Only in the same paper direction 2: In both same direction and different directions 0: Normal 1: Private-print-only mode 0: Function OFF (no restriction on data saving or other operations) 1: Function ON (Data saving or other operations are restricted) 0: Function OFF (no restriction on data saving or other operations) 1: Function ON (Data saving or other operations are restricted OFF/ON 1: Valid 2: Invalid
1
1 1
1
12
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 178
Setting mode (08) Default Func- ALL 2 <1-2>
Code
Classification
1441
Network
SNTP Enable
1442
Network
SNTP Polling rate
ALL
1444
Network
Primary SNTP Address
1445
Network
1446
Items
RAM -
ALL
24 <1-168> -
-
Secondary SNTP Address
ALL
-
-
Network
Port number to SNTP
ALL
-
1447
Network
IPP administrator name
ALL
123 <165535> -
-
1448
Network
IPP administrator password
ALL
-
-
1449
Network
IPP authentication method
ALL
1 <1-4>
-
1450
Network
User name for IPP authentication
ALL
-
-
1451
Network
Password for IPP authentication
ALL
-
-
1464
Network
Samba server ON/OFF setting
ALL
1 <1-4>
NIC
1464 (EFI)
Network
Samba server ON/OFF setting
ALL
2 <1-4>
NIC
1468
General General
ALL (color) ALL (color)
0 <0-1> 0 <7 digits>
SYS
1469 1470
General
User data management limitation setting User data management limitation Setting by number of printouts Device authentication function setting
ALL
0 <0-1>
SYS
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
-
SYS
Contents OFF/ON 1: Valid 2: Invalid Data obtaining interval (Unit: Hour) SNTP server IP Address (Primary) SNTP server IP Address (Secondary)
Procedur e 12 12 12 12 12
This should be an account which can control all IPP jobs. This should be the password of an account which can control all IPP jobs. 1: Disabled 2: Basic 3: Digest 4: Basic Digest This should be the account at the time IPP authentication was performed. This should be the password of the account at the time IPP authentication was performed. 1: Samba enabled 2: Samba disabled 3: Print Share disabled 4: File Share disabled 1: Samba enabled 2: Samba disabled 3: Print Share disabled 4: File Share disabled * The default value is reflected by performing 08-700 when the EFI controller is connected. 0: Disabled 1: Enabled 0-9,999,999: 0-9,999,999 sheets 0: OFF 1: ON
12 12
12
12
12
12
12
1 1 1
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 179 06/10
2
Setting mode (08) Default Func- ALL 0 <0-5>
Code
Classification
1471
General
User authentication method
1472
General
1473
General
1474
General
1476
Network
ALL 0 User data management <0-1> automatic registration function setting User data management ALL 0 limitation setting (black) <0-1> ALL 0 User data management (black) <7 digits> limitation Setting by number of printouts Restriction on Address ALL 0 book operation by adminis<0-1> trator
1477
Network
Restriction on "To" ("cc") address
ALL
0 <0-3>
SYS
1478
User interface
Display of paper size setting by installation operation of drawers
ALL
SYS
1481
General
User data management clearing
ALL
JPN: 0 UC/EUR: 1 <0-1> -
1482
General
ALL
General
0 <0-1> -
SYS
1483
User data department management User data recovery
1484
Network
Authentication method of "Scan to Email"
ALL
0 <0-2>
SYS
1485
Network
Setting whether use of the Internet FAX is permitted at the time of authentication
ALL
0 <0-1>
SYS
Items
ALL
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
RAM SYS
SYS SYS SYS SYS
-
-
Contents 0: 1: 2: 3:
Procedur e
Local NTLM (NT Domain) LDAP Kerberos (Active Directory) 4: Netware 0: Disabled 1: Enabled
1
0: Disabled 1: Enabled 0-9,999,999: 0-9,999,999 sheets
1
Some restrictions can be given on the administrator for operating the Address book. 0: No restriction 1: Can be operated only under the administrator's authorization 0: No restriction 1: Can be set from both of the Address book and LDAP server 2: Can be set only from the Address book 3: Can be set only from the LDAP server 0: Not displayed 1: Displayed All the user data in the database and backup files can be deleted. 0: Disabled 1: Enabled The data in the database is overwritten with the data in the backup file. 0: Disabled 1: SMTP authentication 2: LDAP authentication 0: Not permitted 1: Permitted
1
1 1
1
1
3 1 3
1
1
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 180 06/10
Code
Classification
1487
Network
1489
Network
1491
Network
1492
Paper feeding
1493
Network
1494
Setting mode (08) Default Func- "From" address assignALL 0 <0-2> ment method at the time of authentication
Setting for "From" address edit at "Scan to Email" E-mail domain name
ALL
Detection method of 13" LG for single-size document Role Base Access Function
General
1495
1496
RAM
Contents
SYS
0: User name + @ + Domain name 1: LDAP searching 2: Use the address registered at "From" field of E-mail setting 0: Not permitted 1: Permitted 96 + 2 (delimiter) character * ASCll sequence only 0: Disabled 1: Enabled
0 <0-1> -
SYS
ALL
0 <0-1>
SYS
ALL
0 <0-1>
SYS
Limitation check method
ALL
0 <0-1>
SYS
Maintenance
Service call checking period setting
ALL
6 <0-12>
SYS
General
Operation setting for User authentication/registration
ALL
1 <0-1>
SYS
ALL
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
SYS
0: Function off (No restriction on data saving and other operations) 1: Function on (Data saving and other operations have some restrictions) 0: Checked at every page printed 1: Checked at every job printed 0: No checking period specified (= Calls service technician immediately) 0: 10 minutes 1: 30 minutes 3: 1 hour 4: 6 hours 5: 12 hours 6: 24 hours 7: 48 hours 8: 7 days 9: 1 month 10: 1 year 11: 5 years 12: Not limited (= Calls service technician if such error has occurred in the past even once or more) 0: Disables operation setting for User authentication/registration 1: Enables operation setting for User authentication/registration
Procedur e 1
2 1 11
1 1
1
1
1
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 181 07/02
Code
Classification
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Operation setting for User ALL 0 authentication/registration <0-1>
1496 (EFI)
General
1497
Elece-Filing Access Mode (for tronic Fil- Client) ing FAX Inbound FAX function (Forwarding by TSI)
1498
1530-0
Counter
Number of output pages in black mode
RAM
Contents
SYS
0: Disables operation setting for User authentication/registration 1: Enables operation setting for User authentication/registration 0: Mode 1 1: Mode 2 2: Mode 3 0: OFF (Function disabled) 1: ON (Function enabled) Counts the number of output pages printed only in the black mode. Counts the number of output pages printed in the black mode using [2IN1] or [MAGAZINE SORT]. Counts the number of sheets printed in the black mode using [2IN1] or [MAGAZINE SORT]. Counts the number of output pages printed in the black mode using [4IN1]. Counts the number of sheets printed in the black mode using [4IN1]. Counts the number of output pages printed only in the black mode.
ALL
0 <0-2>
SYS
FAX
1 <0-1>
SYS
1-UP / Duplex printing 2-UP / Duplex printing
PPC 0 (black) <8 digits>
SYS
PPC 0 (black) <8 digits>
SYS
1530-2
2-UP / Simplex printing
PPC 0 (black) <8 digits>
SYS
1530-3
4-UP / Duplex printing
PPC 0 (black) <8 digits>
SYS
1530-4
4-UP / Simplex printing
PPC 0 (black) <8 digits>
SYS
1530-7
1-UP / Simplex printing
PPC 0 (black) <8 digits>
SYS
1530-1
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
Procedur e 1
1 1
4 4
4
4
4
4
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 182
Code
Classification
1531-0
Counter
1531-1
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Number of 1-UP / PPC 0 (color) <8 digits> output pages Duplex in full color printing mode 2-UP / PPC 0 Duplex (color) <8 digits> printing
RAM
Contents
SYS
Counts the number of output pages printed only in the full color mode. Counts the number of output pages printed in the full color mode using [2IN1] or [MAGAZINE SORT]. Counts the number of sheets printed in the full color mode using [2IN1] or [MAGAZINE SORT]. Counts the number of output pages printed in the full color mode using [4IN1]. Counts the number of sheets printed in the full color mode using [4IN1]. Counts the number of output pages printed only in the full color mode. Counts the number of output pages printed only in the twin color mode. Counts the number of output pages printed in the twin color mode using [2IN1] or [MAGAZINE SORT]. Counts the number of sheets printed in the twin color mode using [2IN1] or [MAGAZINE SORT]. Counts the number of output pages printed in the twin color mode using [4IN1]. Counts the number of sheets printed in the twin color mode using [4IN1]. Counts the number of output pages printed only in the twin color mode.
SYS
1531-2
2-UP / Simplex printing
PPC (color)
0 <8 digits>
SYS
1531-3
4-UP / Duplex printing
PPC (color)
0 <8 digits>
SYS
1531-4
4-UP / Simplex printing
PPC (color)
0 <8 digits>
SYS
1531-7
1-UP / Simplex printing
PPC (color)
0 <8 digits>
SYS
1-UP / Duplex printing
PPC (color)
0 <8 digits>
SYS
2-UP / Duplex printing
PPC (color)
0 <8 digits>
SYS
1532-2
2-UP / Simplex printing
PPC (color)
0 <8 digits>
SYS
1532-3
4-UP / Duplex printing
PPC (color)
0 <8 digits>
SYS
1532-4
4-UP / Simplex printing
PPC (color)
0 <8 digits>
SYS
1532-7
1-UP / Simplex printing
PPC (color)
0 <8 digits>
SYS
1532-0
1532-1
Counter
Number of output pages at Twin Color / Monocolor Mode in Copier Function
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Procedur e 4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 183 06/10
2
Code
Classification
1533-0
Counter
1533-1
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Number of 1-UP / PRT 0 (black) <8 digits> output pages Duplex of the printer printing or BOX PRT 0 2-UP / (black) <8 digits> Duplex printing
RAM
Contents
SYS
Counts the number of output pages printed in the black mode. Counts the number of output pages printed in the black mode using [2IN1] or [MAGAZINE SORT]. * When printing is performed using a Windows driver, the 1-UP image will be output. Counts the number of sheets printed in the black mode using [2IN1] or [MAGAZINE SORT]. Counts the number of output pages printed in the black mode using [4IN1]. Counts the number of sheets printed in the black mode using [4IN1]. Counts the number of output pages printed in the black mode using [N IN1]. Counts the number of sheets printed in the black mode using [N IN1]. Counts the number of output pages printed only in the black mode.
SYS
1533-2
2-UP / Simplex printing
PRT 0 (black) <8 digits>
SYS
1533-3
4-UP / Duplex printing
PRT 0 (black) <8 digits>
SYS
1533-4
4-UP / Simplex printing
PRT 0 (black) <8 digits>
SYS
1533-5
N-UP / Duplex printing
PRT 0 (black) <8 digits>
SYS
1533-6
N-UP / Simplex printing
PRT 0 (black) <8 digits>
SYS
1533-7
1-UP / Simplex printing
PRT 0 (black) <8 digits>
SYS
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
Procedur e 4 4
4
4
4
4
4
4
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 184
Code
Classification
1534-0
Counter
1534-1
Setting mode (08) Default Func- 1-UP / PRT 0 Number of (color) <8 digits> output pages Duplex printing of the printer or BOX (Full color) 2-UP / PRT 0 Duplex (color) <8 digits> printing
RAM
Contents
SYS
Counts the number of output pages printed only in the full color mode. Counts the number of output pages printed in the full color mode using [2IN1] or [MAGAZINE SORT]. * When printing is performed using a Windows driver, the 1-UP image will be output. Counts the number of sheets printed in the full color mode using [2IN1] or [MAGAZINE SORT]. Counts the number of output pages printed in the full color mode using [4IN1]. Counts the number of sheets printed in the full color mode using [4IN1]. Counts the number of output pages printed in the full color mode using [N IN1]. Counts the number of sheets printed in the full color mode using [N IN1]. Counts the number of output pages printed only in the full color mode. Counts the number of output pages in the default settings.
SYS
1534-2
2-UP / Simplex printing
PRT (color)
0 <8 digits>
SYS
1534-3
4-UP / Duplex printing
PRT (color)
0 <8 digits>
SYS
1534-4
4-UP / Simplex printing
PRT (color)
0 <8 digits>
SYS
1534-5
N-UP / Duplex printing
PRT (color)
0 <8 digits>
SYS
1534-6
N-UP / Simplex printing
PRT (color)
0 <8 digits>
SYS
1534-7
1-UP / Simplex printing
PRT (color)
0 <8 digits>
SYS
FAX 0 (black) <8 digits>
SYS
0 FAX (black) <8 digits>
SYS
1535-0
Wireless LAN Wireless LAN Wireless LAN
1-UP / Number of output pages Duplex printing of the FAX printing 1-UP / (1-UP / Simplex Duplex printprinting ing) Wireless LAN driver SSID Wireless LAN driver Network type Wireless LAN driver Security
Wireless LAN
Wireless LAN driver Encryption system
Counter
1535-7
1661 1662 1663
1664
Procedur e 4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4 4
ALL
-
-
Maximum 32 letters
12
ALL
1 <1-2> 4 <1-7>
-
1: Infrastructure 2: Ad-Hoc 1: 802.1x 2: WPA-PSK 3: WEP 4: NONE 5: WPA 6: WPA2 7: WPA2PSK 1: TKIP 2: AES 3: Dynamic WEP
12
ALL
ALL
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
1 <1-3>
-
-
12
12
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 185 07/09
2
1665
Wireless LAN
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Wireless LAN driver ALL 1 Transmission output power <1-5>
1666
Wireless LAN Wireless LAN
Wireless LAN driver Transmission rate Wireless LAN driver Transmission rate value
Wireless LAN Wireless LAN Wireless LAN Wireless LAN Wireless LAN Wireless LAN Wireless LAN Wireless LAN Wireless LAN
Wireless LAN driver Operation channel Wireless LAN driver Operation channel value Wireless LAN driver WEP bit number Wireless LAN driver WEP key entry system Wireless LAN driver WEP key value Wireless LAN driver WPA-PSK passphrase Wireless LAN driver Sleep mode setting Wireless LAN driver Slot-time limitation Wireless LAN driver Number of times of software retry Wireless LAN driver Preamble Wireless LAN driver Operation mode Wireless LAN supplicant Wireless LAN setting
Code
1667
1668 1669 1670 1671 1672 1673 1674 1675 1676 1677 1678 1679
Classification
Wireless LAN Wireless LAN Wireless LAN
ALL ALL
ALL
1 <1-2> 1 <1-12>
RAM -
1: 100% 3: 25% 5: min 1: Auto 1: 1 3: 5.5 5: 6 7: 12 9: 24 10: 36 11: 48 12: 54 1: Auto
-
1:64 3: 152 1: Hex
ALL
1 <1-2> 1 <1-11> 1 <1-3> 2 <1-2> -
ALL ALL
ALL ALL ALL
ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL
-
Contents
12
2: Manual
12
2: 2 4: 11 6: 9 8: 18
12
2: Manual
12 12
2: 128
12
2: ASCII
12
-
Maximum 32 letters
12
-
-
Maximum 64 letters
12
1 <1-3> 1 <1-2> 5 <0-1000>
-
1: Off 2: Max 3: Normal 1: Long 2: Short
12
1 <1-2> 1 <1-3> 1 <1-3>
-
12 12
-
1: Long
2: Longshort
12
-
1: All 2: 11b 3: 11g This setting is whether the wireless LAN connection is enabled or disabled. 1: Unset 2: Enabled 3: Disabled This should be the path name in full where the client certificate is located. (Maximum 255 letters) This should be the path name in full where the client certificate is located. (Maximum 255 letters) This should be the path name in full where the CA self-certificate is located. (Maximum 255 letters)
12
-
1681
Wireless LAN
Wireless LAN supplicant Path name for client certificate
ALL
-
-
1682
Wireless LAN
Wireless LAN supplicant Path name for secret key of client certificate
ALL
-
-
1684
Wireless LAN
Wireless LAN supplicant Path name for CA self-certificate
ALL
-
-
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2: 50% 4: 12.5%
-
Procedur e
12
12
12
12
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 186 06/10
1685
Wireless LAN
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Wireless LAN supplicant ALL EAP user name
1686
Wireless LAN
Wireless LAN supplicant EAP user name
ALL
-
-
1689
Wireless LAN
Wireless LAN supplicant Authentication interval
ALL
30 <3065535>
-
1690
Wireless LAN
Wireless LAN supplicant Holding interval
ALL
60 <6065535>
-
1691
Wireless LAN
Wireless LAN supplicant EAPOL-Start Number of times of packet retry
ALL
3 <165535>
-
1692
Wireless LAN
Wireless LAN supplicant Session resume
ALL
2 <1-2>
-
1693
Wireless LAN
Wireless LAN supplicant MAC Frame size
ALL
1398 <1-1398>
-
1696
Wireless LAN
Wireless LAN supplicant Device file setting for obtaining random number
ALL
/AGB/ dev/random
-
1697
Wireless LAN
Wireless LAN supplicant CRL directory designation
ALL
-
-
1699
Wireless LAN
Wireless LAN supplicant EAP authentication type
ALL
1 <1-3>
-
Code
Classification
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
RAM
Contents
-
This should be the user name when the EAPTLS is used. This should be the user name when the PEAP is used. This should be the timeout interval between EAP responses. 30: 30 seconds The EAP authentication will start after having been waited in this period when an EAP failure was received. 60: 60 seconds When an EAPOL-Start packet has been sent and the request ID cannot be received, this EAPOL-Start packet will be re-sent for the number of times set in this code. 3: 3 times This setting is whether the pre-master key should be updated or not upon a TLS renegotiation. 1: Session is resumed 2: Session is not resumed This is a MAC frame size used in the wireless LAN connection. The data is fragmented into this size. 1398: 1398 bytes This should be the device file name which can obtain a seed to initialize the WEP PRNG for xsupplicant. (Maximum 255 letters) This should be the path name of the directory in full where the CRL file is located. (Maximum 255 letters) This setting is for the EAP authentication type which xsupplicant can authenticate. 1: EAP-TLS 2: PEAP 3: EAP-TLS and PEAP
Procedur e 12 12 12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 187 06/10
2
Code
Classification
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Wireless LAN supplicant ALL CN name
1700
Wireless LAN
1701
Wireless LAN Wireless LAN
Wireless LAN supplicant CN name check Wireless LAN supplicant Update interval of PTK (Pairwise Transient Key)
1705
Wireless LAN
Wireless LAN supplicant Strict packet check
1706
Wireless LAN
1707
Wireless LAN
1704
1708
1710 1711 1712 1713
Bluetooth Bluetooth Bluetooth Bluetooth
ALL
RAM -
1 <1-2> 0 <0-720>
-
ALL
1 <1-2>
-
Wireless LAN supplicant Priority change at 4-way handshake
ALL
1 <1-2>
-
Wireless LAN supplicant Security level
ALL
1 <1-3>
-
Selectable security level (EAP-TLS)
ALL
1 <1-3>
-
Bluetooth ON/OFF setting Bluetooth Device name Bluetooth Discovery Bluetooth Security
ALL
1 <0-1> MFP
SYS
1 <0-1> 1 <0-1>
SYS
ALL
ALL ALL ALL
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
-
SYS
SYS
Contents
Procedur e
This should be an authentication server name (basically a domain name in full). (Maximum 255 letters) 1: NO 2: YES
12
The update interval of a secret key across AP (Access Point) and STA (Station) can be set. This interval is for updating the secret key from STA. 0: Not updated 1-720: 1-720 minutes of interval The Ack bit and request bit of EAPOL-Key is checked. 1: Not checked 2: Checked A higher priority is given to the xsupplicant task when a 4-way handshake is started. 1: Priority not changed 2: Priority changed The encryption capability output in TLS clientHello message can be selected. 1: LOW 2: MIDDLE 3: HIGH These are the security level which can be selected from the user interface. This setting is not applied in case of PEAP. ("LOW" and "MIDDLE" is mandatory for PEAP) 1: LOW + MIDDLE + HIGH 2: MIDDLE + HIGH 3: HIGH 0: OFF 1: ON Maximum 32 letters
12
0: Not allowed 1: Allowed 0: Security function OFF 1: Security function ON
12
12
12
12
12
1 11 1 1
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 188 06/10
Code 1714
Classification Bluetooth
Items Bluetooth PIN
Setting mode (08) Default Func- ALL 0000
RAM
Contents
SYS
Maximum 8 digits (8-digit sequence) This setting is valid only when the bluetooth security function is ON. 0: Not encrypted 1: Encrypted This setting is valid only when the bluetooth security function is ON. 0: Fit page 1: 1/2 size 2: 1/4 size 3: 1/8 size IP filter minimum area 1 000.000.000.000255.255.255.255 (Default value: 000.000.000.000) IP filter maximum area 1 000.000.000.000255.255.255.255 (Default value: 000.000.000.000) IP filter minimum area 2 000.000.000.000255.255.255.255 (Default value: 000.000.000.000) IP filter maximum area 2 000.000.000.000255.255.255.255 (Default value: 000.000.000.000) IP filter minimum area 3 000.000.000.000255.255.255.255 (Default value: 000.000.000.000) IP filter maximum area 3 000.000.000.000255.255.255.255 (Default value: 000.000.000.000) IP filter minimum area 4 000.000.000.000255.255.255.255 (Default value: 000.000.000.000) IP filter maximum area 4 000.000.000.000255.255.255.255 (Default value: 000.000.000.000)
1715
Bluetooth
Bluetooth Data encryption
ALL
1 <0-1>
SYS
1719
Bluetooth
Bluetooth BIP Print type
ALL
0 <0-3>
SYS
1720
Network
IP address range for IP filter (Minimum area 1)
ALL
-
-
1721
Network
IP address range for IP filter (Maximum area 1)
ALL
-
-
1722
Network
IP address range for IP filter I (Minimum area 2)
ALL
-
-
1723
Network
IP address range for IP filter (Maximum area 2)
ALL
-
-
1724
Network
IP address range for IP filter (Minimum area 3)
ALL
-
-
1725
Network
IP address range for IP filter (Maximum area 3)
ALL
-
-
1726
Network
IP address range for IP filter (Minimum area 4)
ALL
-
-
1727
Network
IP address range for IP filter (Maximum area 4)
ALL
-
-
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Procedur e 11
2 1
1
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 189
Setting mode (08) Default Func- IP address range for IP filALL ter (Minimum area 5)
Code
Classification
1728
Network
1729
Network
IP address range for IP filter (Maximum area 5)
ALL
-
-
1730
Network
IP address range for IP filter (Minimum area 6)
ALL
-
-
1731
Network
IP address range for IP filter (Maximum area 6)
ALL
-
-
1732
Network
IP address range for IP filter (Minimum area 7)
ALL
-
-
1733
Network
IP address range for IP filter (Maximum area 7)
ALL
-
-
1734
Network
IP address range for IP filter (Minimum area 8)
ALL
-
-
1735
Network
IP address range for IP filter (Maximum area 8)
ALL
-
-
1736
Network
IP address range for IP filter (Minimum area 9)
ALL
-
-
1737
Network
IP address range for IP filter (Maximum area 9)
ALL
-
-
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
RAM
Contents
-
IP filter minimum area 5 000.000.000.000255.255.255.255 (Default value: 000.000.000.000) IP filter maximum area 5 000.000.000.000255.255.255.255 (Default value: 000.000.000.000) IP filter minimum area 6 000.000.000.000255.255.255.255 (Default value: 000.000.000.000) IP filter maximum area 6 000.000.000.000255.255.255.255 (Default value: 000.000.000.000) IP filter minimum area 7 000.000.000.000255.255.255.255 (Default value: 000.000.000.000) IP filter maximum area 7 000.000.000.000255.255.255.255 (Default value: 000.000.000.000) IP filter minimum area 8 000.000.000.000255.255.255.255 (Default value: 000.000.000.000) IP filter maximum area 8 000.000.000.000255.255.255.255 (Default value: 000.000.000.000) IP filter minimum area 9 000.000.000.000255.255.255.255 (Default value: 000.000.000.000) IP filter maximum area 9 000.000.000.000255.255.255.255 (Default value: 000.000.000.000)
Procedur e 12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 190
Code
Classification
1738
Network
Setting mode (08) Default Func- IP address range for IP filALL ter (Minimum area 10)
RAM
Contents
-
IP filter minimum area 10 000.000.000.000255.255.255.255 (Default value: 000.000.000.000) IP filter maximum area 10 000.000.000.000255.255.255.255 (Default value: 000.000.000.000) 1: Enabled 2: Disabled SSL HTTP server port number
1739
Network
IP address range for IP filter (Maximum area 10)
ALL
-
-
1740
Network
ALL
Network
1742
Network
1743
Network
1744
Network
SSL setting SSL ftp server OFF/ON
ALL
2 <1-2> 10443 <165535> 2 <1-2> 443 <165535> 2 <1-2>
-
1741
SSL setting SSL ftp server OFF/ON SSL setting HTTP server port number
1745
Network
SSL setting SSL ftp server Port
ALL
1746
Network
SSL setting SSL LDAP Client OFF/ON
ALL
1747
Network
SSL setting SSL LDAP Client Port
ALL
1748
Network
SSL setting SSL POP3 Client OFF/ON
ALL
1749
Network
SSL setting SSL POP3 Client Port
ALL
SSL setting IPP server OFF/ON setting SSL setting IPP server port number
ALL ALL ALL
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
990 <165535> 2 <1-3>
636 <165535> 2 <1-3>
995 <165535>
-
-
-
Procedur e 12
2 12
12 12
1: Enabled 2: Disabled SSL IPP server port number
12
OFF/ON 1: Valid 2: Invalid Port number to FTP Server
12
OFF/ON 1: Valid (Accepts all the certification of the server) 2: Invalid 3: Use the imported certification. Port number to LDAP Server
12
OFF/ON 1: Valid (Accepts all the certification of the server) 2: Invalid 3: Use the imported certification. Port number to POP3 Server
12
12
12
12
12
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 191 06/10
Setting mode (08) Default Func- SSL setting ALL 2 SSL SMTP Client OFF/ON <2-6>
Code
Classification
1750
Network
1755
Network
Enabling server's IP address acquired by DHCP
ALL
1 <1-2>
-
1756
Network
Enabling server's IP address acquired by DHCP
ALL
1 <1-2>
-
1757
Network
Enabling server's IP address acquired by DHCP
ALL
2 <1-2>
-
1759
Network
Enabling server's IP address acquired by DHCP
ALL
2 <1-2>
-
ALL
2 <1-2>
-
1760
SMTP Server Option (69) Simple Mail Server Address POP3 Server Option (70) Post Office Server Address
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
RAM
Contents
-
OFF/ON 2: Invalid 3: SMTP with TLS (STARTTLS) Accept all the certification of the server. 4: SMTPS (SMTP over SSL) Accept all the certification of the server. 5: SMTP with TLS (STARTTLS) Use the imported certification. 6: SMTPS (SMTP over SSL) Use the imported certification. Domain Name Server option (6) 1: Enabled 2: Disabled * This value is used only when DHCP is enabled. NetBIOS over TCP/IP Name Server option (44) = Primary and Secondary Wins NAME 1: Enabled 2: Disabled * This value is used only when DHCP is enabled. The Host Name Vendor Extension option (12) 1: Enabled 2: Disabled This value is used only when DHCP is enabled. OFF/ON 1: Valid 2: Invalid
OFF/ON 1: Valid 2: Invalid
Procedur e 12
12
12
12
12
12
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 192 06/10
Code
Classification
1762
Network
1764
Wireless LAN
1765
Wireless LAN
1766
Wireless LAN
1767
Network
1768
Network
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Enabling server's IP ALL 2 address acquired by DHCP <1-2>
Wireless LAN supplicant Control sequence setting of "Cipher Suite" Wireless LAN supplicant Path name for user certificate Wireless LAN supplicant Path name entered for CA self-certificate Enabling server's IP address acquired by DHCP
Previous IP address
Procedur e
RAM
Contents
-
12
12
ALL
-
-
SNTP Server Option (42) NTP Server Address 1: Enabled 2: Disabled * This value is used only when DHCP is enabled. Maximum 255 letters
ALL
-
-
Maximum 63 letters
12
ALL
-
-
Maximum 63 letters
12
ALL
1 <1-2>
-
12
ALL
-
-
DNS domain name Option (15) DNS domain name of the client 1: Enabled 2: Disabled * This value is used only when DHCP is enabled. 000.000.000.000255.255.255.255 (Default value: 000.000.000.000)
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2
12
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 193 07/06
Code
Classification
1772
General
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Card reading device setALL 0 ting <8 digits>
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
RAM
Contents
SYS
To enable the e-Bridge ID Gate, a card reading device should be set in the order of "ABYYZZZZ". (Enter the corresponding values to "A", "B", "YY" and "ZZZZ".) - AB:Special setting - A :Debugging NIC 0: Not used 1: Used - B :Interface 0: USB connection 1: N/A - YY: Authentication 00: No authentication using a noncontact IC card 02: Authentication using a noncontact IC card (KP-2003) 03: Authentication using a noncontact IC card (KP-2005) 04: Authentication using a noncontact IC card (KP-2004) - ZZZZ: Sub-code 0000: No authentication using a noncontact IC card 0001: Use CSN (Card Serial Number) of a noncontact IC card 0002: Use the Data Area Address Information of a noncontact IC card
Procedur e 5
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 194
Code
Classification
1773
General
1774
General
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Card reader format inforALL mation -1
Card reader format information -2
ALL
-
RAM
Contents
SYS
To access the data in the noncontact IC card, the Key Information "LLLL" and the Sector Number "MMMM" should be set. The "LLLL" should be set first, and then "MMMM". KP-2003: LLLL: System code (hexadecimal number) MMMM: Service code (hexadecimal number)
SYS
KP-2005: LLLL : Key information MMMM: Sector number (hexadecimal number) The data of the block number in the noncontact IC is set. KP-2003: PP:1st block Q: 1st block beginning byte R: 1st block endingbyte SS:2nd block T: 2nd block beginning byte U: 2nd block ending byte
Procedur e 5
2
5
KP-2005: RR:00 (Fixed) B: 1st area block number S: 1st area beginning byte offset E: 1st area ending byte offset b: 2nd area block number s: 2nd area beginning byte offset e: 2nd area ending byte offset * If the 2nd block/area is not used, set the SSTU to "FFFF" (hexadecimal number), the bse to"FFF" (hexadecimal number).
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 195 07/06
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Card reader format inforALL mation -3
Code
Classification
1775
General
1776
General
Card authentication LDAP server
ALL
0 <0-100>
SYS
1778
General
Period for locking the control panel when an incorrect administrator password has been entered 3 consecutive times
ALL
1 <0-7>
SYS
1779
Network
Default data saving directory of "Scan to File"
ALL
0 <0-2>
SYS
1780
User interface
ALL
0 <0-1>
SYS
1781-0
Network
Converting 1-byte katakana into 2 byte-katakana at e-mail transmission Notification of When job scan job completed On error
ALL
0 <0-1> 0 <0-1>
SYS
0 <0-6>
SYS
1781-1 1782
Network
File name format of "Save as file" and Email transmission
ALL ALL
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
Procedur e
RAM
Contents
SYS
Security key “KKKKKKKKKKKK” (12 digits) in the [Key Information] of the [Sector Number] set in the code 08-1773 should be entered. LDAP server number for the card authentication when a noncontact IC card is used should be set. 0: 0 min. 1: 0.5 min. (30 sec.) 2: 1 min. 3: 3 min. 4: 5 min. 5: 10 min. 6: 15 min. 7: 30 min. 0: Local directory 1: REMOTE 1 2: REMOTE 2 0: Non-conversion 1: With conversion
5
Sets the notification method of scan job completion. 0: Invalid 1: Valid Sets the file naming method for "Save as file" and Email transmission. 0: [FileName]-[Data][Page] 1: [FileName]-[Page][Data] 2: [Data]-[FileName][Page] 3: [Data]-[Page]-[FileName] 4: [Page]-[FileName][Data] 5: [Page]-[Data]-[FileName] 6: [HostName]_[Data][Page]
4
SYS
1
1
1 1
4 1
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 196 07/06
Code
Classification
1783
Network
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Date display format of the ALL 0 <0-5> file name of "Save as file" and Email transmission
RAM
Contents
SYS
Sets the data display format of the file for "Save as file" and Email transmission. 0: [YYYY][MM][DD][H H][mm][SS] 1: [YY][MM][DD][HH][ mm][SS] 2: [YYYY][MM][DD] 3: [YY][MM][DD] 4: [HH][mm][SS] 5: [YYYY][MM][DD][H H][mm][SS][mm0]
1784
Network
Single page data saving directory at "Save as file"
ALL
0 <0-1>
SYS
1785
Network
ALL
4 <3-6>
SYS
1786
Network
Page number display format of the file of "Save as file" and Email transmission Extension (suffix) format of the file of "Save as file"
ALL
3 <3-6>
SYS
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
The order of [YY], [MM] and [DD] varies depending on the setting of the code 08-640 (Data display format). Sets the directory where the file of "Save as file" is saved. 0: Save it under a subfolder 1: Save it without creating a subfolder Sets the digit of a page number attached on the file. 3-6: 3-6 digits Sets the extension digits of the file to be saved. 3: Auto 4: 4 digits 5: 5 digits 6: 6 digits
Procedur e 1
2
1
1
1
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 197 07/06
Code
Classification
1790-0
General
1790-1 1790-2 1790-3 1790-4 1790-5 1790-6 1790-7 1790-8 1790-9 1790-10 1790-11 1790-12 1790-13 1790-14 1790-15 1790-16 1790-17 1790-18 1790-19 1790-20 1790-21 1790-22 1790-23
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Available pro- PS_OP_ ALL file display 00.icc PS_OP_ ALL 01.icc PS_OP_ ALL 02.icc PS_OP_ ALL 03.icc PS_OP_ ALL 04.icc PS_OP_ ALL 05.icc PS_OP_ ALL 06.icc PS_OP_ ALL 07.icc PS_OP_ ALL 08.icc PS_OP_ ALL 09.icc PS_OP_ ALL 10.ICC PS_OP_ ALL 11.icc PS_OP_ ALL 12.icc PS_OP_ ALL 13.icc PS_OP_ ALL 14.icc PS_OP_ ALL 15.icc PS_OP_ ALL 16.icc PS_OP_ ALL 17.icc PS_OP_ ALL 18.icc PS_OP_ ALL 19.icc PS_OP_ ALL 20.ICC PS_OP_ ALL 21.icc PS_OP_ ALL 22.icc PS_OP_ ALL 23.icc
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
RAM SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS
Contents Displaying the current Output Profile and PG CIEBasedPureGrayTRC attribute (PG CIEBasedPureGrayTRC attribute in the same sub-code is displayed at the same time.)
Procedur e 14 14 14 14 14
SYS
14
SYS
14
SYS
14
SYS
14
SYS
14
SYS
14
SYS
14
SYS
14
SYS
14
SYS
14
SYS
14
SYS
14
SYS
14
SYS
14
SYS
14
SYS
14
SYS
14
SYS
14
SYS
14
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 198
Code
Classification
1791
General
1792
General
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Recovery of the profile at ALL 0 the shipment <0-23>
Copying the profile at the shipment to USB memory
ALL
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
0 <0-23>
RAM
Contents
SYS
Recovers the default Output Profile and PG CIEBasedPureGrayTRC (PG CIEBasedPureGrayTRC in the same sub-code is recovered to the default.) 0: PS_OP_00 1: PS_OP_01 2: PS_OP_02 3: PS_OP_03 4: PS_OP_04 5: PS_OP_05 6: PS_OP_06 7: PS_OP_07 8: PS_OP_08 9: PS_OP_09 10: PS_OP_10 11: PS_OP_11 12: PS_OP_12 13: PS_OP_13 14: PS_OP_14 15: PS_OP_15 16: PS_OP_16 17: PS_OP_17 18: PS_OP_18 19: PS_OP_19 20: PS_OP_20 21: PS_OP_21 22: PS_OP_22 23: PS_OP_23 Copies the default Output Profile and PG CIEBasedPureGrayTRC to the USB memory. 0: PS_OP_00 1: PS_OP_01 2: PS_OP_02 3: PS_OP_03 4: PS_OP_04 5: PS_OP_05 6: PS_OP_06 7: PS_OP_07 8: PS_OP_08 9: PS_OP_09 10: PS_OP_10 11: PS_OP_11 12: PS_OP_12 13: PS_OP_13 14: PS_OP_14 15: PS_OP_15 16: PS_OP_16 17: PS_OP_17 18: PS_OP_18 19: PS_OP_19 20: PS_OP_20 21: PS_OP_21 22: PS_OP_22 23: PS_OP_23
SYS
Procedur e 1
2
1
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 199
Code
Classification
1793
General
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Uploading the profile at the ALL 0 <0-23> shipment from UBS memory
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
RAM SYS
Contents Uploads the default Output Profile and PG CIEBasedPureGrayTRC from the USB memory. 0: PS_OP_00 1: PS_OP_01 2: PS_OP_02 3: PS_OP_03 4: PS_OP_04 5: PS_OP_05 6: PS_OP_06 7: PS_OP_07 8: PS_OP_08 9: PS_OP_09 10: PS_OP_10 11: PS_OP_11 12: PS_OP_12 13: PS_OP_13 14: PS_OP_14 15: PS_OP_15 16: PS_OP_16 17: PS_OP_17 18: PS_OP_18 19: PS_OP_19 20: PS_OP_20 21: PS_OP_21 22: PS_OP_22 23: PS_OP_23
Procedur e 1
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 200
Code
Classification
1794-0
General
1794-1 1794-2 1794-3 1794-4 1794-5 1794-6 1794-7 1794-8 1794-9 1794-10 1794-11 1794-12 1794-13 1794-14 1794-15 1794-16 1794-17 1794-18 1794-19 1794-20 1794-21 1794-22 1794-23
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Displaying the PS_OP_ ALL attribute of the 00.000 profile at the PS_OP_ ALL shipment 01.000 PS_OP_ ALL 02.000 PS_OP_ ALL 03.000 PS_OP_ ALL 04.000 PS_OP_ ALL 05.000 PS_OP_ ALL 06.000 PS_OP_ ALL 07.000 PS_OP_ ALL 08.000 PS_OP_ ALL 09.000 PS_OP_ ALL 10.000 PS_OP_ ALL 11.000 PS_OP_ ALL 12.000 PS_OP_ ALL 13.000 PS_OP_ ALL 14.000 PS_OP_ ALL 15.000 PS_OP_ ALL 16.000 PS_OP_ ALL 17.000 PS_OP_ ALL 18.000 PS_OP_ ALL 19.000 PS_OP_ ALL 20.000 PS_OP_ ALL 21.000 PS_OP_ ALL 22.000 PS_OP_ ALL 23.000
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
RAM SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS
Contents Displays the default Output Profile and PG CIEBasedPureGrayTRC attribute. (PG CIEBasedPureGrayTRC attribute in the same sub-code is displayed at the same time.)
Procedur e 14 14 14 14 14
SYS
14
SYS
14
SYS
14
SYS
14
SYS
14
SYS
14
SYS
14
SYS
14
SYS
14
SYS
14
SYS
14
SYS
14
SYS
14
SYS
14
SYS
14
SYS
14
SYS
14
SYS
14
SYS
14
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 201
2
Code
Classification
1795
General
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Making the profile available ALL 0 <0-23>
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
RAM
Contents
SYS
Selecting a profile Overwrites the adjusted Output Profile on the current area (PG CIEBasedPureGrayTRC in the same sub-code is replaced with the adjusted profile at the same time.) 0: PS_OP_00 1: PS_OP_01 2: PS_OP_02 3: PS_OP_03 4: PS_OP_04 5: PS_OP_05 6: PS_OP_06 7: PS_OP_07 8: PS_OP_08 9: PS_OP_09 10: PS_OP_10 11: PS_OP_11 12: PS_OP_12 13: PS_OP_13 14: PS_OP_14 15: PS_OP_15 16: PS_OP_16 17: PS_OP_17 18: PS_OP_18 19: PS_OP_19 20: PS_OP_20 21: PS_OP_21 22: PS_OP_22 23: PS_OP_23
Procedur e 1
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 202
Code
Classification
1796
General
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Copying the adjusted proALL 0 file to USB memory <0-23>
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
RAM
Contents
SYS
Copies the adjusted Output Profile and PG CIEBasedPureGrayTRC to the USB memory. (PG CIEBasedPureGrayTRC in the same sub-code is copied to the USB memory at the same time.) 0: PS_OP_00 1: PS_OP_01 2: PS_OP_02 3: PS_OP_03 4: PS_OP_04 5: PS_OP_05 6: PS_OP_06 7: PS_OP_07 8: PS_OP_08 9: PS_OP_09 10: PS_OP_10 11: PS_OP_11 12: PS_OP_12 13: PS_OP_13 14: PS_OP_14 15: PS_OP_15 16: PS_OP_16 17: PS_OP_17 18: PS_OP_18 19: PS_OP_19 20: PS_OP_20 21: PS_OP_21 22: PS_OP_22 23: PS_OP_23
Procedur e 1
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 203
2
Code
Classification
1797
General
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Uploading the adjusted ALL 0 profile from USB memory <0-23>
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
RAM
Contents
SYS
Uploads the Output Profile and PG CIEBasedPureGrayTRC from the USB memory. 0: PS_OP_00 1: PS_OP_01 2: PS_OP_02 3: PS_OP_03 4: PS_OP_04 5: PS_OP_05 6: PS_OP_06 7: PS_OP_07 8: PS_OP_08 9: PS_OP_09 10: PS_OP_10 11: PS_OP_11 12: PS_OP_12 13: PS_OP_13 14: PS_OP_14 15: PS_OP_15 16: PS_OP_16 17: PS_OP_17 18: PS_OP_18 19: PS_OP_19 20: PS_OP_20 21: PS_OP_21 22: PS_OP_22 23: PS_OP_23
Procedur e 1
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 204 06/10
Code
Classification
1798-0
General
1798-1 1798-2 1798-3 1798-4 1798-5 1798-6 1798-7 1798-8 1798-9 1798-10 1798-11 1798-12 1798-13 1798-14 1798-15 1798-16 1798-17 1798-18 1798-19 1798-20 1798-21 1798-22 1798-23 1902
Fuser
1903
Fuser
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Displaying the PS_OP_ ALL attribute of the 00.001 profile at the PS_OP_ ALL shipment 01.001 PS_OP_ ALL 02.001 PS_OP_ ALL 03.001 PS_OP_ ALL 04.001 PS_OP_ ALL 05.001 PS_OP_ ALL 06.001 PS_OP_ ALL 07.001 PS_OP_ ALL 08.001 PS_OP_ ALL 09.001 PS_OP_ ALL 10.001 PS_OP_ ALL 11.001 PS_OP_ ALL 12.001 PS_OP_ ALL 13.001 PS_OP_ ALL 14.001 PS_OP_ ALL 15.001 PS_OP_ ALL 16.001 PS_OP_ ALL 17.001 PS_OP_ ALL 18.001 PS_OP_ ALL 19.001 PS_OP_ ALL 20.001 PS_OP_ ALL 21.001 PS_OP_ ALL 22.001 PS_OP_ ALL 23.001 ALL 0 Fusing error temperature <0-255> (Temperature of the fuser belt center thermopiles) ALL 0 Fusing error temperature (Temperature of the fuser <0-255> belt rear thermopiles)
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
RAM SYS SYS SYS
Contents Displays the adjusted Output Profile and PG CIEBasedPureGrayTRC attribute in the same sub-code.
Procedur e 14 14 14
SYS
14
SYS
14
SYS
14
SYS
14
SYS
14
SYS
14
SYS
14
SYS
14
SYS
14
SYS
14
SYS
14
SYS
14
SYS
14
SYS
14
SYS
14
SYS
14
SYS
14
SYS
14
SYS
14
SYS
14
SYS
14
M
1
M
1
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 205 08/05
2
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Fusing error temperature ALL 0 <0-255> (Temperature of the heat roller front thermistor) Fusing error temperature ALL 0 (Temperature of the pres<0-255> sure roller center thermistor) Manual stapling time-out ALL 15 period <0-30> Finisher model switching ALL 0 setting value <0-1> Addition of the page numALL 0 ber to the multi-page file <0-1> name of a File/Email
Code
Classification
1904
Fuser
1905
Fuser
1911
1913
Paper feeding Paper feeding General
1914
General
1916
General
1920
Network
1921
Network
1922
Network
1923
Network
1924
Network
1925
Network
1926
FAX
1927
Network
1928
Network
1929
User interface
Key arrangement for language 1
ALL
1930
User interface
Key arrangement for language 2
ALL
1912
Maximum number of decimals in the extension fields The default value of the stored/attached file name of a File/Email Domain name of Windows Domain Authentication Windows domain No. 2 of user authentication Windows domain No. 3 of user authentication LDAP authentication Server type LDAP authentication User attribute Execution of user authentication when the user ID is not entered
ALL ALL
2 <0-6> 0 <0-1>
RAM
Contents
Procedur e
M
1
M
1
M M SYS
SYS
3-30sec. (In increments of 1sec.) 0: MJ-1030 1: MJ-1101 0: Valid (Page number not added) 1: Invalid (Page number added) 0 to 6 digits
1 1 1
1
SYS
0: DOCYYMMDD 1: NetBios name
1
ALL
-
UTY
Maximum 128 letters
12
ALL
-
UTY
Maximum 128 letters
12
ALL
-
UTY
Maximum 128 letters
12
ALL
1 <1-2> -
NIC
12
ALL
2 <0-2>
SYS
Tab/cover sheet printing at FAX reception Printing stop function
ALL
0 <0-1>
SYS
LDAP server attribute name settings for the card authentication Role Based Access LDAP search index
ALL
eBMUser Card
SYS
1: Windows Server 2: Not Windows Server Sets a user attribute name. 0: Forcible execution 1: Execution impossible (pooled in the invalid queue) 2: Forcible deletion Sets on or off of the printing function of special sheets such as tab or cover sheet of FAX, Email or list print. 0: Function off 1: Function on Up to 32 letters
ALL
0 <04294967 295> 0 <0-2>
SYS
ALL
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
1 <0-2>
NIC
SYS
SYS
12 1
1
11 5
0: QWERTY layout (for EUR) 1: QWERTZ layout 2: AZERTY layout 0: QWERTY layout (for EUR) 1: QWERTZ layout 2: AZERTY layout
1
1
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 206 08/05
1931
User interface
1932
User interface
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Key arrangement for lanALL EUR: 2 guage 3 UC: 0 JPN: 0 <0-2> Key arrangement for lanALL 0 guage 4 <0-2>
1933
User interface
Key arrangement for language 5
ALL
0 <0-2>
SYS
1934
User interface
Key arrangement for language 6
ALL
0 <0-2>
SYS
1935
User interface
Key arrangement for language 7
ALL
0 <0-2>
SYS
1936
Network
AppleTalk device name
ALL
MFPserial
UTY
1937
Network
User name and password at user authentication or "Save as file"
ALL
0 <0-2>
SYS
1940
General
STAGE port number
SCN
SYS
1941
Bluetooth
Bluetooth BIP Paper size
ALL
20080 <065535> EUR: 6 UC: 2 JPN: 6 <0-13>
1950
Network
SMB signature for SMB server
ALL
1 <1-3>
UTY
Code
Classification
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
RAM
Contents
SYS
0: QWERTY layout (for EUR) 1: QWERTZ layout 2: AZERTY layout 0: QWERTY layout (for EUR) 1: QWERTZ layout 2: AZERTY layout 0: QWERTY layout (for EUR) 1: QWERTZ layout 2: AZERTY layout 0: QWERTY layout (for EUR) 1: QWERTZ layout 2: AZERTY layout 0: QWERTY layout (for EUR) 1: QWERTZ layout 2: AZERTY layout Maximum 32 letters The Network-related serial number of the equipment appears at "serial". 0: User name and password of the device 1: User name and password at the user authentication (Template registration information comes first when a template is retrieved.) 2: User name and password at the user authentication (User information of the authentication comes first when a template is retrieved.) Port number used for the remote scanning is set. 0: LD 1: LG 2: LT 3: COMP 4: ST 5: A3 6: A4 7: A5 8: A6 9: B4 10: B5 11: FOLIO 12: 13"LG 13: 8.5" x 8.5" 1: Auto 2: Valid 3: Invalid
SYS
SYS
Procedur e 1
1
1
1
1
12
1
1 1
12
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 207 07/06
2
Setting mode (08) Default Func- SMB signature for SMB cliALL 1 ent <1-3>
Code
Classification
1951
Network
1952
Network
1953
Network
1954
Network
1955
Network
1956
Network
1957
Network
1958
Network
1959
Network
1960
General
1961
General
KS/KSSM setting all clearing
ALL
1963
General
KS Filter Emulation Mode
1964
General
1965
RAM
Procedur e
ALL
-
UTY
1: Auto 2: Valid 3: Invalid Maximum 128 letters
ALL
-
UTY
Maximum 128 letters
12
ALL
-
UTY
Maximum 128 letters
12
ALL
-
UTY
Maximum 128 letters
12
ALL
-
UTY
Maximum 128 letters
12
ALL
-
UTY
Maximum 128 letters
12
ALL
-
UTY
Maximum 128 letters
12
ALL
-
UTY
Maximum 128 letters
12
ALL
0 <0-1> -
SYS
1
ALL
0 <0-2>
SYS
KS Filter Paper Size
ALL
1 <0-5>
SYS
General
KS Filter Orientation
ALL
SYS
1966
General
KS Filter Copies
ALL
1967
General
KS Paper Source
ALL
1968
General
KS Duplex Mode
ALL
1970
General
KS CPI (English CPI/ Hangle CPI)
ALL
0 <0-1> 0 <1-999> 0 <0-1> 0 <0-2> 1 <0-10>
0: Disabled 1: Enabled Does not reset the value of the code 081960 but resets those of the codes 08-1963 to 1994. 0: Auto 1: KS 2: KSSM 0: A3 1: A4 2: B4 3: B5 4: Letter 5: Legal 0: Portrait 1: Landscape
Logon User Name of Windows Domain Authentication Logon User Name Password of of Windows Domain Authentication PDC2 of user authentication BDC2 of user authentication PDC3 of user authentication BDC3 of user authentication PDC of Windows Domain Authentication BDC of device authentication KS Filter operation mode
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
UTY
Contents
-
12 12
3
1 1
1
SYS
1
SYS
1
SYS
1
SYS
0: (5/10) 1: (6/12) 2: (6.7/13.3) 3: (6.9/13.8) 4: (7.5/15) 5: (8.3/16.7) 6: (9/18) 7: (10/10) 8: (10/20) 9: (12/24) 10: (15/30)
1
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 208 07/06
Code
Classification
1971
General
Items KS LPI
Setting mode (08) Default Func- ALL 60 <30-160>
RAM
Contents
SYS
Key in the value 10 times as the desired font size. (e.g.: Key in "45" for a font size 4.5.) 0: MYUNGJO 1: GOTHIC 2: GUNGSEO 3: GULLIM 4: GRAPH 5: SAMMUL Key in the value 10 times as the desired font size. (e.g.: Key in "100" for a font size 10.0.)
1972
General
KS Type Face
ALL
0 <0-5>
SYS
1973
General
KS Font Size
ALL
96 <96-160>
SYS
1974
General
KS Zoom
ALL
SYS
1975
General
KS CR/LF Mode
ALL
100 <20-400> 2 <0-3>
1976
General
KS Top Margin
ALL
0 <0-50>
SYS
1977
General
KS Left Margin
ALL
0 <0-50>
SYS
1978
General
KS Auto Wrap
ALL
SYS
1979
General
KS Han Mode
ALL
1980
General
KS Han Code
ALL
1984
General
KSSM CPI (English CPI/ Hangle CPI)
ALL
0 <0-1> 1 <0-1> 0 <0-1> 1 <0-10>
1985
General
KSSM LPI
ALL
60 <30-160>
SYS
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
SYS
SYS SYS SYS
Procedur e 1
2 1
1
1 0: CR->CR, LF->LF 1: CR->CR+LF, LF->LF 2: CR->CR, LF->CR+LF 3: CR->CR+LF, LF->CR+LF Key in the value 10 times as the desired font size. (e.g.: Key in "40" for a font size 4.0.) Key in the value 10 times as the desired font size. (e.g.: Key in "40" for a font size 4.0.) 0: OFF 1: ON 0: OFF 1: ON 0: Wansung 1: Johap 0: (5/10) 1: (6/12) 2: (6.7/13.3) 3: (6.9/13.8) 4: (7.5/15) 5: (8.3/16.7) 6: (9/18) 7: (10/10) 8: (10/20) 9: (12/24) 10: (15/30) Key in the value 10 times as the desired font size. (e.g.: Key in "45" for a font size 4.5.)
1
1
1
1 1 1 1
1
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 209
Setting mode (08) Default Func- ALL 0 <0-5>
Code
Classification
1986
General
KSSM Type Face
1987
General
KSSM Font Size
ALL
96 <96-160>
SYS
1988
General
KSSM Zoom
ALL
SYS
1989
General
KSSM CR/LF Mode
ALL
100 <20-400> 2 <0-3>
1990
General
KSSM Top Margin
ALL
0 <0-50>
SYS
1991
General
KSSM Left Margin
ALL
0 <0-50>
SYS
1992
General
KSSM Auto Wrap
ALL
SYS
1993
General
KSSM Han Mode
ALL
1994
General
KSSM Han Code
ALL
2017-0
Fuser
Fusing temperature (Center / Special paper)
Special paper 1 Special paper 2
ALL
0 <0-1> 1 <0-1> 0 <0-1> 9 <0-16> 9 <0-16>
Fusing temperature (Side / Special paper)
Special paper 1 Special paper 2
ALL
9 <0-16> 9 <0-16>
M
2017-1
2018-0 2018-1
Fuser
Items
ALL
ALL
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
RAM
Contents
SYS
0: MYUNGJO 1: GOTHIC 2: GUNGSEO 3: GULLIM 4: GRAPH 5: SAMMUL Key in the value 10 times as the desired font size. (e.g.: Key in "100" for a font size 10.0.)
SYS
SYS SYS M M
M
Procedur e 1
1
1 0: CR->CR, LF->LF 1: CR->CR+LF, LF->LF 2: CR->CR, LF->CR+LF 3: CR->CR+LF, LF->CR+LF Key in the value 10 times as the desired font size. (e.g.: Key in "40" for a font size 4.0.) Key in the value 10 times as the desired font size. (e.g.: Key in "40" for a font size 4.0.) 0: OFF 1: ON 0: OFF 1: ON 0: Wansung 1: Johap 0: 120°C 1: 125°C 2: 130°C 3: 135°C 4: 140°C 5: 145°C 6: 150°C 7: 155°C 8: 160°C 9: 165°C 10: 170°C 11: 175°C 12: 180°C 13: 185°C 14: 190°C 15: 195°C 16: 200°C 0: 120°C 1: 125°C 2: 130°C 3: 135°C 4: 140°C 5: 145°C 6: 150°C 7: 155°C 8: 160°C 9: 165°C 10: 170°C 11: 175°C 12: 180°C 13: 185°C 14: 190°C 15: 195°C 16: 200°C
1
1
1
1 1 1 4 4
4 4
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 210
Code
Classification
2019-0
Fuser
2019-1
2020-0
Fuser
2020-1
2151-0
Fuser
2151-1
2153-0
Fuser
2153-1
Items
Setting mode (08) Default Func- ALL 2 <0-16> ALL 2 <0-16>
Fusing temperature (Pressure roller / Special paper)
Special paper 1 Special paper 2
Pre-running time for first printing (Special paper)
Special paper 1 Special paper 2
ALL
Fusing temperature during printing (Pressure roller / Plain paper)
BK mode
ALL
C or CK mode
ALL
Fusing temperature during printing (Pressure roller / Thick paper 1)
Normal length paper Extra long size paper
RAM M M
0 <0-16> 0 <0-16>
M
2 <0-16> 2 <0-16>
M
ALL
2 <0-16>
M
ALL
2 <0-16>
M
ALL
M
M
2155
Fuser
Fusing temperature during printing (Pressure roller / Thick paper 2)
ALL
2 <0-16>
M
2159
Fuser
Fusing temperature during printing (Pressure roller / Thick paper 3) / (Pressure roller / Thick paper 4)
ALL
2 <0-16>
M
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Contents 0: 120°C 1: 125°C 2: 130°C 3: 135°C 4: 140°C 5: 145°C 6: 150°C 7: 155°C 8: 160°C 9: 165°C 10: 170°C 11: 175°C 12: 180°C 13: 185°C 14: 190°C 15: 195°C 16: 200°C 0: Invalid 1: 0sec. 2: 2sec. 3: 3sec. 4: 4sec. 5: 5sec. 6: 6sec. 7: 7sec. 8: 8sec. 9: 10sec. 10: 12sec. 11: 14sec. 12: 16sec. 13: 18sec. 14: 20sec. 15: 25sec. 16: 30sec. 0: 120°C 1: 125°C 2: 130°C 3: 135°C 4: 140°C 5: 145°C 6: 150°C 7: 155°C 8: 160°C 9: 165°C 10: 170°C 11: 175°C 12: 180°C 13: 185°C 14: 190°C 15: 195°C 16: 200°C 0: 120°C 1: 125°C 2: 130°C 3: 135°C 4: 140°C 5: 145°C 6: 150°C 7: 155°C 8: 160°C 9: 165°C 10: 170°C 11: 175°C 12: 180°C 13: 185°C 14: 190°C 15: 195°C 16: 200°C 0: 120°C 1: 125°C 2: 130°C 3: 135°C 4: 140°C 5: 145°C 6: 150°C 7: 155°C 8: 160°C 9: 165°C 10: 170°C 11: 175°C 12: 180°C 13: 185°C 14: 190°C 15: 195°C 16: 200°C 0: 120°C 1: 125°C 2: 130°C 3: 135°C 4: 140°C 5: 145°C 6: 150°C 7: 155°C 8: 160°C 9: 165°C 10: 170°C 11: 175°C 12: 180°C 13: 185°C 14: 190°C 15: 195°C 16: 200°C
Procedur e 4 4
4 4
4 4
4 4
1
1
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 211 07/09
2
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Fusing temperature during ALL 2 <0-16> printing (Pressure roller / Overhead transparencies)
Procedur e
Code
Classification
2161
Fuser
2255
Fuser
Fusing temperature in the low power mode (Pressure roller)
ALL
19 <0-25>
M
2367
Transfer
ALL
1 <0-1>
M
2411-0
Transfer
ON/OFF setting of drum reverse rotation amount control Enforced Transport toner supply / speed: Motor ON set- Normal speed ting value Transport speed: Decelerating Transport speed: High speed Enforced Transport toner supply / speed: Motor OFF Normal setting value speed Transport speed: Decelerating Transport speed: High speed
ALL
60 <0-255>
M
4
ALL
60 <0-255>
M
4
ALL
60 <0-255>
M
4
ALL
70 <0-255>
M
4
ALL
70 <0-255>
M
4
ALL
70 <0-255>
M
4
2411-1
2411-2
2412-0
2412-1
2412-2
Transfer
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
RAM M
Contents 0: 120°C 1: 125°C 2: 130°C 3: 135°C 4: 140°C 5: 145°C 6: 150°C 7: 155°C 8: 160°C 9: 165°C 10: 170°C 11: 175°C 12: 180°C 13: 185°C 14: 190°C 15: 195°C 16: 200°C 0: OFF°C1: 40°C 2: 45°C 3: 50°C 4: 55°C 5: 60°C 6: 65°C 7: 70°C 8: 75°C 9: 80°C 10: 85°C 11: 90°C 12: 95°C 13: 100°C 14: 105°C 15: 110°C 16: 115°C 17: 120°C 18: 125°C 19: 130°C 20: 135°C 21: 140°C 22: 145°C 23: 150°C 24: 155°C 25: 160°C 0: OFF 1: ON
1
1
1
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 212 07/06
Code
Classification
2413-0
Transfer
2413-1
2413-2
2490
Transfer
2510
Transfer
2511
Transfer
2512
Transfer
2513-0
Image control
2513-1 2513-2 2513-3 2514-0 2514-1 2514-2 2514-3 2515
Image control
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Enforced Transport ALL 6 <0-10> toner supply / speed: Setting value Normal of the number speed of repetition Transport ALL 6 times speed: <0-10> Decelerating Transport ALL 6 speed: <0-10> High speed 2nd transfer bias resisALL 1 tance detection control <0-1> Transfer bias control ALL 1 <0-1> ALL 1 Main charger open-loop <0-1> control for resistance detection 1st transfer life count conALL 1 trol switching <0-1> Contrast volt- Y ALL 5 <0-10> age offset correction setting M ALL 5 (Normal <0-10> speed) C ALL 5 <0-10> K ALL 5 <0-10> Contrast volt- Y ALL 5 age offset cor<0-10> rection setting M ALL 5 (Decelerating) <0-10> C ALL 5 <0-10> K ALL 5 <0-10> Contrast voltage offset corALL 5 rection setting (High <0-10> speed)
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
RAM
Contents
Procedur e
M
4
M
4
M
4
M M M M M M M M
0: Invalid 1: Valid 0: Invalid 1: Valid 0: Invalid 1: Valid
1
0: Invalid 1: Valid 0: -100 2: -60 4: -20 6: +20 8: +60 10: +100 (Unit: V)
1
1 1
1: -80 3: -40 5: 0 7: +40 9: +80
4 4 4 4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
1
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 213 07/06
2
Code 2525-0 2525-1 2525-2 2525-3 2526-0 2526-1 2526-2 2526-3 2527 2553 2692
Setting mode (08) Default ClassifiFunc- Y ALL 5 Image Laser power <0-10> control offset correction setting M ALL 5 (Normal <0-10> speed) C ALL 5 <0-10> K ALL 5 <0-10> Laser power Y ALL 5 offset correc<0-10> tion setting M ALL 5 (Decelerating) <0-10> C ALL 5 <0-10> K ALL 5 <0-10> Laser power offset correcALL 5 tion setting (High speed) <0-10> Transfer Switchover on discharge ALL 0 blade bias output <0-1> Develop- Prevention of color toner ALL 0 ment low density / ON/OFF set<0-1> ting
RAM M M M M
4
M
4
M
1
M M
M
M
ALL
2707-2
C
ALL
2707-3
K
ALL
0 <0-8> 0 <0-8> 0 <0-8> 0 <0-8> company <->
SYS
3506
General
LDAP search result display attribute 1
ALL
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
4
M
ALL
2707-1
4
4
Y
Develop- Toner density ment ratio manual offset control
4
M
M
2707-0
4
4
20 <1-255>
Develop- Prevention of color toner ment low density / Judged number of sheets setting
0: -50 1: -40 2: -30 3: -20 4: -10 5: 0 6: +10 7: +20 8: +30 9: +40 10: +50 (Unit: µW)
Procedur e
M
ALL
2693
Contents
M M M
0: Enabled 1: Disabled Prevents color toner low density which occurs when the ratio of black printing is high. Since toner density in the color developer unit is checked at every number of sheets set in 08-2693, the performance will be lowered. 0: OFF 1: ON Sets the timing to check toner density in the color developer unit when 08-2692 is “1: ON”. Setting value x 10 sheets 0: Invalid 1: +2bit 2: +4bit 3: +6bit 4: +8bit 5: -2bit 6: -4bit 7: -6bit 8: -8bit The LDAP attribute name corresponding to attribute 1 displayed in the LDAP search result list.
1 1
1
4 4 4 4 11
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 214 08/08
Code
Classification
3507
General
3600-0 3600-1 3600-2 3600-3 3600-4 3600-5 3600-6 3600-7 3600-8 3600-9 3600-10 3600-11 3600-12 3600-13 3600-14 3600-15 3600-16 3600-17 3600-18 3600-19 3600-20 3600-21 3600-22 3600-23
General
Setting mode (08) Default Func- LDAP search result display ALL departattribute 2 ment <-> Available profile display
PS_IS34_ 00.ICC PS_IS34_ 01.icc PS_IS34_ 02.icc PS_IS34_ 03.icc PS_IS34_ 04.icc PS_IS34_ 05.icc PS_IS34_ 06.icc PS_IS34_ 07.icc PS_IS34_ 08.icc PS_IS34_ 09.icc PS_IS34_ 10.ICC PS_IS34_ 11.icc PS_IS34_ 12.icc PS_IS34_ 13.icc PS_IS34_ 14.icc PS_IS34_ 15.icc PS_IS34_ 16.icc PS_IS34_ 17.icc PS_IS34_ 18.icc PS_IS34_ 19.icc PS_IS34_ 20.ICC PS_IS34_ 21.icc PS_IS34_ 22.icc PS_IS34_ 23.icc
RAM
Contents
SYS
The LDAP attribute name corresponding to attribute 2 displayed in the LDAP search result list. Displays PG DevicePureGrayTRC attribute for the current RGBInkSim profile and the same sub-code.
Procedur e 11
2
ALL
-
SYS
ALL
-
SYS
ALL
-
SYS
ALL
-
SYS
14
ALL
-
SYS
14
ALL
-
SYS
14
ALL
-
SYS
14
ALL
-
SYS
14
ALL
-
SYS
14
ALL
-
SYS
14
ALL
-
SYS
14
ALL
-
SYS
14
ALL
-
SYS
14
ALL
-
SYS
14
ALL
-
SYS
14
ALL
-
SYS
14
ALL
-
SYS
14
ALL
-
SYS
14
ALL
-
SYS
14
ALL
-
SYS
14
ALL
-
SYS
14
ALL
-
SYS
14
ALL
-
SYS
14
ALL
-
SYS
14
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
14 14 14
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 215
Code
Classification
3601
General
3602
General
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Recovery of the profile at ALL 0 the shipment <0-23>
Copying the profile at the shipment to USB memory
ALL
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
0 <0-23>
RAM
Contents
SYS
Recovers the default RGBInkSim profile and PG DevicePureGrayTRC in the same subcode. 0: PS_IS34_00 1: PS_IS34_01 2: PS_IS34_02 3: PS_IS34_03 4: PS_IS34_04 5: PS_IS34_05 6: PS_IS34_06 7: PS_IS34_07 8: PS_IS34_08 9: PS_IS34_09 10: PS_IS34_10 11: PS_IS34_11 12: PS_IS34_12 13: PS_IS34_13 14: PS_IS34_14 15: PS_IS34_15 16: PS_IS34_16 17: PS_IS34_17 18: PS_IS34_18 19: PS_IS34_19 20: PS_IS34_20 21: PS_IS34_21 22: PS_IS34_22 23: PS_IS34_23 Copies the default RGBInkSim profile and PG DevicePureGrayTRC in the same subcode to the USB memory. 0: PS_IS34_00 1: PS_IS34_01 2: PS_IS34_02 3: PS_IS34_03 4: PS_IS34_04 5: PS_IS34_05 6: PS_IS34_06 7: PS_IS34_07 8: PS_IS34_08 9: PS_IS34_09 10: PS_IS34_10 11: PS_IS34_11 12: PS_IS34_12 13: PS_IS34_13 14: PS_IS34_14 15: PS_IS34_15 16: PS_IS34_16 17: PS_IS34_17 18: PS_IS34_18 19: PS_IS34_19 20: PS_IS34_20 21: PS_IS34_21 22: PS_IS34_22 23: PS_IS34_23
SYS
Procedur e 1
1
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 216
Code
Classification
3603
General
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Updating the profile at the ALL 0 <0-23> shipment from UBS memory
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
RAM
Contents
SYS
Uploads the default RGBInkSim profile and PG DevicePureGrayTRC in the same subcode from the USB memory. 0: PS_IS34_00 1: PS_IS34_01 2: PS_IS34_02 3: PS_IS34_03 4: PS_IS34_04 5: PS_IS34_05 6: PS_IS34_06 7: PS_IS34_07 8: PS_IS34_08 9: PS_IS34_09 10: PS_IS34_10 11: PS_IS34_11 12: PS_IS34_12 13: PS_IS34_13 14: PS_IS34_14 15: PS_IS34_15 16: PS_IS34_16 17: PS_IS34_17 18: PS_IS34_18 19: PS_IS34_19 20: PS_IS34_20 21: PS_IS34_21 22: PS_IS34_22 23: PS_IS34_23
Procedur e 1
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 217
2
Code
Classification
3604-0
General
3604-1 3604-2 3604-3 3604-4 3604-5 3604-6 3604-7 3604-8 3604-9 3604-10 3604-11 3604-12 3604-13 3604-14 3604-15 3604-16 3604-17 3604-18 3604-19 3604-20 3604-21 3604-22 3604-23
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Displaying the PS_IS34_ ALL attribute of the 00.000 profile at the PS_IS34_ ALL shipment 01.000 PS_IS34_ ALL 02.000 PS_IS34_ ALL 03.000 PS_IS34_ ALL 04.000 PS_IS34_ ALL 05.000 PS_IS34_ ALL 06.000 PS_IS34_ ALL 07.000 PS_IS34_ ALL 08.000 PS_IS34_ ALL 09.000 PS_IS34_ ALL 10.000 PS_IS34_ ALL 11.000 PS_IS34_ ALL 12.000 PS_IS34_ ALL 13.000 PS_IS34_ ALL 14.000 PS_IS34_ ALL 15.000 PS_IS34_ ALL 16.000 PS_IS34_ ALL 17.000 PS_IS34_ ALL 18.000 PS_IS34_ ALL 19.000 PS_IS34_ ALL 20.000 PS_IS34_ ALL 21.000 PS_IS34_ ALL 22.000 PS_IS34_ ALL 23.000
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
RAM
Contents
SYS
Displays the default RGBInkSim profile and PG DevicePureGrayTRC attribute in the same sub-code.
SYS SYS
Procedur e 14 14 14
SYS
14
SYS
14
SYS
14
SYS
14
SYS
14
SYS
14
SYS
14
SYS
14
SYS
14
SYS
14
SYS
14
SYS
14
SYS
14
SYS
14
SYS
14
SYS
14
SYS
14
SYS
14
SYS
14
SYS
14
SYS
14
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 218
Code
Classification
3605
General
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Making the profile available ALL 0 <0-23>
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
RAM
Contents
SYS
Selecting a profile Overwrites the adjusted RGBInkSym profile on the current area (PG CIEBasedPureGrayTRC in the same sub-code is overwritten to the current area.) 0: PS_IS34_00 1: PS_IS34_01 2: PS_IS34_02 3: PS_IS34_03 4: PS_IS34_04 5: PS_IS34_05 6: PS_IS34_06 7: PS_IS34_07 8: PS_IS34_08 9: PS_IS34_09 10: PS_IS34_10 11: PS_IS34_11 12: PS_IS34_12 13: PS_IS34_13 14: PS_IS34_14 15: PS_IS34_15 16: PS_IS34_16 17: PS_IS34_17 18: PS_IS34_18 19: PS_IS34_19 20: PS_IS34_20 21: PS_IS34_21 22: PS_IS34_22 23: PS_IS34_23
Procedur e 1
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 219 06/10
2
Code
Classification
3606
General
3607
General
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Copying the adjusted proALL 0 file to USB memory <0-23>
Uploading the adjusted profile from USB memory
ALL
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
0 <0-23>
RAM
Contents
SYS
Copies the adjusted RGBInkSim profile and PG CIEBasedPureGrayTRC in the same sub-code to USB memory. 0: PS_IS34_00 1: PS_IS34_01 2: PS_IS34_02 3: PS_IS34_03 4: PS_IS34_04 5: PS_IS34_05 6: PS_IS34_06 7: PS_IS34_07 8: PS_IS34_08 9: PS_IS34_09 10: PS_IS34_10 11: PS_IS34_11 12: PS_IS34_12 13: PS_IS34_13 14: PS_IS34_14 15: PS_IS34_15 16: PS_IS34_16 17: PS_IS34_17 18: PS_IS34_18 19: PS_IS34_19 20: PS_IS34_20 21: PS_IS34_21 22: PS_IS34_22 23: PS_IS34_23 Uploads the adjusted RGBInkSim profile and PG CIEBasedPureGrayTRC in the same sub-code from the USB memory. 0: PS_IS34_00 1: PS_IS34_01 2: PS_IS34_02 3: PS_IS34_03 4: PS_IS34_04 5: PS_IS34_05 6: PS_IS34_06 7: PS_IS34_07 8: PS_IS34_08 9: PS_IS34_09 10: PS_IS34_10 11: PS_IS34_11 12: PS_IS34_12 13: PS_IS34_13 14: PS_IS34_14 15: PS_IS34_15 16: PS_IS34_16 17: PS_IS34_17 18: PS_IS34_18 19: PS_IS34_19 20: PS_IS34_20 21: PS_IS34_21 22: PS_IS34_22 23: PS_IS34_23
SYS
Procedur e 1
1
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 220 06/10
Code
Classification
3608-0
General
3608-1 3608-2 3608-3 3608-4 3608-5 3608-6 3608-7 3608-8 3608-9 3608-10 3608-11 3608-12 3608-13 3608-14 3608-15 3608-16 3608-17 3608-18 3608-19 3608-20 3608-21 3608-22 3608-23 3722
Network
3723
Network
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Displaying the PS_IS34_ ALL attribute of the 00.001 profile at the PS_IS34_ ALL shipment 01.001 PS_IS34_ ALL 02.001 PS_IS34_ ALL 03.001 PS_IS34_ ALL 04.001 PS_IS34_ ALL 05.001 PS_IS34_ ALL 06.001 PS_IS34_ ALL 07.001 PS_IS34_ ALL 08.001 PS_IS34_ ALL 09.001 PS_IS34_ ALL 10.001 PS_IS34_ ALL 11.001 PS_IS34_ ALL 12.001 PS_IS34_ ALL 13.001 PS_IS34_ ALL 14.001 PS_IS34_ ALL 15.001 PS_IS34_ ALL 16.001 PS_IS34_ ALL 17.001 PS_IS34_ ALL 18.001 PS_IS34_ ALL 19.001 PS_IS34_ ALL 20.001 PS_IS34_ ALL 21.001 PS_IS34_ ALL 22.001 PS_IS34_ ALL 23.001 ALL 60 PDC/BDC timeout value of <1-180> Windows Domain Authentication (Unit: Seconds) ALL 30 User authentication PDC/ BDC time-out period (Unit: <1-180> Seconds)
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
RAM SYS SYS SYS
Contents Displays the adjusted Output Profile and PG CIEBasedPureGrayTRC attribute in the same sub-code.
Procedur e 14 14 14
SYS
14
SYS
14
SYS
14
SYS
14
SYS
14
SYS
14
SYS
14
SYS
14
SYS
14
SYS
14
SYS
14
SYS
14
SYS
14
SYS
14
SYS
14
SYS
14
SYS
14
SYS
14
SYS
14
SYS
14
SYS
14
NIC
Applied to the device authentication
12
NIC
Applied to the user authentication
12
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 221 07/06
2
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Windows Domain AuthentiALL 1 <1-3> cation method of Windows Domain/User Authentication IPP max connection ALL 16 <1-16> IPP active connection ALL 10 <1-16> LPD max connection ALL 10 <1-16> LPD active connection ALL 10 <1-16> ATalk PS max Connection ALL 10 <1-16> ATalk PS active ConnecALL 10 tion <1-16> Raw TCP max Connection ALL 10 <1-16> Raw TCP active connecALL 10 tion <1-16> DNS client TimeOut ALL 60 <1-180>
Code
Classification
3724
Network
3725
Network
3726
Network
3727
Network
3728
Network
3729
Network
3730
Network
3731
Network
3732
Network
3736
Network
3737
Network
DDNS client TimeOut
ALL
60 <1-180>
NIC
3738
Network
HTTP Client TimeOut (EWB and Satellite)
ALL
60 <1-180>
NIC
3739
Network
FTP Client TimeOut (SCAN)
ALL
30 <1-180>
NIC
3740
Network
SNTP Client TimeOut
ALL
30 <1-180>
NIC
3741
Network
SMTP Client TimeOut
ALL
30 <1-180>
NIC
3742
Network
POP3 Client TimeOut
ALL
30 <1-180>
NIC
3743
Network
LDAP client TimeOut
ALL
30 <1-180>
NIC
3744
Network
POP3 Authentication method
ALL
1 <1-3>
NIC
3745
Network
ALL
Network
3747
Network
<1-128> <1-128> <1-128>
NIC
3746
Secure DDNS Primary Login Name Secure DDNS Primary Password Secure DDNS Secondary Login Name
ALL ALL
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
RAM NIC
Contents 1: Auto 2: Kerberos 3: NTLMv2
Procedur e 12
NIC
12
NIC
12
NIC
12
NIC
12
NIC
12
NIC
12
NIC
12
NIC
12
NIC
NIC NIC
Use when a timeout occurred at DNS client connection Use when a timeout occurred at DDNS client connection Use when a timeout occurred at HTTP client connection Use when a timeout occurred at DNS client connection Use when a timeout occurred at SNTP client connection Use when a timeout occurred at SMTP client connection Use when a timeout occurred at POP3 client connection Use when a timeout occurred at LDAP client connection POP3 authentication method setting 1: Disable (Default) 2: NTLM 3: Kerberos User Name for Secure DDNS for Primary Password for Secure DDNS for Primary User Name for Secure DDNS for Secondary
12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
12 12 12
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 222 06/09
Code
Classification
3748
Network
3749
General
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Secure DDNS Secondary ALL Password <1-128> DPWS Friendly Name ALL -
3750
General
DPWS Printer Name
ALL
-
NIC
3751
General
DPWS Scanner Name
ALL
-
NIC
3752
General
DPWS Printer Information
ALL
-
NIC
3753
General
DPWS Scanner Information
ALL
-
NIC
3754
Network
Switching DPWS Printer setting
ALL
1 <1-2>
NIC
3755
Network
Switching DPWS Scanner setting
ALL
1 <1-2>
NIC
3757
Network
DPWS Discovery Port Number
ALL
NIC
3758
Network
DPWS Metadata Exchange Port Number
ALL
3759
Network
DPWS Print Port Number
ALL
3760
Network
DPWS Scan Port Number
ALL
3765
Network
DPWS Print Max numbers of connection
ALL
3702 <165535> 5081 <165535> 5082 <165535> 5083 <165535> 10 <1-20>
3766
Network
DPWS Print Max numbers of reception
ALL
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
10 <1-20>
RAM
Contents
NIC
Password for Secure DDNS for Secondary MFP name indicated in DPWS search result TOSHIBA e-STUDIOxxx [NIC serial number] Printer name used for installing the printer with DPWS TOSHIBA e-STUDIOxxx Printer[NIC serial number] Scanner name used for installing the printer with DPWS TOSHIBA e-STUDIOxxx Scanner[NIC serial number] Information regarding DPWS printer NULL Information regarding DPWS scanner NULL DPWS printer function is switched. 1: Enabled 2: Disabled DPWS scanner function is switched. 1: Enabled 2: Disabled Port number used for DPWS Discovery
NIC
NIC NIC
Port number used for DPWS Metadata Exchange Port number used for DPWS Print
Procedur e 12 12
12
12
12 12 12
12
12 12 12
NIC
Port number used for DPWS Scan
12
NIC
Maximum numbers received from more than one connection request in the DPWS print Maximum numbers of data received from more than one clients in the DPWS print
12
NIC
12
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 223 06/10
2
Setting mode (08) Default Func- ALL 2 <1-2>
Code
Classification
3767
Network
Switching IPv6 setting
3768
Network
Switching IP(IPv6) Address Acquisition
ALL
2 <1-2>
NIC
3769
Network
Link Local Address
ALL
<0-16>
NIC
3770
Network
IPv6 Address
ALL
0 <0-16>
NIC
3771
Network
Prefix display setting
ALL
NIC
3772
Network
Default Gateway setting
ALL
0 <0-128> 0 <0-16>
3773
Network
ALL
Network
0 <0-16> 2 <1-2>
NIC
3774
Displaying previous DHCPv6 Address DHCPv6 Option setting
3775
Network
Stateless Address Auto Configuration
ALL
1 <1-2>
NIC
3776
Network
Stateless Address setting continuation
ALL
2 <1-2>
NIC
3777
Network
Stateless Address setting
ALL
2 <1-2>
NIC
3778
Network
Acquiring DHCPv6 Option
ALL
2 <1-2>
NIC
3779
Network
State full Address setting
ALL
2 <1-2>
NIC
Items
ALL
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
RAM
Contents
NIC
IPv6 function is switched. 1: Enabled 2: Disabled IP(IPv6) Address Acquisition setting is switched. 1: Manual 2: Auto configuration Link Local Address is displayed. Unique IP address (128 bits) is set using Mac address. DHCPv6 Address in Manual/Auto configuration is displayed. The range of Prefix display is set. Default Gateway of DHCPv6 Address in Manual/Auto configuration is set. The previous DHCPv6 Address is displayed. DHCPv6 Option is switched when the Manual is set. 1: Enabled 2: Disabled Stateless Address Auto Configuration is switched. 1: Enabled 2: Disabled When Prefix sent from router is changed, Stateless Address is continued to be set. 1: Enabled 2: Disabled IP Address is acquired by both Stateless and State full Address. 1: Enabled 2: Disabled When Stateless Address is selected, an option is acquired from DHCPv6 server. 1: Enabled 2: Disabled IP Address is acquired from DHCPv6 server. 1: Enabled 2: Disabled
NIC
NIC
Procedur e 12
12
12
12 12 12
12 12
12
12
12
12
12
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 224 07/06
Setting mode (08) Default Func- State full Option setting ALL 2 <1-2>
Code
Classification
3780
Network
3781
Network
3782
Network
3783
Network
Selecting SAMBA Protocol
ALL
2 <2-3>
NIC
3784
Network
DSN Server resolve type
ALL
3 <1-3>
NIC
3785
Network
DPWS IPv4 or IPv4 with IPv6
ALL
2 <1-2>
NIC
3793
Network
LLTD function setting
ALL
1 <1-2>
NIC
3800-0
Counter
Extra long size paper count switching setting
Feeding direction 445-800 mm Feeding direction 801-1200 mm USB media direct printing Paper size
ALL
2 <1-30>
SYS
ALL
3 <1-30>
SYS
ALL
EUR: 6 UC: 2 JPN: 6 <0-13>
SYS
Enable direct print function
ALL
1 <0-1>
SYS
3800-1
3802
General
3803
General
Primary DNS Server Address Registration Secondary DNS Server Address Registration
ALL ALL
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
0 <0-16> 0 <0-16>
RAM
Contents
NIC
An option is acquired from DHCPv6 server. 1: Enabled 2: Disabled Registration of Primary DNS Server Address Registration of Secondary DNS Server Address Either IPv6 or IPv4 is selected to use SAMBA. 2: IPv6 3: IPv4 Either "ip6.arpa" or "ip6.int" is selected for the name resolution in DNS. 1: "ip6.arpa" only 2: "ip6.int" only 3: In case of error with "ip6.int", "ip6.arpa" is requested. Either IPv4 only or IPv6 together with it is selected to operate Print, Scan and Security related with DPWS. 1: Multi (IPv4 and IPv6) 2: IPv4 Sets the LLTD function. 1: Enabled 2: Disabled Sets the number of multiples. A sheet is counted as N sheets when extra long size paper is used for printing.
NIC NIC
0: Ledger 1: Legal 2: Letter 3: Computer 4: Statement 5: A3 6: A4 7: A5 8: A6 9: B4 10: B5 11: Folio 12: Legal13" 13: Letter Square 1: Invalid 2: Valid
Procedur e 12
12 12 12
12
12
12 4
4
1
1
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 225 07/06
2
Code
Classification
3804
Network
3805
Scanner
3810
Network
Setting mode (08) Default Func- List analyzing logic of San ALL 0 to File (FTP) <0-1> Department Management ALL 0 setting by Remote Scan <0-3>
Direct SMTP communication setting
ALL
0 <0-1>
RAM
Contents
SYS
0: NLST 1: LIST Department Management is set when Remote Scan is performed. 0: w/o GUI OFF, w/ GUI OFF 1: w/o GUI ON, w/ GUI OFF 2: w/o GUI OFF, w/ GUI ON 3: w/o GUI ON, w/ GUI ON When an Internet Fax is sent, Direct SMTP communication is set. 0: Disabled 1: Enabled
SYS
SYS
Procedur e 1 1
1
When "0: Disabled" is set, an Internet Fax is sent using an SMTP server.
3811
Network
Image encrypting at the Direct SMTP communication
ALL
0 <0-1>
SYS
3812
Scanner
Dummy full mode at the Internet Fax transmission
ALL
0 <0-1>
SYS
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
When "1: Enabled" is set, direct SMTP communication is enabled and an Internet Fax is sent to MFPs on the intranet without using an SMTP server. Since no SMTP server is used, the SSL encryption and SMTP-AUTH function cannot be used for internet Fax transmission. If "1: Enabled" is set in 08-3810, set "1: Enabled" in 08-3812 as well. When Direct SMTP communication is performed, an attached image is encrypted. 0: Disabled 1: Enabled When an Internet Fax is sent, the resolution ratio and the paper size of an attached image are set to the full mode. 0: Disabled 1: Enabled If "1: Enabled" is set in 08-3810, set "1: Enabled" in 08-3812 as well.
1
1
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 226 07/06
Code
Classification
3815
Scanner
Setting mode (08) Default Func- XPS file thumbnail addition ALL 1 <0-1>
RAM
Contents
SYS
Thumbnail is added to the XPS file produced by the Scan function. 0: Not added 1: Only the top page added The paper size of the XPS file produced by the Scan function is set. 0: Scanned image size 1: Standard size The version of PDF file produced by the Scan function is set. 0: PDF V1.3 1: PDF V1.4 The operation mode in the DPWS Scan function is switched. 0: Batch type 1: Serial type 0: Require eBMUserRole attribute 1: User available LDAP attribute Function to store a file in the user's home directory 0: Disabled 1: Enabled When the backup file is created from TopAccess, it is encrypted. 0: Enabled (Encryption) 1: Disabled (No encryption) 0: Old type SFB (SRA3 not supported) 1: New type SFB (SRA3 supported) The display method of the machine name shown in the eventrelated notification is switched. 0: URL 1: NetBIOS name Sets the compatibility of Enterprize OID of Trap with the old models. 0: Standard 1: Compatibility with the old models.
3816
Scanner
XPS file paper size setting
ALL
1 <0-1>
SYS
3817
Scanner
PDF file version setting
ALL
0 <0-1>
SYS
3818
Scanner
DPWS Scan operation mode
ALL
1 <0-1>
SYS
3831
Network
Mode switching for Role Based Access Control function
ALL
0 <0-1>
SYS
3833
General
Home directory function
ALL
0 <0-1>
SYS
3834
General
Backup file encryption
ALL
0 <0-1>
SYS
3835
Paper feeding
SFB switching setting (new/old)
ALL
1 <0-1>
SYS
3837
General
Display switching for the machine name shown in the notification
ALL
0 <0-1>
SYS
3845
Network
SNMP Trap Enterprize OID mode setting
ALL
0 <0-1>
SYS
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Procedur e 1
2 1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 227 07/11
Setting mode (08) Default Func- FAX mistransmission preFAX 0 vention <0-1>
Code
Classification
3847
FAX
3848
FAX
Restriction on Address Book destination setting
FAX
0 <0-1>
SYS
3849
FAX
Restriction on destination direct entry
FAX
0 <0-1>
SYS
4545
Fuser
ALL
0 <0-255>
M
4546
Transfer
Fusing error temperature (Temperature of the pressure roller rear thermistor) Position adjustment control mode setting
ALL
5 <0-5>
M
4549
Fuser
Judgment of new or used fuser unit
ALL
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
0 <0-1>
RAM
Contents
SYS
FAX mistransmission prevention function is switched. 0: OFF (Disabled) 1: ON (Enabled) Availability of destination selection from the Address Book is switched as one of FAX mistransmission prevention functions when setting FAX destinations. 0: OFF (Disabled) 1: ON (Enabled) Availability of direct entry is switched as one of FAX mistransmission prevention functions when setting FAX destinations. 0: OFF (Disabled) 1: ON (Enabled)
M
Procedur e 1
1
1
1 0: Not performed automatically 1: (a) 2: (b) 3: (a) + (b) 4: (b) + (c) 5: (a) + (b) + (c) [Description] (a) Performs the adjustment automatically at warming-up. (b) Performs the adjustment automatically when printing after a specified period of time has been completed. (c) Performs the adjustment automatically at a ready status after a specified period of time, or at a forcible interruption of large amount of printing. 0: Valid 1: Invalid
1
1
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 228 07/11
Code
Classification
4550-0
Transfer
Setting mode (08) Default Func- 1st startALL 5 Start-up time up <5-255> setting value for image position adjustment
4550-1
4551-0
Develop- Used toner ment mixing paddle setting (during printing)
4551-1
4553-0 4553-1
Paper feeding
Pausing of pushing recycled paper
4553-2 4553-3 4553-4 4554-0
4554-1
Develop- Used toner ment mixing paddles setting (during warming-up)
RAM
Contents
M
1st image position adjustment start-up time [unit: minute] automatically set when the image position adjustment has not been performed automatically at power ON, recovery from the ready status or recovery from the sleep mode. Start-up time [unit: minute] for 2nd or subsequent image position adjustment start-ups automatically set when the image position adjustment has been automatically performed after a specified period of time. 0: 600 counts 1: 1200 counts 2: 2400 counts 3: 3000 counts 4: 3600 counts 5: 6000 counts 6: 300 counts 0: Not agitated 1: Agitated for 1 sec. 2: Agitated for 2 sec. 3: Agitated for 3 sec. 4: Agitated for 4 sec. 5: Agitated for 5 sec 6: Agitated for 6 sec 0: Disabled 1: Enabled
2nd or subsequent start-ups
ALL
30 <5-255>
M
Mixing start
ALL
1 <0-6>
M
Rotation period
ALL
1 <0-6>
M
1st drawer 2nd drawer PFP upper drawer PFP lower drawer Bypass feed At normal status
ALL
1 <0-1> 1 <0-1> 1 <0-1> 1 <0-1> 1 <0-1> 1 <0-5>
M
During warmingup after used toner full status detection
ALL
2 <0-5>
M
ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Procedur e 4
2
4
4
4
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5:
Not mixing Mix for 1 second Mix for 2 seconds Mix for 3 seconds Mix for 5 seconds Mix for 8 seconds Not mixing Mix for 5 second Mix for 8 seconds Mix for 10 seconds Mix for 15 seconds Mix for 20 seconds
4
4
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 229 07/11
Code 4561 4562
4563 4564 4565
Setting mode (08) Default ClassifiFunc- Develop- Detection of the lockup of ALL 1 ment used toner mixing paddles <0-1> Transfer Time of pausing continuALL 5 ous printing for image posi<1-60> tioning Development Development General
Paper exit speed control switching Duplex reversing position correction control S-ACS level coefficient
ALL
M
0: Valid 1: Invalid Sets the time from reaching the start-up for image positioning to pausing the printing (Unit: Minute) 0: Disabled 1: Enabled 0: No correction 1: Correction
M
M
PPC (color)
0 <8 digits>
SYS
PRT (color)
0 <8 digits>
SYS
ALL ALL
Paper feeding
Paper size(SRA3) feeding/widthwise direction
ALL
4568
Paper feeding
Paper size(460mm X 320mm) feeding/widthwise direction
ALL
4569
Fuser
ALL
6018
Counter
6027-0 6027-1 6027-2 6027-3 6027-4 6027-5 6027-6 6027-7 6027-8 6027-9 6027-10 6027-11 6027-12 6027-13 6027-14 6027-15 6027-16
Counter
Fuser reverse rotation setting Count setting of special paper (PM) A3 Number of output pages A4 at Twin Color / A5 Monocolor A6 Mode in Printer Func- B4 B5 tion FOLIO LD LG LT ST COMP 13"LG 8.5"SQ 16k 8k Extra long size paper Other Large Display of number of Small output pages Total at Twin Color / Monocolor Mode in Printer Function
Counter
Contents
0 <0-1> 0 <0-1> 0 <0-99> 450/320 <148460/105320> 460/320 <148460/105320> 0 <0-1> 1 <0-1>
4567
6027-17 6078-0 6078-1 6078-2
RAM
ALL
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
M
Procedur e 1 1
1 1
M
2
M
10
M
10
M M
0: Enabled 1: Disabled 0: Counted as 1 1: Counted as 2
1 1 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 14 14 14
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 230 07/06
Code 6209-0 6209-1 6209-2
6243
6452-0
Setting mode (08) Default ClassifiFunc- During PRT 0 Develop- Counter setprinting (color) <8 digits> ment ting of used toner mixing During paddles rota- warmingtion up During warmingup after used toner full status detection Counter Counter for special paper ALL 0 <8 digits> Image processing
Threshold for detecting that Y toner cartridge is nearly empty
6452-1
6452-2
6452-3
6453-0
6453-1
6453-2
6453-3
Image processing
Threshold for detecting that M toner cartridge is nearly empty
Threshold to display the nearempty message Remaining level threshold: 75 Remaining level threshold: 50 Remaining level threshold: 25 Threshold to display the nearempty message Remaining level threshold: 75 Remaining level threshold: 50 Remaining level threshold: 25
RAM M
Contents 1 count per 1 mixing operation
Procedur e 4 4 4
M
Counts up when the registration sensor is ON in the special paper mode.
1
ALL
136800 <8 digits>
M
4
ALL
41800 <8 digits>
M
4
ALL
83600 <8 digits>
M
4
ALL
125400 <8 digits>
M
4
ALL
136800 <8 digits>
M
4
ALL
41800 <8 digits>
M
4
ALL
83600 <8 digits>
M
4
ALL
125400 <8 digits>
M
4
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 231 07/06
2
Code 6454-0
Classification Image processing
6454-1
6454-2
6454-3
6806-0
6806-1
Counter
Setting mode (08) Default Func- ALL 136800 Threshold for Threshold <8 digits> detecting that to display the nearC toner carempty tridge is message nearly empty RemainALL 41800 ing level <8 digits> threshold: 75 RemainALL 83600 ing level <8 digits> threshold: 50 ALL 125400 Remaining level <8 digits> threshold: 25 1-UP / PRT 0 Number of output pages Duplex (color) <8 digits> printing in printing / BOX printing (Twin color / 2-UP / PRT 0 Monocolor) Duplex (color) <8 digits> printing
RAM
Procedur e
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
SYS
SYS
6806-2
2-UP / Simplex printing
PRT (color)
0 <8 digits>
SYS
6806-3
4-UP / Duplex printing
PRT (color)
0 <8 digits>
SYS
6806-4
4-UP / Simplex printing
PRT (color)
0 <8 digits>
SYS
6806-5
N-UP / Duplex printing
PRT (color)
0 <8 digits>
SYS
6806-6
N-UP / Simplex printing
PRT (color)
0 <8 digits>
SYS
6806-7
1-UP / Simplex printing
PRT (color)
0 <8 digits>
SYS
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
Contents
Counts the number of output pages printed only in the twin color mode. Counts the number of output pages printed in the twin color mode using [2IN1] or [MAGAZINE SORT]. Counts the number of sheets printed in the twin color mode using [2IN1] or [MAGAZINE SORT]. Counts the number of output pages printed in the twin color mode using [4IN1]. Counts the number of sheets printed in the twin color mode using [4IN1]. Counts the number of output pages printed in the twin color mode using [N IN1]. Counts the number of sheets printed in the twin color mode using [N IN1]. Counts the number of output pages printed only in the twin color mode.
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 232
Code
Classification
6810-0
Counter
6810-1
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Number of 1-UP / PRT 0 (black) <8 digits> output pages Duplex in black mode printing / Large size PRT 0 2-UP / (black) <8 digits> Duplex printing
RAM
Contents
SYS
Counts the number of output pages printed only in the black mode. Counts the number of output pages printed in the black mode using [2IN1] or [MAGAZINE SORT]. Counts the number of sheets printed in the black mode using [2IN1] or [MAGAZINE SORT]. Counts the number of output pages printed in the black mode using [4IN1]. Counts the number of sheets printed in the black mode using [4IN1]. Counts the number of output pages printed only in the black mode. Counts the number of output pages printed only in the full color mode. Counts the number of output pages printed in the full color mode using [2IN1] or [MAGAZINE SORT]. Counts the number of sheets printed in the full color mode using [2IN1] or [MAGAZINE SORT]. Counts the number of output pages printed in the full color mode using [4IN1]. Counts the number of sheets printed in the full color mode using [4IN1]. Counts the number of output pages printed only in the full color mode.
SYS
6810-2
2-UP / Simplex printing
PRT 0 (black) <8 digits>
SYS
6810-3
4-UP / Duplex printing
PRT 0 (black) <8 digits>
SYS
6810-4
4-UP / Simplex printing
PRT 0 (black) <8 digits>
SYS
6810-7
1-UP / Simplex printing 1-UP / Duplex printing
PRT 0 (black) <8 digits>
SYS
PPC (color)
0 <8 digits>
SYS
6811-1
2-UP / Duplex printing
PPC (color)
0 <8 digits>
SYS
6811-2
2-UP / Simplex printing
PPC (color)
0 <8 digits>
SYS
6811-3
4-UP / Duplex printing
PPC (color)
0 <8 digits>
SYS
6811-4
4-UP / Simplex printing
PPC (color)
0 <8 digits>
SYS
6811-7
1-UP / Simplex printing
PPC (color)
0 <8 digits>
SYS
6811-0
Counter
Number of output pages in full color mode / Large
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Procedur e 4 4
4
4
4
4 4
4
4
4
4
4
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 233
2
Code
Classification
6812-0
Counter
6812-1
Setting mode (08) Default Func- 1-UP / PPC 0 Number of (color) <8 digits> output pages Duplex at Twin Color / printing Monocolor Mode (Large) 2-UP / PPC 0 Duplex (color) <8 digits> printing
RAM
Contents
SYS
Counts the number of output pages printed only in the twin color mode. Counts the number of output pages printed in the twin color mode using [2IN1] or [MAGAZINE SORT]. Counts the number of sheets printed in the twin color mode using [2IN1] or [MAGAZINE SORT]. Counts the number of output pages printed in the twin color mode using [4IN1]. Counts the number of sheets printed in the twin color mode using [4IN1]. Counts the number of output pages printed only in the twin color mode.
SYS
6812-2
2-UP / Simplex printing
PPC (color)
0 <8 digits>
SYS
6812-3
4-UP / Duplex printing
PPC (color)
0 <8 digits>
SYS
6812-4
4-UP / Simplex printing
PPC (color)
0 <8 digits>
SYS
6812-7
1-UP / Simplex printing
PPC (color)
0 <8 digits>
SYS
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
Procedur e 4
4
4
4
4
4
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 234
Code
Classification
6813-0
Counter
6813-1
Setting mode (08) Default Func- 1-UP / PRT 0 Number of (black) <8 digits> output pages Duplex printing of the printer or BOX / PRT 0 2-UP / Large (black) <8 digits> Duplex printing
RAM
Contents
SYS
Counts the number of output pages printed in the black mode. Counts the number of output pages printed in the black mode using [2IN1] or [MAGAZINE SORT]. Counts the number of sheets printed in the black mode using [2IN1] or [MAGAZINE SORT]. Counts the number of output pages printed in the black mode using [4IN1]. Counts the number of sheets printed in the black mode using [4IN1]. Counts the number of output pages printed in the black mode using [N IN1]. Counts the number of sheets printed in the black mode using [N IN1]. Counts the number of output pages printed only in the black mode.
SYS
6813-2
2-UP / Simplex printing
PRT 0 (black) <8 digits>
SYS
6813-3
4-UP / Duplex printing
PRT 0 (black) <8 digits>
SYS
6813-4
4-UP / Simplex printing
PRT 0 (black) <8 digits>
SYS
6813-5
N-UP / Duplex printing
PRT 0 (black) <8 digits>
SYS
6813-6
N-UP / Simplex printing
PRT 0 (black) <8 digits>
SYS
6813-7
1-UP / Simplex printing
PRT 0 (black) <8 digits>
SYS
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Procedur e 4 4
4
4
4
4
4
4
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 235
2
Code
Classification
6814-0
Counter
6814-1
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Number of 1-UP / PRT 0 (color) <8 digits> output pages Duplex of the printer printing or BOX / Large 2-UP / PRT 0 (Full color) Duplex (color) <8 digits> printing
RAM
Contents
SYS
Counts the number of output pages printed only in the full color mode. Counts the number of output pages printed in the full color mode using [2IN1] or [MAGAZINE SORT]. Counts the number of sheets printed in the full color mode using [2IN1] or [MAGAZINE SORT]. Counts the number of output pages printed in the full color mode using [4IN1]. Counts the number of sheets printed in the full color mode using [4IN1]. Counts the number of output pages printed in the full color mode using [N IN1]. Counts the number of sheets printed in the full color mode using [N IN1]. Counts the number of output pages printed only in the full color mode. Counts the number of output pages in the default settings.
SYS
6814-2
2-UP / Simplex printing
PRT (color)
0 <8 digits>
SYS
6814-3
4-UP / Duplex printing
PRT (color)
0 <8 digits>
SYS
6814-4
4-UP / Simplex printing
PRT (color)
0 <8 digits>
SYS
6814-5
N-UP / Duplex printing
PRT (color)
0 <8 digits>
SYS
6814-6
N-UP / Simplex printing
PRT (color)
0 <8 digits>
SYS
6814-7
1-UP / Simplex printing
PRT (color)
0 <8 digits>
SYS
1-UP / Simplex printing 1-UP / Duplex printing
PRT 0 (black) <8 digits>
SYS
PRT 0 (black) <8 digits>
SYS
6815-0 6815-7
Counter
Number of output pages of the FAX printing / Large
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
Procedur e 4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4 4
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 236
Code
Classification
6816-0
Counter
6816-1
Setting mode (08) Default Func- 1-UP / PRT 0 Number of (color) <8 digits> output pages Duplex printing in printing / BOX printing (Large) (Twin 2-UP / PRT 0 color / Mono- Duplex (color) <8 digits> color) printing
RAM
Contents
SYS
Counts the number of output pages printed only in the twin color mode. Counts the number of output pages printed in the twin color mode using [2IN1] or [MAGAZINE SORT]. Counts the number of sheets printed in the twin color mode using [2IN1] or [MAGAZINE SORT]. Counts the number of output pages printed in the twin color mode using [4IN1]. Counts the number of sheets printed in the twin color mode using [4IN1]. Counts the number of output pages printed in the twin color mode using [N IN1]. Counts the number of sheets printed in the twin color mode using [N IN1]. Counts the number of output pages printed only in the twin color mode.
SYS
Procedur e 4
4
6816-2
2-UP / Simplex printing
PRT (color)
0 <8 digits>
SYS
6816-3
4-UP / Duplex printing
PRT (color)
0 <8 digits>
SYS
6816-4
4-UP / Simplex printing
PRT (color)
0 <8 digits>
SYS
6816-5
N-UP / Duplex printing
PRT (color)
0 <8 digits>
SYS
6816-6
N-UP / Simplex printing
PRT (color)
0 <8 digits>
SYS
6816-7
1-UP / Simplex printing
PRT (color)
0 <8 digits>
SYS
0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits>
SYS
1
M
1
M
1
6817
Counter
Calibration counter
ALL
6900
Counter
ALL
6901
Counter
Total counter (in Thick paper decelerating mode) Total counter (in Plain paper Black Mode : e-STUDIO3510c only)
ALL
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
4
4
4
4
4
4
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 237 06/10
2
Code
Classification
6905-0
Counter
6905-1
6905-2 6905-3
6906-0
Counter
6906-1
6906-2 6906-3
6907-0
6907-1
6907-2 6907-3
Counter
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Decelerating Present ALL 0 <8 digits> mode counter: number of Photoconduc- output tive drum (K) pages Number of ALL 0 output <8 digits> pages at the last replacement ALL 0 Present <8 digits> drive counts ALL 0 Drive counts at <8 digits> the last replacement ALL 0 Present Decelerating <8 digits> mode counter: number of Photoconduc- output pages tive drum (Y) ALL 0 Number of <8 digits> output pages at the last replacement Present ALL 0 drive <8 digits> counts ALL 0 Drive <8 digits> counts at the last replacement Decelerating Present ALL 0 mode counter: number of <8 digits> Photoconduc- output tive drum (M) pages Number of ALL 0 output <8 digits> pages at the last replacement ALL 0 Present <8 digits> drive counts Drive ALL 0 counts at <8 digits> the last replacement
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
RAM
Contents
Procedur e
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 238 06/10
Code
Classification
6908-0
Counter
6908-1
6908-2 6908-3
6925-0
Counter
6925-1
6925-2 6925-3
6926-0
6926-1
6926-2 6926-3
Counter
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Decelerating Present ALL 0 <8 digits> mode counter: number of Photoconduc- output tive drum (C) pages Number of ALL 0 output <8 digits> pages at the last replacement ALL 0 Present <8 digits> drive counts ALL 0 Drive counts at <8 digits> the last replacement ALL 0 Present Decelerating <8 digits> mode counter: number of output Developer pages material (K) ALL 0 Number of <8 digits> output pages at the last replacement Present ALL 0 drive <8 digits> counts ALL 0 Drive <8 digits> counts at the last replacement Decelerating Present ALL 0 mode counter: number of <8 digits> Developer output material (Y) pages Number of ALL 0 output <8 digits> pages at the last replacement ALL 0 Present <8 digits> drive counts Drive ALL 0 counts at <8 digits> the last replacement
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
RAM
Contents
Procedur e
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 239 07/02
2
Code
Classification
6927-0
Counter
6927-1
6927-2 6927-3
6928-0
Counter
6928-1
6928-2 6928-3
6929-0
6929-1
6929-2 6929-3
Counter
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Decelerating Present ALL 0 <8 digits> mode counter: number of Developer output material (M) pages Number of ALL 0 output <8 digits> pages at the last replacement ALL 0 Present <8 digits> drive counts ALL 0 Drive counts at <8 digits> the last replacement ALL 0 Present Decelerating <8 digits> mode counter: number of output Developer pages material (C) ALL 0 Number of <8 digits> output pages at the last replacement Present ALL 0 drive <8 digits> counts ALL 0 Drive <8 digits> counts at the last replacement Present ALL 0 Decelerating <8 digits> mode counter: number of output Transfer unit pages (K) (Needle electrode / Number of ALL 0 roller / 1st output <8 digits> transfer power pages at supply roller) the last replacement ALL 0 Present <8 digits> drive counts Drive ALL 0 counts at <8 digits> the last replacement
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
RAM
Contents
Procedur e
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 240 06/10
Code
Classification
6930-0
Counter
6930-1
6930-2 6930-3
6931-0
Counter
6931-1
6931-2 6931-3
6932-0
6932-1
6932-2 6932-3
Counter
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Present ALL 0 Decelerating <8 digits> mode counter: number of output Transfer unit pages (Y) (Needle electrode / Number of ALL 0 roller / 1st output <8 digits> transfer power pages at supply roller) the last replacement ALL 0 Present <8 digits> drive counts Drive ALL 0 <8 digits> counts at the last replacement ALL 0 Present Decelerating <8 digits> mode counter: number of output Transfer unit pages (M) (Needle electrode / Number of ALL 0 roller / 1st output <8 digits> transfer power pages at supply roller) the last replacement Present ALL 0 drive <8 digits> counts ALL 0 Drive <8 digits> counts at the last replacement Present ALL 0 Decelerating <8 digits> mode counter: number of output Transfer unit pages (C) (Needle electrode / Number of ALL 0 roller / 1st output <8 digits> transfer power pages at supply roller) the last replacement ALL 0 Present <8 digits> drive counts Drive ALL 0 counts at <8 digits> the last replacement
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
RAM
Contents
Procedur e
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 241 06/10
2
Code
Classification
6933-0
Counter
6933-1
6933-2 6933-3
6935-0
Counter
6935-1
6935-2 6935-3
6950-0
6950-1
6950-2 6950-3
Counter
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Decelerating Present ALL 0 <8 digits> mode counter: number of Transfer belt output pages Number of ALL 0 output <8 digits> pages at the last replacement ALL 0 Present <8 digits> drive counts ALL 0 Drive counts at <8 digits> the last replacement ALL 0 Present Decelerating <8 digits> mode counter: number of output 2nd transfer pages roller ALL 0 Number of <8 digits> output pages at the last replacement Present ALL 0 drive <8 digits> counts ALL 0 Drive <8 digits> counts at the last replacement Accelerating Present ALL 0 mode counter: number of <8 digits> Photoconduc- output tive drum (K) pages Number of ALL 0 output <8 digits> pages at the last replacement ALL 0 Present <8 digits> drive counts Drive ALL 0 counts at <8 digits> the last replacement
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
RAM
Contents
Procedur e
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 242 07/02
Code
Classification
6955-0
Counter
6955-1
6955-2 6955-3
6956-0
Counter
6956-1
6956-2 6956-3
6960-0
6960-1
6960-2 6960-3
Counter
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Accelerating Present ALL 0 <8 digits> mode counter: number of Developer output material (K) pages Number of ALL 0 output <8 digits> pages at the last replacement ALL 0 Present <8 digits> drive counts ALL 0 Drive counts at <8 digits> the last replacement ALL 0 Present Accelerating <8 digits> mode counter: number of output Transfer unit pages (K) (Wire / roller / 1st Number of ALL 0 transfer power output <8 digits> supply roller) pages at the last replacement Present ALL 0 drive <8 digits> counts ALL 0 Drive <8 digits> counts at the last replacement Accelerating Present ALL 0 mode counter: number of <8 digits> Transfer belt output pages Number of ALL 0 output <8 digits> pages at the last replacement ALL 0 Present <8 digits> drive counts Drive ALL 0 counts at <8 digits> the last replacement
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
RAM
Contents
Procedur e
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 243
2
Code
Classification
6962-0
Counter
6962-1
6962-2 6962-3
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Accelerating Present ALL 0 <8 digits> mode counter: number of 2nd transfer output roller pages Number of ALL 0 output <8 digits> pages at the last replacement ALL 0 Present <8 digits> drive counts ALL 0 Drive counts at <8 digits> the last replacement ACS original mode default PPC 0 setting ACS (color) <0-2>
7606
Image
7612
Image
Image repeat gap
7615
Image
Text/Photo ACS black mode image quality switch- Text ing
7616 7617
Photo
ALL PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color)
RAM
Procedur e
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
SYS
5 <0-10> 0 <0-2> 0 <0-2> 0 <0-2>
SYS SYS SYS SYS
9046
General
Accelerator ASIC initialization abnormality
ALL
0 <0-2>
-
9047
General
Process control flag setting of easy setup (manual unpacking adjustment)
ALL
0 <0-2>
SYS
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
Contents
0: TEXT/PHOTO 1: TEXT 2: Printed image Unit: mm
1
Selects the method of image processing when the original is judged as black in the ACS Mode. 0: Processing for Image Smoothing 1: Processing when judging as black in the ACS Mode 0: IC26 on SYS board format error 1: IC1 on JSP board format error 2: Formatted 0: No change of manual unpacking adjustment 1: OFF status of manual unpacking adjustment flag 2: Returns to the initial unpacking mode
1
1
1 1
2
1
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 244
Code 9059
Classification Maintenance
9117
General
9185
User interface
9359
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Operation switching at caliALL 0 bration <0-2>
Raw printing job Do not Print Blank Pages Media types usable for APS
ALL
User interface User interface
Printing resume after jam releasing AES data encryption function setting (Except for CND)
ALL
9381
General
Custom size (Photo size) Feeding / Widthwise
ALL
9382
Image
Erasing leading edge shade on A3-wide (fullpage copying)
ALL
9379
ALL
ALL
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
RAM
Contents
SYS
Switches the engine operation and UI display before printing the gamma correction pattern at the calibration (image processing gamma automatic adjustment). 0: Not performing process image quality control before printing the gamma correction pattern. 1: Performing process image quality control (No paper selecting buttons displayed) 2: Performing process image quality control (The paper selecting buttons are displayed on a screen for printing the printer gamma correction pattern.) 0: OFF 1: ON 1: Plain paper 2: Recycled paper 3: Plain & recycled paper 0: Auto resume 1: Resume by users 0: Encryption invalid 1: Encryption valid (Security priority) Encrypts all of the user's data. 2: Encryption valid (Performance priority) Encrypts the user's data except the files temporarily created and deleted in the image processing such as copying or printing. Feeding Widthwise
0 <0-1> 3 <1-3>
SYS
0 <0-1> 0 <0-2>
SYS
148 <10-434> 100 <10-300> 0 <0-1>
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
0: Whole page copied (No void) 1: Leading edge masked
Procedur e 1
2
1 1
1 1
10
1
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 245 07/09
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Default E-mail file format ALL 1 (Color/ACS mode) <0-8>
Code
Classification
9384
Network
9394
Network
Single-page option for storing File and sending Email
ALL
0 <0-1>
SYS
9629
Network
Attribute name for LDAP Role Based Access
ALL
SYS
9698
User interface Maintenance
Color mode notification setting at ACS PPC-ACC media type setting
ALL
eBMUser R <-> 0 <0-1> 1 <0-1>
9739
Maintenance
Remote service Toner-end notification
ALL
0 <0-2>
SYS
9789
General
Default repeat count
ALL
SYS
9811
Finisher
Upper limit number of sheets stapled in one go
ALL
2 <2-8> 0 <0-2>
9814
General
9815
General
Number of output pages for pausing continuous printing for 2nd transfer resistance detection control
9737
ALL
RAM SYS
SYS SYS
SYS
At normal temperature
ALL
4 <0-100>
SYS
At low temperature
ALL
10 <0-100>
SYS
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
Contents 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: 0: 1:
TIFF (Multi) PDF (Multi) JPG TIFF (Single) PDF (Single) SLIM PDF (Multi) SLIM PDF (Single) XPS (Multi) XPS (Single) Sets 1 page as 1 file Makes a file based on the original
Procedur e 1
1 11
0: Color 1: Black 0: Switch of plain and recycle paper prohibited 1: Switch of plain and recycle paper accepted 0: RDMS toner empty notified immediately 1: RDMS toner empty notified once a day 2: RDMS toner empty not notified Unit: times 0: 50/30/15 sheets (64-80g/m2) 1: 30/15/10 sheets (81-105g/m2 : MJ-1011) 2: 24/15/10 sheets (81-105g/m2 : MJ-1030) (Short/Long/Saddle) When the setting value of this code is "1" or higher, the 2nd transfer resistance detection is performed every time the number of pages of (setting value X 100) have output. When the setting value of this code is "1" or higher, the 2nd transfer resistance detection is performed every time the number of pages of (setting value X 10) have output.
1 1
1
1 1
1
1
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 246 07/06
Code
Classification
9819
General
Items STAGE SSL
Setting mode (08) Default Func- ALL 1 <0-1>
Procedur e
RAM
Contents
SYS
When remote scanning is performed, the SSL communication is carried out. 0: Disabled 1: Enabled (SSL communication) When remote scanning is performed using SSL communication, the SSL port number is set. 0: Black 1: Gray scale 0: Invalid 1: Valid 0: Batch 1: Sequential Decide the default limitation setting when the new department code is created. 0: No limit 1: Limited only in the black mode 2: Limited in the color mode 3: Limited in the black/ color mode 0: Invalid 1: Valid Displays no icons 1: ADMIN 2: USER 0 to 31
1
1 byte 00000000(0)01111111(127) From the 2nd bit - Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday, Saturday 0: All files search mode 1: Performance priority mode 0: Comma 1: Full stop
1
2
9822
General
STAGE SSL port number
ALL
20443 <065535>
SYS
9825
Image
ALL
General
ALL
9828
General
Remote scanning mode
ALL
9829
General
Department management limitation setting
ALL
0 <0-1> 0 <0-1> 1 <0-1> 0 <0-3>
SYS
9826
Image quality of the black part in the ACS mode Disabling Media File Save
9847
Finisher
Hole punching setting
ALL
SYS
9848
General
Registration disclosure level setting
ALL
0 <0-1> 1 <0-2>
9880
General
ALL
General
0 <0-31> 0 <0-127>
SYS
9881
Total counter data transmission date 2 Day of the total counter data transmission
9882
General
Display mode of the used capacity on the e-Filing administrator page
ALL
1 <0-1>
SYS
9886
General
Decimal point indication for Enhanced Scan Template
ALL
SYS
9888
General
ALL
SYS
0: Prohibited 1: Accepted
1
9889
General
Permission setting for changing the scan parameter when recalling an extension Status display of the USB data cloning permission
EUR: 0 UC: 1 JPN: 1 <0-1> 0 <0-1> 1 <0-1>
SYS
0: Accepted 1: Prohibited
2
ALL
ALL
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
SYS SYS SYS
SYS
SYS
1
1 1 1 1
1 1 1
1
1
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 247 07/06
Code
Classification
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Warning message on the ALL 1 <0-1> touch panel when PM (Periodic Maintenance) time has come Monocolor counting ALL 0 method <0-2>
9891
User interface
9892
General
9893
General
Limitation Monocolor counting method
ALL
9894
General
Calibration chart charging method
ALL
9897
Image
Default value setting of background peak adjustment (Black)
9898
Image
9899
Image
Contents
SYS
0: No warning notification 1: Warning notification
1
SYS
Sets the counting method of fee charging or duplexing count in the Monocolor mode. Department and user counters are not applicable. 0: Mono/Twin Color 1: Black 2: Full Color 0: Count as color 1: Count as black
1
Decide whether the calibration chart printing is charged or not 0: No charge 1: Charge 1: -4 2: -3 3: -2 4: -1 5: 0 6: +1 7: +2 8: +3 9: +4 1: -5 2: -4 3: -3 4: -2 5: -1 6: 0 7: +1 8: +2 9: +3 10: +4 11: +5 1: -5 2: -4 3: -3 4: -2 5: -1 6: 0 7: +1 8: +2 9: +3 10: +4 11: +5
1
EUR: 0 UC: 0 JPN: 1 <0-1> 0 <0-1>
SYS
ALL
5 <1-9>
SYS
Default value setting of density in the scan mode (Color)
ALL
6 <1-11>
SYS
Default value setting of density in the scan mode (Gray)
ALL
6 <1-11>
SYS
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
Procedur e
RAM
SYS
1
1
1
1
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 248 07/06
Code
Classification
9934-0
General
9934-1
General
9934-2
General
9945
Version
9946
General
9947
General
9950
General
9952
General
Setting mode (08) Default Func- S-ACS opera- Copy ALL 9 tion setting <1-9> Print ALL 9 <1-9> Box, ALL 9 Others <1-9>
Converter board ROM version Number of Email transmission retries Email transmission retry interval EFI controller setting confirmation Restore setting of the EFI controller
Procedur e
RAM
Contents
SYS
1: The number of contact control: 1 Continuous color control: 1 sheet 2: The number of contact control: 2 Continuous color control: 2 sheets 3: The number of contact control: 3 Continuous color control: 3 sheets 4: The number of contact control: 4 Continuous color control: 4 sheets 5: The number of contact control: 5 Continuous color control: 5 sheets 6: The number of contact control: 6 Continuous color control: 6 sheets 7: The number of contact control: 7 Continuous color control: 7 sheets 8: The number of contact control: 8 Continuous color control: 8 sheets 9: The number of contact control: 9 Continuous color control: 9 sheets CNV-xxx
2
SYS SYS
4 4 4
ALL
-
-
ALL
3 <0-14> 1 <0-15> 0 <0-1>
SYS
0 to 14 times
1
SYS
0 to 15 min.
1
SYS
0: Not initialized 1: Initializing completed -
2
ALL ALL ALL
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
-
-
3
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 249 07/11
2
Note: In this equipment, a toner image is formed on the transfer belt prior to a paper feeding. When the feeding retry occurs and the transport timing is delayed, the toner image on the transfer belt is cleaned off without the 2nd transfer since the paper cannot be reached for the 2nd transfer process. After that, the toner image formation is retried while the paper is waited. In this case, the toner for this image formation is consumed wastefully since the toner image on the transfer belt is already cleaned off, even though the printing is normally completed. Therefore, note that the excessive toner will be consumed consequently when the upper limit value of feeding retry counter is set larger or set as "0" (no limit). The toner is also consumed wastefully when the paper misfeeding occurs. Replace the roller at earlier timing if the paper misfeedings have occurred frequently.
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
© 2006 - 2008 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 250
<>(Chap. 2.2.6) Note: In the pixel counter function, the twin color copy mode is regarded as the full color mode.